You are on page 1of 548

WEB LCT

ALCplus2e
Ethernet Enhanced functionality
ALS series equipment with ALCplus2e IDU
management software application
Release 1.9.0

User manual

MN.00268.E - 012

The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e
Contents

MANUAL CONTENT ................................................................................................................. 19

WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 20
FUNCTIONALITIES .............................................................................................................. 22
LIMITS.............................................................................................................................. 23
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 24

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE..................................................................... 25
OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE ......................................................................................... 26
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection) ............................................. 26
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (USB connection) ................................................... 27
Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT ........................................................................... 27
Open more WEB LCT pages............................................................................................ 28
Close the WEB LCT page................................................................................................ 28
ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE ........................................................................................ 29
Equipment Menu area ................................................................................................... 30
Equipment info area...................................................................................................... 31
Users area ................................................................................................................... 33
User Profile parameter............................................................................................. 33
[Logged Users] parameter ....................................................................................... 33
Verify the users connected to the equipment ........................................................ 34
Force the logout of a user .................................................................................. 34
[Logout] parameter ................................................................................................ 35
[Open Far End] parameter ....................................................................................... 35
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link) ............................................ 35
[Help] parameter.................................................................................................... 35
Remote elements list area ............................................................................................. 36
Add a station to the list ........................................................................................... 37
Rename a station of the list ..................................................................................... 37
Remove a station of the list...................................................................................... 38
Add equipment to the list......................................................................................... 38
Remove equipment from the list ............................................................................... 39

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

1

Reset the remote equipment list ............................................................................... 39
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link) .................................... 39
Remote equipment list (info) .................................................................................... 40
Contextual area............................................................................................................ 41
Equipment status area .................................................................................................. 42
Verify the active manual operations .......................................................................... 43
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ............................................................... 43
MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE ....................................................................... 45

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU) ......................................................................... 46
MAIN ................................................................................................................................ 47
Equipment Properties .................................................................................................... 48
Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.) ................................ 48
Modify the equipment identifier ................................................................................ 48
Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment .......................................... 48
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC .......... 49
Verify the equipment addresses ................................................................................ 49
Verify the equipment feature .................................................................................... 49
Enable a new equipment feature ............................................................................... 49
Verify the equipment units ....................................................................................... 50
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 50
Equipment Properties contextual area........................................................................ 51
General Info tab ............................................................................................... 51
Network tab ..................................................................................................... 52
Equipment Feature tab ...................................................................................... 52
Equipment Units tab.......................................................................................... 53
Port Configuration & ACL ............................................................................................... 54
Verify/modify the Ethernet port configuration ............................................................. 54
Verify/modify the LCT PPP port configuration .............................................................. 56
Verify/modify the Radio port configuration ................................................................. 57
Verify/modify the Radio 1A port configuration............................................................. 58
Verify/modify the Radio 2A port configuration............................................................. 58
Verify/modify the Line EOC port configuration............................................................. 59
Verify/modify the IP Over OSI port configuration ........................................................ 60
Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List....................................................... 61
Add a rule to the IP Access Control List...................................................................... 61
Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List ............................................................ 62
Enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List..................................................... 62
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 62
Port Configuration & ACL contextual area ................................................................... 63
Ethernet tab..................................................................................................... 63
LCT PPP tab ..................................................................................................... 64
Radio tab ......................................................................................................... 65
Radio 1A tab .................................................................................................... 66
Radio 2A tab .................................................................................................... 66
Line EOC tab .................................................................................................... 67
IP Over OSI tab ................................................................................................ 67

2

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

NSAP tab ......................................................................................................... 68
ACL tab ........................................................................................................... 69
Available of the communication port.......................................................................... 70
IP Access Control List (info) ..................................................................................... 72
Routing Table............................................................................................................... 73
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment ...................... 73
Add an element to the Routing Table ......................................................................... 73
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table ................................................ 74
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway .................................................... 74
Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway .......................................................... 74
Routing Table contextual area .................................................................................. 75
Routing Table and Default Gateway (info) .................................................................. 76
Stored Routing Table .................................................................................................... 77
Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory
of the controller...................................................................................................... 77
Add an element into the Stored Routing Table ............................................................ 77
Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table ...................................... 78
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table .......... 78
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table ................. 78
Stored Routing Table contextual area ........................................................................ 79
Performance Monitoring................................................................................................. 80
Verify the status of the PM measures......................................................................... 80
Activate a PM measure ............................................................................................ 81
Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously .............................................. 81
Deactivate a PM measure......................................................................................... 81
Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously ............................................ 82
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms................................................ 82
Reset the values of the records daily and primary ....................................................... 84
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms........................................................................ 85
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms..................................... 85
Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (G828 E1 Line Side/
G828 E1 Internal Side) ............................................................................................ 91
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio) .................................... 92
Performance Monitoring contextual area .................................................................... 93
PM measures ......................................................................................................... 94
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>.................................................................. 94
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> ............................................................. 94
G828 Radio <radio branch> ............................................................................... 95
G828 E1 Line Side............................................................................................. 95
G828 E1 Internal Side ....................................................................................... 96
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>....................... 96
ACM Radio <radio branch> ................................................................................ 97
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> .............................................................................. 98
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> .............................................................................. 98
PM measures (info) ................................................................................................. 99
Report & Loggers Maint. ...............................................................................................100
Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users to file .......100
Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller ...............................................100
Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller .....................................101

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

3

Report & Loggers Maint. contextual area ...................................................................102
Report WEB page...................................................................................................103
SNTP & Wake Up Config. ..............................................................................................104
Verify the SNTP functionality ...................................................................................104
Set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality ................................104
Disable the SNTP functionality .................................................................................105
Verify the Wake Up functionality status.....................................................................105
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality ...........................105
Disable the Wake Up functionality ............................................................................106
SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area ..................................................................107
SNTP tab ........................................................................................................107
Wake Up tab ...................................................................................................108
SNTP functionality (info) .........................................................................................109
Wake Up functionality (info) ....................................................................................110
SD Memory Management..............................................................................................111
Verify the status and the configuration of the SD .......................................................111
Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU ...........111
Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD ...............................113
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD.............................114
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD ......................................................114
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after
an automatic sw update from SD .............................................................................114
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD
to the controller.....................................................................................................114
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD) ..............................114
SD Memory Management contextual area .................................................................115
SD memory card (info) ...........................................................................................117
Storing the equipment data into SD....................................................................117
Use of the SD for the equipment management .....................................................117
Commands for the management/maintenance of SD.............................................118
Warnings about the correct use of SD card ..........................................................119
Software Info & Maint. .................................................................................................120
Verify the firmware version of the equipment ............................................................120
Update the firmware of the equipment......................................................................120
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller.......................121
Verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment ..............................................122
Update the WEB LCT application ..............................................................................122
Verify the communication stack in use ......................................................................122
Modify the communication stack in use .....................................................................122
Restore Factory Default of the equipment .................................................................123
Execute the equipment software reset ......................................................................123
Software Info & Maint contextual area ......................................................................124
Equipment Firmware tab ...................................................................................124
Web LCT tab ...................................................................................................125
IP/OSI stack switch tab ....................................................................................125
Equipment firmware (info) ......................................................................................126
Factory Default of the equipment (info) ....................................................................127
Backup/Restore Config. ................................................................................................128
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration) ..................................128

4

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)...............128
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before
the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration) ..................................129
Backup/Restore Config. contextual area....................................................................130
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info) .................................................131
Security Config............................................................................................................132
Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3) .................132
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode .................................................133
Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode ...........................................133
Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode) ....134
Configure the SSH protocol .....................................................................................134
Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol ...........................................................135
Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol ...........................................................136
Update the certificates (HTTPS) ...............................................................................136
Migrate from FTP protocol to SFTP protocol ...............................................................136
Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c) ....................................................137
Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3) ................................................................137
Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol ...............................................................137
Change the FTP access credentials ...........................................................................138
Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol ..............................................138
Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol ..............................................139
Security Config. contextual area ..............................................................................140
Security (info) .......................................................................................................143
SSH protocol (info) ................................................................................................144
Installation and configuration of SSH server ........................................................144
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).....................................................................................146
FTP/SFTP protocol (info) .........................................................................................149
SNMP protocol (info) ..............................................................................................150
Alarm Severity Config. .................................................................................................152
Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms .....................152
Enable/disable an alarm .........................................................................................152
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .................................................152
Change the severity level of an alarm .......................................................................153
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area .....................................................................154
Alarms (info).........................................................................................................155
User Manager .............................................................................................................156
Verify the user list .................................................................................................156
Add a user to the list..............................................................................................156
Modify a user into the list........................................................................................157
Delete a user from the list ......................................................................................157
Change the password and the timeout of the System user...........................................157
Change the network password and timeout ...............................................................158
Change the password and the timeout of the NMS5UX user .........................................158
Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login .......................................................159
User Manager contextual area .................................................................................160
User Manager SNMP-V3................................................................................................161
Verify the SNMPv3 user list .....................................................................................161
Add a SNMPv3 user................................................................................................161
Modify a SNMPv3 user ............................................................................................162

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

5

Delete a SNMPv3 user ............................................................................................163
User Manager SNMP-V3 contextual area ...................................................................164
User list (info) .......................................................................................................165
Users list management (SNMPv1/v2c) ................................................................165
Users list management (SNMPv3) ......................................................................166
EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................................168
Configurator ...............................................................................................................169
Verify/modify the radio configuration........................................................................171
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality ...............................172
Verify/modify the management of the PWE3 function..................................................173
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation .....................................................173
Verify/modify the management of STM-1 ..................................................................174
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH
and SDH ring ........................................................................................................174
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality...........................................175
Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet
traffic concatenation) .............................................................................................175
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node..............................................175
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet
nodal Bus (Ethernet elements) ................................................................................176
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with TDM nodal Bus
(TDM elements).....................................................................................................176
Verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the node ............................................177
Verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node .......................................177
Verify/modify the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node ....................................177
Verify/modify the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1s ..................................178
Verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports
(Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU)
of the other IDUs of the node ..................................................................................178
Configurator contextual area ...................................................................................180
Configurator tab ..............................................................................................180
Tributary A-B Mapping tab ................................................................................183
Nodal Port Based VLan tab ................................................................................183
Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info) .............185
BW & Mod./Link ID ......................................................................................................186
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation.....................................................................186
Modify the reference band/modulation ......................................................................187
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation...............................................187
Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) ......................................187
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) .....188
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled) ........................................188
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams).........................188
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)....................188
Verify/modify the link identification number ..............................................................189
Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1..............................................................189
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area ..........................................................................190
Modulation & Capacity tab.................................................................................190
Local Link ID tab..............................................................................................191
Extra TDM Priority tab ......................................................................................192
Adaptive modulation (info)......................................................................................194

6

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Ethernet transport ...........................................................................................194
TDM transport .................................................................................................194
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (TDM Capacity) ...........................................195
Multiple ACM profiles per modulation ..................................................................196
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter ....................................196
General Preset ............................................................................................................197
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception ..........................................197
Verify/modify the radio branch label .........................................................................197
Verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol ...........................198
Verify/modify the enabling status of the switch in transmission ....................................198
Verify/modify the T and N parameters ......................................................................198
Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm..........................................................199
Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function ............................199
Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN ...........................................................199
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM) ..........................199
General Preset contextual area ................................................................................201
General tab.....................................................................................................201
MCM tab .........................................................................................................202
Local/remote synchronization protocol (info) .............................................................203
MCM functionality (info)..........................................................................................204
Xpic ...........................................................................................................................205
Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function .............................................205
Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch ............................................205
Restore the XPIC function of the single branch...........................................................205
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) .............................................206
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection ........................................................206
Xpic contextual area...............................................................................................207
XPIC function (info) ...............................................................................................208
STM1 Bulk Config. .......................................................................................................209
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 Bulk function ...................................................209
STM1 Bulk Config. contextual area ...........................................................................210
STM-1 Bulk function (info) ......................................................................................211
SYNCHRONISATION...........................................................................................................212
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 and T4 synchronism ......................................212
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ......................................................................213
Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted ............................................213
Enable/disable the T4 Squelch.......................................................................................213
Set the Hold Off Time parameter ...................................................................................213
Set the WTR Time parameter ........................................................................................214
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm.........................................................................214
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism .......214
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism ..................215
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources..........................................215
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source...............................................................215
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source ...............................................................216
Force the use of a synchronism source ...........................................................................216
Set a synchronism source as preferential ........................................................................217
Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input.............................................217
Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input .........................218

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

7

Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input...............218
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source................................219
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting
for the expiry of Wait Time ...........................................................................................219
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input)
of tributary A/B ...........................................................................................................220
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation .............220
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources..221
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as
synchronism sources....................................................................................................221
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN..................................222
Synchronisation contextual area ....................................................................................223
General tab...........................................................................................................223
T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab .............................................................................................225
E1 Source Type tab................................................................................................227
E1 Retiming tab.....................................................................................................228
T2/T3 E1 SA Bit / 1000Base-T Role tab.....................................................................228
LAN SSM Enabling tab ............................................................................................229
Synchronisation (info) ..................................................................................................230
Management of synchronisation...............................................................................230
Synchronism sources .............................................................................................230
Enabling of the synchronism sources ..................................................................234
Configuration of the synchronism sources ...........................................................234
Priority of the synchronism source......................................................................234
Quality of synchronism source ...........................................................................235
Forcing of a synchronism source ........................................................................237
Function of preferential synchronism source ........................................................237
Internal synchronism T0 .........................................................................................237
Synchronism in output T4 .......................................................................................237
Synchronism in output T12 .....................................................................................238
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ....238
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the base board (tributary A and B) .....238
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the expansion (tributary 1...n) ...........239
BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................241
Ethernet Switch (Enh.) .................................................................................................242
Common Parameters..............................................................................................243
Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field ......................................243
Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet .......................................243
Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table .....................................244
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table ...................244
Display the MAC Table ......................................................................................244
Reset the MAC Table ........................................................................................245
Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch ....................................................245
Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality ..........................246
Verify the existing virtual LANs ..........................................................................246
Create a virtual Lan..........................................................................................246
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan..............................................................247
Delete a virtual Lan ..........................................................................................247
Verify/modify the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets ...............................248
Verify/modify the status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality .............................248

8

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Verify/modify the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets ......................................249
Common Parameters contextual area .................................................................250
General tab ...............................................................................................250
Virtual Lan Config. tab ................................................................................251
LLF tab .....................................................................................................252
Radio Packet Fragm. tab .............................................................................252
IEEE 1588 Pass Through tab........................................................................253
Virtual LAN (info) .............................................................................................254
1588 Pass Through functionality (info) ................................................................256
Priority towards LAN ports ......................................................................................257
Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its 802.1p Tag ........257
Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field .257
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from
the LANs to the output queue ............................................................................258
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from
the LANs which, in output, the Tag is added to.....................................................258
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LANs ........................258
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
of the LANs .....................................................................................................259
Priority towards LAN ports contextual area ..........................................................260
Native 802.1p tab ......................................................................................260
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab...............................................................................260
Priority Management tab .............................................................................261
Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab.......................................................................262
Priority towards Radio ports ....................................................................................263
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native
802.1p Tag .....................................................................................................263
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native
MPLS priority Tag.............................................................................................263
Verify/modify the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority
of the packets if input from LANs and in output from Radio ports............................264
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its
PTOS/DSCP field ..............................................................................................264
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input
from the LANs to the output queue of the Radio ports ...........................................264
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority...................................265
Priority towards Radio ports contextual area ........................................................266
Native 802.1p/MPLS tab..............................................................................266
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab ........................................................................267
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab...............................................................................267
Priority Management tab .............................................................................268
Compression .........................................................................................................269
Verify/modify the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets in input
from LANs.......................................................................................................269
Compression contextual area.............................................................................270
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.) ...................................................272
Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN .............................................................273
Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN .............................274
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation
is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN .............274
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN ...................................274
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN .......275
Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN.............................275

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

9

Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port .......................276
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN ....................................................276
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN .............276
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles
of the line synchronism for the LAN ..........................................................................276
Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN ...............................................................277
Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN ............................................................277
Create a PIRL instance for the LAN...........................................................................277
Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN .................................................................278
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN ............................................................................278
Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN ............................................................................279
Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from
the LAN ................................................................................................................279
Verify the current management modality of protocol 802.1Q .......................................281
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the
output queue of the Radio ports...............................................................................282
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority ........................................283
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN ...............................283
Verify/modify the Service Tag List table ....................................................................283
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
of the LAN ............................................................................................................284
Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN...........................................................285
Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value ................................................285
Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input
from the LAN ........................................................................................................285
Verify/modify the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge) ...............................286
Verify/modify the management of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN in selective mode .............................................................................................................286
Verify/modify the management of Tag of the packets (in origin without Tag) in input from the
LAN .....................................................................................................................287
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to the
Radio, with a different VID ......................................................................................287
Verify/modify the value of S-VID added to the packets in input to the LAN (independently from
the presence of the Tag).........................................................................................288
Verify the list of VIDs registered in VLAN Table Unit and associated to the LAN ..............288
Verify/modify the management of the LAN in Provider mode........................................289
Verify/modify the transit of Untagged packets via LAN (802.1q - Secure) ......................289
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN ...................289
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol ...........................290
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN ...............................................290
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP) .........................................................290
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP) ..............................................291
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection ..........................291
Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN ..............................................291
Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode.......................................292
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN ...........................................................292
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN .........293
Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN....................................................293
Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN) ............................................293
Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN).............................................................294
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)........................................................294

10

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)............................................................295
Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN) ..........................................................295
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.) contextual area .......................296
Interface tab ...................................................................................................296
Rate Limiter tab...............................................................................................298
Input Filter Policing tab.....................................................................................299
Priority Management tab ...................................................................................301
802.1Q Management tab...................................................................................303
Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab ............................................................................307
Port Based VLAN tab ........................................................................................307
STP/ELP Trunking tab .......................................................................................307
LLF tab ...........................................................................................................310
Line Loop tab ..................................................................................................310
Laser Control tab .............................................................................................310
PIRL function (info) ................................................................................................312
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info) .........................................................................313
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info) ........................................................................314
Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment) ...................................314
Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)...................................................315
Trunking mode (info) .............................................................................................317
Ethernet Trunking mode (LANs) .........................................................................317
Radio Trunking mode (Radio port - Port A) ..........................................................317
Bidirectional LLF (info)............................................................................................318
Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.) ..........................................................................................319
Verify/modify the enabling status of the Radio port ....................................................320
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for
the Radio port .......................................................................................................320
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the Radio port
to the output queue of the LANs ..............................................................................321
Verify/modify the value for Port Default ....................................................................321
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the Radio port.......................321
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the Radio port ..........................322
Verify/modify the enabling status of the S_Gentle functionality of the Radio port ............322
Verify/modify the integration constant on the drop possibility in a RED context (Radio port) .
322
Verify/modify the configuration of the output queues of the Radio port .........................322
Verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the Radio port ....325
Force the value of VID of the Radio port to the default value .......................................326
Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the Radio port..................................................326
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the Radio port and forwarded to
a LAN, with a different C-VID ..................................................................................326
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the Radio port ..........327
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol ..................327
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the Radio port.......................................328
Verify/modify the priority of the Radio port (STP) .......................................................328
Verify/modify the connection cost of the Radio port (STP) ...........................................328
Verify the status of the Radio port in relation to the Trunking mode ..............................328
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the Radio port ..................................................329
Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.) contextual area ..............................................................330
Interface tab ...................................................................................................330

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

11

Priority Management tab ...................................................................................330
Queue Management Lan To Radio tab .................................................................331
802.1Q Management tab...................................................................................333
Port Based VLan tab .........................................................................................334
STP tab ..........................................................................................................334
STP/Trunking tab .............................................................................................335
Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................337
Verify/modify the STP version .................................................................................337
Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets........................................337
Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval ..................................................................338
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets ...........................................338
Verify the status of the ports in relation to the STP or ELP ...........................................338
Verify the MAC Address of a Bridge ..........................................................................338
Verify/modify the priority of a Bridge........................................................................338
Spanning Tree contextual area ................................................................................339
Setting tab......................................................................................................339
Summary tab ..................................................................................................339
Bridges tab .....................................................................................................341
Ring Protection............................................................................................................342
Verify the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances ................342
Change the configuration of the parameters common to the two ERP instances ..............342
Verify the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance ............343
Change the configuration of the parameters relevant to every single ERP instance..........343
Enable/disable the Ring Protection modality for an ERP instance...................................344
Enable/disable the manual commands to block a port of an ERP instance ......................345
Restore manually the RPL link for an ERP instance .....................................................345
Restore the factory values for the parameters of an ERP instance .................................345
Verify to which ERP instance the traffic of each equipment VLAN is routed .....................346
Associate a VLAN to an ERP instance ........................................................................346
Ring Protection contextual area ...............................................................................347
Common tab ...................................................................................................347
Ring 1 and Ring 2 tabs .....................................................................................348
VLan/Ring Binding tab ......................................................................................349
TDM Tributaries...........................................................................................................350
E1 .......................................................................................................................351
Verify the status and configuration of the E1s ......................................................351
Modify the label of an E1...................................................................................351
Activate/deactivate the E1 use...........................................................................351
Activate/deactivate the E1 loops ........................................................................352
Modify the management status of LOS alarm .......................................................352
E1 contextual area ...........................................................................................353
STM-1 ..................................................................................................................354
Lim A STM-1 [x] ..............................................................................................355
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1...........................................................355
Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and internal side)............355
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte .......................356
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace
Identifier ..................................................................................................356
Verify the STM-1 alarms .............................................................................356
Verify/modify the B2 Signal Degrade alarm threshold......................................357

12

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Verify/modify the B2 Excessive BER alarm threshold .......................................357
Verify the status and configuration of the laser ..............................................357
Modify the enabling status of the laser ..........................................................358
Modify the transmission mode of the laser .....................................................358
Enable manually the laser transmission.........................................................359
Execute the test laser functioning status .......................................................359
Verify/modify the transport status of the bytes of SOH frame on an E1
Radio channel............................................................................................359
Lim A STM-1 contextual area .......................................................................361
Settings tab ........................................................................................361
Thresholds tab ....................................................................................362
Laser Control tab ................................................................................362
SOH Transport tab ..............................................................................363
VC-4 ....................................................................................................................364
Lim A VC-4 [x] ................................................................................................365
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte .......................365
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J1 Trace
Identifier ..................................................................................................365
Verify the VC-4 alarms................................................................................366
Verify/modify the B3 Signal Degrade alarm threshold......................................366
Verify/modify the B3 Excessive BER alarm threshold .......................................366
Verify/modify the Signal Label value .............................................................366
Lim A VC-4 contextual area .........................................................................368
J1/Alarms tab .....................................................................................368
B3/Signal Label tab ............................................................................. 368
VC-12 ..................................................................................................................370
VC-12 Thresholds ............................................................................................371
Verify/modify the VC-12 Signal Degrade alarm threshold.................................371
Verify/modify the VC-12 Excessive BER alarm threshold ..................................371
VC-12 Thresholds contextual area ................................................................372
Lim A VC-12 [x]...............................................................................................373
Verify the alarms status of the VC-12 ...........................................................373
Verify/modify the enabling status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12 .......373
Verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace
Identifier of a VC-12...................................................................................373
Verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12 .............................................374
Lim A VC-12 contextual area .......................................................................375
Lim A VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window ...........................................375
Cross Connection.........................................................................................................377
Cross Connection ...................................................................................................378
Display the connections of the equipment ...........................................................378
Execute an unprotected Tributary-Radio connection..............................................378
Execute a protected Tributary-Radio connection ...................................................379
Execute a Pass Through connection ....................................................................379
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ............................................................380
Delete one or more connections .........................................................................380
Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ............................................381
Disable an Auto-Loop .......................................................................................381
Modify the connection label ...............................................................................381
Verify the status and the configuration of a protected connection ...........................382
Modify the modality used to manage the switch in the protected connection ............382
Modify the modality used to manage the preferential connection ............................383

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

13

Modify the Wait Time parameter (protected connection)........................................383
Force the switch on preferential connection without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration .......................................................................................................383
Modify the structure of the Radio E1 involved by a connection................................384
Cross Connection contextual area ......................................................................385
Matrix area ...............................................................................................385
List area ...................................................................................................388
Cross connection matrix (info) ...........................................................................390
TDM matrix ...............................................................................................390
Connection Type ........................................................................................390
E1 channels ..............................................................................................390
Display of the cross-connections ..................................................................394
Creation of a cross-connection .....................................................................395
Manual deletion of the cross-connections.......................................................395
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections ..................................................395
Cross Connection (PWE3 function enable) .................................................................396
Display the connections of the equipment (PWE3) ................................................396
Execute a Tributary-PWE3 connection (PWE3)......................................................396
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection (PWE3) .................................................397
Delete one or more connections (PWE3) .............................................................397
Enable the closing of a tributary channel on itself (Auto-Loop) (PWE3) ....................397
Disable an Auto-Loop (PWE3) ............................................................................398
Modify the connection label (PWE3) ....................................................................398
Cross Connection contextual area (PWE3) ...........................................................399
Matrix area (PWE3) ....................................................................................399
List area (PWE3) ........................................................................................401
Cross connection matrix (PWE3) (info)................................................................403
Matrix (PWE3) ...........................................................................................403
Connection Type (PWE3).............................................................................403
E1 channels (PWE3) ...................................................................................403
Display of the cross-connections (PWE3) .......................................................404
Creation of a cross-connection (PWE3)..........................................................404
Manual deletion of the cross-connections (PWE3) ...........................................404
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections (PWE3) .......................................404
Radio E1 Framing ........................................................................................................406
Verify/modify the structure of the Radio E1s..............................................................406
Radio E1 Framing contextual area ............................................................................407
PWE3.........................................................................................................................408
Verify the existing PWE3 Bundles and PWE3 channels .................................................408
Create a PWE3 Bundle ............................................................................................408
Activate the Provider modality for all the Bundles.......................................................409
Deactivate the Provider modality for all the Bundles ...................................................410
Modify the configuration of a PWE3 Bundle ................................................................410
Delete a PWE3 Bundle ............................................................................................411
Associate one or more PWE3 channels to a Bundle .....................................................411
Modify the configuration of a PWE3 channel...............................................................412
Delete one or more PWE3 channel ...........................................................................413
PWE3 contextual area ............................................................................................414
PWE3 function (info) ..............................................................................................418
RADIO .............................................................................................................................421

14

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Radio Branch ..............................................................................................................422
Verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment ........422
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier .................................................423
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter ...........................................................423
Verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply....................................................423
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) .............................................424
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) .........................................424
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC ........................................................424
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter...............................425
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation..........................................................425
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device ..........................................................425
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every
ACM profile ...........................................................................................................426
Radio Branch contextual area ..................................................................................427
Settings tab ....................................................................................................427
Powers tab......................................................................................................428
MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................429
Lan Statistics ..............................................................................................................430
Verify the counters of the Ethernet ports subdivided by each port ................................430
Reset the counters’ results ......................................................................................430
Activate/deactivate the division by 1000 of the counter results ....................................430
Lan Statistics contextual area ..................................................................................431
Lan Stat. Summary......................................................................................................433
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports ....................................433
Reset the counters’ results ......................................................................................433
Lan Stat. Summary contextual area .........................................................................434
PWE3 Statistics ...........................................................................................................435
Verify the counters of the PWE3 channels .................................................................435
Reset the counters’ results of the PWE3 channels .......................................................435
PWE3 Statistics contextual area ...............................................................................436
Advanced Stat. Mon. ....................................................................................................437
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the
Internal Priority value.............................................................................................437
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the
C-VID identifier .....................................................................................................439
Verify/manage the main counters of an Ethernet port whose traffic is filtered according to the
S-VID and C-VID identifiers.....................................................................................441
Advanced Stat. Mon. contextual area........................................................................443
Fade Margin................................................................................................................444
Execute the calculation of the Fade Margin and check/delete the results........................444
Alarms stopping the Fade Margin .......................................................................445
Messages displayed during the execution of the Fade Margin .................................446
Verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for the calculation of the Fade Margin ........................................................................................446
Fade Margin contextual area ...................................................................................447
Calculation of the Fade Margin (info) ........................................................................448
RMon .........................................................................................................................449
Verify the collection status of the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports.......................449
Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ..............................449
Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port...........................449

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

15

Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port........................................450
RMon contextual area.............................................................................................451
Remote Monitoring window ...............................................................................451
RMon standard (info) .............................................................................................453
RMon Standard................................................................................................453
Outline on the operation of RMon standard ..........................................................453
Management from Web LCT of the statistics counters foreseen by RMON standard ....453
Ethernet counters (RMon) .................................................................................454
OAM ..........................................................................................................................455
Verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of the equipment...............................455
Define an OAM-FM Domain for equipment .................................................................456
Remove the OAM-FM Domain of equipment ...............................................................456
Verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality .................456
Associate a MA to a VLAN .......................................................................................457
Associate a MEP to a VLAN ......................................................................................457
Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN ..............................................................................458
Enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP .......................................458
Modify the time interval used for the transmission of the CCM messages for a MEP .........458
Verify the table of remote MEPs (RMep table) ............................................................459
Insert a remote MEP in the RMep table .....................................................................459
Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table ....................................................................459
Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table ...................................................................460
Remove a remote MEP from RMep table....................................................................460
Send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP..............................460
Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of the same
VLAN ...................................................................................................................461
OAM contextual area ..............................................................................................462
OAM-FM Domain area.......................................................................................462
OAM-FM MA/MEP table .....................................................................................462
RMEP tab ........................................................................................................464
LBM tab..........................................................................................................465
LTM tab ..........................................................................................................466
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (info) ........................................................................467
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality...........................................................................467
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by WEB LCT .....467
OAM-FM Domain ..............................................................................................468
MA.................................................................................................................468
MEP ...............................................................................................................468
MIP ................................................................................................................469
Remote MEPs ..................................................................................................470
CCM...............................................................................................................472
LBM ...............................................................................................................472
LTM ...............................................................................................................473
Example of configuration of a OAM-FM Domain for a set of ALCplus2e equipment .....474
S/N Meas ...................................................................................................................476
Verify the value of the S/N measure .........................................................................476
Update the value of the S/N measure .......................................................................476
S/N Meas. contextual area ......................................................................................477
PRBS .........................................................................................................................478

16

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the PRBS measure ......................478
Activate/reset the PRBS measure.............................................................................478
Deactivate the PRBS measure .................................................................................478
Modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure................................................478
Enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .....................................................479
PRBS contextual area .............................................................................................480
Radio Loop .................................................................................................................481
Verify the radio loops status ....................................................................................481
Activate a radio loop ..............................................................................................481
Deactivate a radio loop...........................................................................................482
Execute the test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN .............................482
Radio Loop contextual area .....................................................................................483
Radio loop (info)....................................................................................................484
Test (RF Loop) for ALCplus2e equipment with ODU ASN (info) .....................................485
Radio Switch ...............................................................................................................486
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches .......................486
Modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)......................486
Modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch) .................487
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) ..............487
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..............................................................................487
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .488
Radio Switch contextual area...................................................................................489
Radio switch (info) .................................................................................................490
Management of the radio switch ........................................................................490
Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)....490
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission).................................................490
SWITCH ...........................................................................................................................491
STM-1........................................................................................................................492
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch ........................492
Modify the management of the STM-1 switch.............................................................492
Modify the logic of STM-1 switch ..............................................................................493
Set the primary STM-1 as preferential ......................................................................493
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..............................................................................493
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .......493
STM-1 contextual area ...........................................................................................494
STM-1 switch (info)................................................................................................495
Management of the STM-1 switch.......................................................................495
STM-1 switching criteria....................................................................................495
Forcing of the STM-1 to operation ......................................................................495
Preferential primary STM-1 ...............................................................................495
Nodal.........................................................................................................................497
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch .........................497
Modify the management of the nodal switch ..............................................................497
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..............................................................................498
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration...................................................................................................................498
Nodal contextual area ............................................................................................499
Nodal switch (info).................................................................................................500
Management of the nodal switch ........................................................................500

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

17

Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation .................................................................500
Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection ...........................................................500
USER INPUT .....................................................................................................................501
Local User Input ..........................................................................................................502
Verify the local User Input status and configuration ....................................................502
Modify the name of a local User Input.......................................................................502
Modify the rest condition of a local User Input ...........................................................502
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local User Input ...............503
Local User Input contextual area..............................................................................504
Enabling the User Input alarms (info) .......................................................................505
Remote User Input ......................................................................................................506
Verify the remote User Input status and configuration ................................................506
Modify the name of a remote User Input ...................................................................506
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote User Input............506
Remote User Input contextual area ..........................................................................508
USER OUTPUT...................................................................................................................509
Verify the User Output status and configuration ...............................................................509
Modify the name of an User Output ................................................................................509
Modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an User Output ..................................509
Verify/modify the signals coupled to the User Output........................................................510
Force the User Output activation....................................................................................510
Remove the forcing of the User Output ...........................................................................511
User Output contextual area .........................................................................................512

ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 513

OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 521

PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 535

ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 545

18

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

MANUAL CONTENT
Equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2e IDU can operate with Ethernet Enhanced functionality active or
inactive (see Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality).
In the first case, the GUI will contain the commands for the management of functionality Ethernet Enhanced; while in the second case the commands for the management of Ethernet functionality compatible
with ALCplus2 (Radio side) will be available.
This manual describes the commands and the functionalities of the WEB Local Craft Terminal application
(release 1.9.0) present in the equipment ALCplus2e when the management of Ethernet Enhanced is
active.
For the description of the available commands and functionalities when the management of Ethernet Enhanced is not active, refer to user manual WEB LCT ALCplus2e code MN.00274.E.
The WEB LCT release present in the equipment can be verified opening the relevant WEB Local Craft Terminal page and selecting, in the Equipment Menu area, one of the following commands:

Main > Equipment Properties - General Info tab - WEB LCT Version parameter.

Main > Software Info & Maint. - Web LCT tab - Current Version parameter.

In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording:

ALCplus2e identifies the equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2e IDU.

WEB LCT identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal application for ALCplus2e.

WEB LCT page identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal page for ALCplus2e.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

19

WEB LCT APPLICATION
The WEB LCT application allows a user connecting to equipment via his own machine (PC, Workstation,
etc.) using the operating system and the Web browser at his disposal.
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any additional module
installed on the user PC (see Installation).
At start-up of WEB LCT, the browser displays the WEB Local Craft Terminal (WEB LCT) page that is the
application graphical interface (GUI).
The WEB LCT page can be opened directly from browser or from SCT/LMT program (see Open/close the
WEB LCT page).
In the first case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment, whose IP is entered in the address bar of the
browser, is opened (see Fig.1).
In the second case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment selected from SCT/LMT is opened (see Fig.2).
Through WEB LCT application, the user can check the equipment operating status and directly intervene
to manage it, verifying/modifying the configuration parameters (see Functionalities and Menu and commands (Equipment Menu).

Fig.1 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from browser)
User PC

Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33)
Controller

Supervision
port

WEB LCT
application

NE management
(HTTP/
HTTPS)

Internet
SFTP/SHH

FTP

WEB LCT
application

Help file

SSH Server

Help Web Server

FTP Server

Web Lct Console

Browser
Supervision
port

NE management
(HTTP/
HTTPS)
USB (PPP)

connection

SFTP/SHH

FTP

20

WEB LCT page
equipment
(172.18.60.33)

User PC

Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33)
Controller

Browser

WEB LCT page
equipment
(172.18.60.33)

Help file

SSH Server

Help Web Server

FTP Server

Web Lct Console

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Fig.2 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT)
User PC
FTP

Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33)
Controller

NE
management
(SNMP)

Supervision
port

WEB LCT
application

FTP Server
Help Web
Server

SFTP/SHH

Browser

WEB LCT page
equipment
(172.18.60.33)

Help file

SSH Server

User PC

Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33)

WEB LCT
application

Equipment
(172.18.60.33)

Internet
NE
management
(HTTP/HTTPS)

Controller

SCT/LMT

FTP
Supervision
port
USB (PPP)
connection

NE
management
(SNMP)

SCT/LMT
Equipment
(172.18.60.33)

FTP Server
Help Web
Server

Browser
NE management
(HTTP/HTTPS)

SFTP/SHH

WEB LCT page
equipment
(172.18.60.33)

Help file

SSH Server

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

21

FUNCTIONALITIES

Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:

22

The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, hardware, features key, etc.) and to
execute the reset of the equipment software (Equipment Properties).

The communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment and the
IP Access Control List (Port Configuration & ACL).

The stating Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment
(Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway) (Routing Table).

The static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway) (Stored Routing Table).

The measures of Performance Monitoring (Performance Monitoring).

The saving to file of the equipment configuration, of the status/alarm signals and of the operations executed by the users (Report & Loggers Maint.).

The automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element
and the Wake Up trap (SNTP & Wake Up Config.).

The SD memory card for the backup/restore of the equipment configuration and software (SD
Memory Management).

The equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equipment, the communication
stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default equipment settings (Software Info
& Maint.).

The backup/restore of the whole equipment configuration (Backup/Restore Config.).

The equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and SNMPv3) (Security Config.).

The forward status of the alarms and their severity level (Alarm Severity Config.).

The equipment users list (User Manager/User Manager SNMP-V3).

The equipment general configuration (radio configuration, modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation, etc.) (Equipment).

The sources and the outputs of synchronism (Synchronisation).

The Ethernet Switch, Ring Protection mode (G.8032), TDM tributary, PWE3 function and cross
connection matrix (TDM) (Base Band).

The radio parameters (Radio).

The LAN and PWE3 statistics, Fade Margin, RMon, OAM, S/N, PRBS, radio loop and radio switch
(Maintenance).

The switch of the STM-1 protected and of the Nodal Bus protected (Switch).

The local and remote User Input (User Input).

The User output (User Output).

The remote element list (Remote elements list area)

The manual operations and the relevant timeout (Equipment status area).

The users connected to the equipment ([Logged Users] parameter).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

LIMITS

Maximum number of...

Limit

Equipment into the remote equipment list

100

Stations into the remote equipment list

30

Equipment which can be connected contemporarily via a single WEB
LCT page

1

Users (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT and NMS5UX) contemporarily connected to
equipment via the WEB LCT page

2

Signals into the Events area

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

400

23

INSTALLATION

WEB LCT

WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller.
It does not require any installation on the user PC.
At the first equipment switch-on, the user can immediately connect to it via WEB LCT because
the application is already present in the controller.
Then you can Update the WEB LCT application.
Add-ins

The program SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console must be used as help for the WEB LCT application,
in order to:

Manage the transfer of files between PC and equipment (FTP)

Manage the USB connection (PPP)

Manager the help online of WEB LCT (Help Web Server).

The instructions for the installation of the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console are reported in the relevant manuals.
WARNING SCT/LMT and WEB LCT Console work in MS Windows® environment. For operating
systems different from MS Windows®, the user must install a FTP server and a PPP management
module on one’s PC.

WEB LCT, for a correct display in its own browser, needs Adobe Flash Player version 9 or higher.
If you wish to use the equipment in security mode Exclusive or Available (see Security Config.)
for the correct management of SSH protocol and SFTP protocol, it is necessary to install a SSH
server on one’s PC (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).
Help online

WEB LCT is equipped with a help on-line which can be opened selecting the option [Help] or
in WEB LCT page.
The help on-line must be installed on one’s PC using the installation file specific for the WEB LCT
of the equipment you wish to use.

24

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE
Open/close the WEB LCT page
Elements of the WEB LCT page
Messages displayed in the WEB LCT page

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

25

OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection)
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (USB connection)
Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT
Open more WEB LCT pages
Close the WEB LCT page

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (Ethernet connection)
WARNING If Ethernet connection is used, checks or settings are not generally necessary. Only if more network cards are equipped, it will be necessary to select the card you wish to use (Host Adapter) (see Web
Lct Console user manual).

When the equipment is connected to the PC via LAN network, the relevant WEB LCT page can be opened
also selecting the equipment from the address book of Web Lct Console (see relevant documentation).
The following procedure requires that:

The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to.

The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and
password) we mean a user present in the users list stored in the controller (see User list (info).

For equipment using the protocol SNMPv3:

Opening the WEB LCT page from Browser is allowed only to SNMPv3 users of type AuthNoPriv,
with MD5 authentication (see Tab.5).

Opening the WEB LCT page is supported with Internet Explorer 9 or later.

The fields used to set the user name/password are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase
and lowercase characters.

The opening of the WEB LCT page via HTTPS protocol is supported with Internet Explorer 9 or later.
The WEB Lct Console program must be used as help for the WEB LCT application, in order to manage the
FTP, PPP and Help Web Server
1. Run a browser.
2. Type in the address box:
<IP address of the equipment>
With IP address we mean the address of the equipment supervision port from which you wish to reach
the equipment itself.
WARNING If the use of HTTPS protocol is active on the equipment (see Security Config.), an error page

could be displayed, indicating that the connection you are activating is not secure because troubles
have been detected with the security certificates.
For the detailed description of the error messages of the browser, refer to the relevant documentation.
To update the equipment certificates (C.A./SSL), see Update the certificates (HTTPS).
Generally, the browser asks the user to accept or refuse the connection. If you decide to accept however the connection with the equipment, the confidential transfer of the data is nor ensured.
The WEB LCT login page opens.
3. Type the name of the user, in the Username box.
4. Type the password, in the Password box.
5. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the application, the current user
name and password are automatically displayed; otherwise uncheck the considered box.
6. Press Login.
If the typed values are correct, the system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.3).
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT see Messages
displayed in the WEB LCT page.

26

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser (USB connection)
WARNING If USB connection is used, before activating the connection, the USB driver must be installed

and configured (see Web Lct Console user manual). Then, if you think the USB driver does not operate
correctly, execute the controls pointed out in the Web Lct Console user manual.
When the equipment is connected to PC via an USB connection, the connection management is implemented by WLC program.
The following procedure requires that:

The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to.

The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and
password) we mean a user present in the users list stored in the controller (see User list (info).

For equipment using the protocol SNMPv3:

Opening the WEB LCT page from Browser is allowed only to SNMPv3 users of type AuthNoPriv,
with MD5 authentication (see Tab.5).

Opening the WEB LCT page is supported with Internet Explorer 9 or later.

The fields used to set the user name/password are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase
and lowercase characters.

The opening of the WEB LCT page via HTTPS protocol is supported with Internet Explorer 9 or later.
1. Connect the equipment to one’s PC by means of the USB cable.
2. Run WEB Lct Console program (see relevant documentation).
The WLC program must be used as help for the WEB LCT application, in order to manage the FTP, PPP
and Help Web Server.
3. In the Web LCT Console window, press Options.
4. Select the Connect using direct serial cable option in the PPP area and press Ok.
5. Execute one of the following operations:

In the Web Lct Console window, press Connect.

Select

, press the right mouse button and select Connect in the pop-up menu.

If the connection operation is successful, the default browser is opened with the WEB LCT login page.
WARNING If the use of HTTPS protocol is active on the equipment (see Security Config.), an error page

could be displayed, indicating that the connection you are activating is not secure because troubles
have been detected with the security certificates.
For the detailed description of the error messages of the browser, refer to the relevant documentation.
To update the equipment certificates (C.A./SSL), see Update the certificates (HTTPS).
Generally, the browser asks the user to accept or refuse the connection. If you decide to accept however the connection with the equipment, the confidential transfer of the data is nor ensured.
6. Type the name of the user, in the Username box.
7. Type the password, in the Password box.
8. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the application, the current user
name and password are automatically displayed; otherwise uncheck the considered box.
9. Press Login.
If the typed values are correct, the system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.3).
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT see Messages
displayed in the WEB LCT page.

Open the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT
WARNING The following procedure requires that:

The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment you are connecting to.

The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and
password) we mean a user present in the users list stored in the controller (see User list (info).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

27

The SCT/LMT is installed on the PC. More information about the SCT/LMT program is reported
in the relevant documentation.

1. Run SCT/LMT program (see relevant documentation).
2. Activate the connection with the wished equipment (see relevant documentation).
3. Execute one of the following operations:

Double click on the record representing the equipment in the SCT/LMT window.

Select the record of the equipment and then the Equipment > LCT Interface command.

4. Only if the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol, it is necessary to set again the name (box Username)
and the access code (box Password) of the user. Press Login.
The system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.3).
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT see Messages
displayed in the WEB LCT page.
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/profile
of the equipment in the SCT/LMT window.
In any moment, it is possible to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or a different user with respect to that used for the login.
WARNING If the use of HTTPS protocol is active on the equipment (see Security Config.), an error page

could be displayed, indicating that the connection you are activating is not secure because troubles
have been detected with the security certificates.
For the detailed description of the error messages of the browser, refer to the relevant documentation.
To update the equipment certificates (C.A./SSL), see Update the certificates (HTTPS).
Generally, the browser asks the user to accept or refuse the connection. If you decide to accept however the connection with the equipment, the confidential transfer of the data is nor ensured.
For equipment using the protocol SNMPv3 and/or HTTPS, the opening the WEB LCT page is supported
with Internet Explorer 9 or later.
In this case, there is no need to differentiate the opening of the WEB LCT page according to the connection
type, as the connection management is executed by the SCT/LMT program itself. For more information,
refer to the relevant documentation.

Open more WEB LCT pages

It is possible to open:

More WEB LCT pages on more machines or on the same machine, using the same user or different users.

Only one WEB LCT page relevant to the same equipment.

More WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.

For more information about the limits of the application, refer to the Limits paragraph.

Close the WEB LCT page

Select the [Logout] parameter.

28

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE

1 - Equipment Menu area
2 - Equipment info area
3 - Users area
4 - Remote elements list area
5 - Contextual area
6 - Equipment status area

Fig.3 shows an example of WEB LCT page on an ALCplus2e equipment.

Fig.3 Elements of the WEB LCT page (ALCplus2e)

1

2

3

5

4

6

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

29

Equipment Menu area

This area contains the commands to manage the equipment configuration (see Fig.3).
Commands

The commands are subdivided in groups:
Main. Commands to manage the general equipment parameters: supervision ports,
Routing Table, Performance Monitoring measures, etc.
Equipment, Synchronisation, etc. Commands to manage the configuration parameters typical of the equipment type which the WEB LCT page refers to.
For the description of every group/command see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu).
The selection of a group expands or compresses the list of the underlaying commands. At each
selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes
expanded, or vice versa). The symbol:
identifies an expanded group.
identifies a compressed group.
It is possible:

Expand all the groups at the same time, pressing

Compress all the groups at the same time, pressing

.

The symbol
identifies a command which, once selected, displays the parameters associated
to it in the context area (see Contextual area).
Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Menu area is displayed.
Press

30

to hide the area. Press

to display the area again.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Equipment info area

This area shows the equipment general properties.
Parameters

Equipment Type. Equipment type.
Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
Radio System. Radio configuration:

Unequipped. Equipment without radio.

1+0. Equipment with radio in unprotected configuration.

1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential
type.

1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential
type.

2x1+0 Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in unprotected configuration
and Ethernet traffic concatenation.

2x1+0 Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected
configuration and two Ethernet channels.

2x1+0 XPIC Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration
and Ethernet traffic concatenation.

2x1+0 XPIC Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and
two Ethernet channels.

Agent IP. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.
Tables

LEFT

TABLE

(see Fig.3). Status and radio parameters of the transmitter and receiver.

Every row of the table corresponds to a radio branch for which is displayed:
Branch which the data present in the relevant row refer to:

Tx Status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to transmission.

Rx Status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to reception.

The Tx2A and Rx2A boxes are present only for the equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration.
The operating status of the branch is represented by the colour of the box:

Green. Working branch.

White. StandBy branch.

In the equipment in 1+1 heterofrequential configuration, the branches 1 and 2 transmit
at the same time; in this case both the Tx1A and Tx2A boxes will be green.
RF channel frequency. The wording:

Channel Not Set. RF channel is not set.

ODU Hardware Failure. Hardware problem. E.g. check that the connection cable between the IDU and the ODU is not failure or missing.

RF channel number.
Power in input to the receiver (lines Rx…) and in output to the transmitter (lines Tx…).
In the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the wording Std-by is present in
the line Tx… relevant to the StandBy branch.
Both the powers are measured at the antenna flange.
The wording Tx Off (row Tx1A/Tx2A) indicates that the transmitter is off due to an action
by the user (see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter - selection of option Off
or Permanent Off) or due to the activation of one or more alarms which cause the switchoff of the transmitter (for instance, ...RT Vco Fail Alarm).
If the radio is not equipped (Radio System: [Unequipped]) the parameters present in this table
are not meaningful. In the area the Data Unavailable wording is displayed.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

31

RIGHT TABLE. Current ACM profile and the radio transport (Tx/Rx) subdivision between Ethernet
and E1:
ACM Profile. Current ACM profile.
TDM Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to the TDM tributaries (E1, STM-1)
ETH Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to the Ethernet tributaries.
The Tx2A and Rx2A boxes are present only for the equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) configuration.
Update data

Press

to update the information in the Equipment Info area.

Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Info area is displayed.
Press

32

to hide the area. Press

to display the area again.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Users area

User Profile parameter
[Logged Users] parameter
[Logout] parameter
[Open Far End] parameter
[Help] parameter

User Profile parameter
Login status and profile of the user who has opened the WEB LCT page.
Options

System. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user has System profile.
The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the
equipment configuration with no exception.
Station Op. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user has Station Operator profile.
The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes
to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list,
aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the System user.
Read & Write. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user has Read & Write profile.
The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations
(MAN OP).
Monitor. The equipment is in connected/monitor status or in connected/login status and the
user has Read Only profile.
The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward commands or execute
changing to the equipment configuration.
Login/Logout

At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/
profile entered during the login request.
In any moment it is possible to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or
a different user with respect to that used for the login.
NMS

If the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system, the supervisory system considers the connection of a SCT/LMT user with Read Only or Read & Write profile
a WEB LCT connection in Monitoring mode.
While the supervisory system considers the connection to the equipment of a SCT/LMT user with
Station Operator or System profile a WEB LCT connection in Configuration mode.

[Logged Users] parameter
WARNING Parameter available only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

This parameter manages the users connected to the equipment.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

33

Operations

Verify the users connected to the equipment
Force the logout of a user

Verify the users connected to the equipment
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment using the protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

1. Select the [Logged Users] parameter.
The Current Logged User window displays the list of the users connected to the equipment when the
command is selected.
For each users, is pointed out in the column:

User. User name.
The wording NMS5UX shows the user of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system or a remote
user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login).
The other wordings identify the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT users connected to the equipment.

Profile. User profile.

Timeout. Timeout of the WEB LCT session:

No Timeout. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time.

<number> Seconds. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user, if
disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.

With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been
closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).

User IP Address. Machine IP address.
With the wording machine, it is intended the PC (for the WEB LCT and SCT/LMT users) or the
server/workstation (for the NMS5UX users and remote users) on which the application used by
the user is actually running.

Press Refresh to update the data present in the window.

Force the logout of a user
User Profile | System
WARNING Logging out oneself is not possible.

If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system automatically executes the restore of the user login.
Operation available only for equipment using the protocol SNMPv1/v2c.
1. Select the [Logged Users] parameter.
2. Select the wished user.
3. Press Force Logout and confirm.
The system removes the line relevant to the selected user.
If the push-button is not available, this means that the record relevant to one’s user has been selected.

34

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

[Logout] parameter
This parameter executes the logout of the current user.
When selected, the WEB LCT page to login to the equipment is displayed.
To reconnect equipment, set Username and Password and press Login.

[Open Far End] parameter
This parameter opens the WEB LCT page of remote equipment to contained in the Remote Element Table.
Operations

Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link)

Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link)
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select the [Open Far End] parameter.
If the remote equipment list contains:

Only one item of equipment of type Remote Link, the WEB LCT login page of the remote equipment is displayed.
Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the SCT/LMT user to use
to activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.
If the WEB LCT login page is not displayed when the login is required, this means that the remote
equipment is unreachable.

No equipment of type Remote Link, a message is displayed pointing out the absence of the remote equipment.

More equipment of type Remote Link, the Available Remote Elements window is displayed, containing the list of equipment configured as Remote Link present in the remote equipment list.
For each equipment, the following characteristics are reported:

Station. Station name.

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.

IP Address. IP address.

Select the remote equipment and press Open or double click on the equipment.
The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens.
Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the SCT/LMT user to use
to activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.

[Help] parameter
This parameter opens the help online of application.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

35

Remote elements list area

In this area, you can manage the remote equipment list stored in the equipment controller.
Parameters

Station/Equip. Name of the station and equipment in the list.
STATION (

)

Equipment is subdivided into stations.
Selecting the symbol of a station expands or compress the list of underlaying equipment.
At each selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes expanded and vice versa).
The name of the station is assigned by the user during the creation of the station itself.
The stations are displayed in the same order as they are inserted in the list
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, cannot be stored in the
list.
EQUIPMENT (

or

)

The
symbol represents the equipment of type Managed by SCT, Elem. Manager, Not
Managed or Node X; the
symbol represents the equipment of type Remote Link (see
column Type).
The name of the equipment is automatically assigned by the application during the creation of the equipment itself: Equipment <progressive number>.
Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP address.
IP Addr. IP address (Agent SNMP) of the equipment.
Type. Type of equipment:

Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.

Remote Link. Equipment, managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application, constituting the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to
the local equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).

Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where
the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).

Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one piece of equipment inserted
into an OSI network.

Nodal X. Equipment belonging to the local node.
With local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2/
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or by a TDM nodal Bus,
where the considered equipment is an element. The X value correspond to a number
between 1 and 8 and indicates the subset.

2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1
configuration.

2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1
configuration.

OSI. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.
Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
Push-button

GENERAL

AREA

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the list.
Clear. Reset the remote equipment list
Open. Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link)

36

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

STATION

AREA

Add. Add a station to the list
Remove. Remove a station of the list
Rename. Rename a station of the list
ELEMENT

AREA

Add. Add equipment to the list
Remove. Remove equipment from the list
Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Remote elements list area is hidden.
Press

to hide the area. Press

to display the area again.

See also

Remote equipment list (info)

Add a station to the list
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations into a list.

1. In the Remote elements list area, press Add (Station group).
2. Type, into the text box, the name to be assigned to the station (alphanumeric string with minimum 1
and maximum 11 characters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot
be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name
string.
3. Press OK.
The application displays the new station into the Remote elements list area, at the end of the list relevant to the already existing stations.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, is not saved in the list.

Rename a station of the list
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be renamed.
2. Press Rename.
3. Type, into the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot
be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name
string.
4. Press OK.
The application displays the new name of the station into the Remote elements list area.
5. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

37

Remove a station of the list
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING The deleting of the station causes also the removal of all pieces of equipment coupled with such

a station.
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be removed.
2. Press Remove (Station group).
The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Add equipment to the list
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING It is possible to add to the list a maximum of 100 equipment.

Equipment cannot be created if at least one station has not been created before.
1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to which the equipment has to be coupled.
If the user does not select any station, the application will automatically couple the equipment with the
last selected station.
2. Press Add (Element group).
3. Into the IP Address box, type the IP address of the equipment.
The program does not create two pieces of equipment with the same IP Address in the same list (even
if in different stations).
4. Only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP address (Gosip Address box) opening the popup menu and setting in the box:

AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth and Reserv. the value of the corresponding byte/s.

Domain, the values of the bytes that represent the Domain.

Area, the values of the bytes that represent the area.

Sys. ID, the value of the wished System ID.

The Sel parameter is read only.
5. Press OK.
6. Set the Type of element box, selecting the option relevant to the element type to be inserted:

Managed By SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.

Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application that constitutes
the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment.

Element Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the
NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).

Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one piece of equipment inserted into an OSI network.

2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.
Option to use only if problems have occurred regarding the automatic configuration of the remote equipment list during the creation of a XPIC 1+1 system.

2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.
Option to use only if problems have occurred regarding the automatic configuration of the remote equipment list during the creation of a XPIC 1+1 system.

7. Press OK.
In the Remote elements list area, under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive
number> is displayed with the characteristics of the new equipment.

38

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

8. Press Apply and confirm.

Remove equipment from the list
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the equipment to be removed.
2. Press Remove (Equipment group).
The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Reset the remote equipment list
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. In the Remote elements list area, press Clear.
The application clears all the records (stations and equipment) present into the Remote elements list
area.
2. Press Apply and confirm.

Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link)
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. In the Remote elements list area select the equipment of Remote Link type to be opened the WEB LCT
page.
2. Press Open.
The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens.
3. Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the SCT/LMT user to use to
activate the connection and press Login.
In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

39

Remote equipment list (info)
Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller.
With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish
to connect to.
For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment
into stations, in such a way that, at the selection of a station, the application will display only the detail of
the equipment associated with such a specific station. The station does not have any particular meaning;
it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment.
Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station.
The remote equipment list can be used to connect, at the same time, to more equipment only if the program SCT/LMT is available.
When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment),
at the connection of such equipment, the SCT/LMT program reads its remote equipment list and automatically forwards the connection command to all pieces of equipment present into the list.
In such a way, the application displays, into the Station List area of the SCT/LMT window, all the stations
that group the equipment and, into the Equipment List area (selecting the relevant station), it displays the
functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the functional status
of all the remote equipment present into the list. The equipment that have answered to the connection
request of the application will result in connected/monitor status.
The application will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment that have not answered
to the connection request, until to:

It is deactivated the connection with the local equipment.

The user disables the equipment.

The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.

More information concerning the SCT/LMT program are reported into the relevant manuals.

40

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Contextual area

This area is the part of the WEB LCT page where the equipment parameters are displayed.
Its content changes accordingly to the selected command in the Equipment Menu area, which is indicated
in the top part of the contextual area.
Push-button

Apply. Selecting it makes the changes, executed on the parameters present in the contextual
area, effective.
Its selection opens a confirmation window. The confirmation windows are timed. When this period is elapsed (pointed out by the progress bar), if the user has not confirmed the operation,
the window is closed and the operation cancelled.
If the push-button is not available:

It is not possible to execute changes because the user profile does not allow this or
the equipment is in connected/monitor status.

No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button
becomes available when the value of a parameter is changed.

Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the operation or the change of the parameters.

Refresh. Force the reading of the data from equipment.
If the push-button is not available, the connection with the equipment is not active.
Help. Open the help on-line.
WARNING For some commands, other push-buttons are displayed relevant only to the context

which contains them. These push-buttons are described in the paragraph relevant to the specific
command.
Tabs

For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. The selection of a tab dynamically
changes the content of the contextual area.
Parameters

The parameters present in the contextual area can be read-only or set or modified.
The description of the single commands (see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu) indicates
the parameters which can be modified and modalities to do that.
Generally, for the parameter setting, the following rules are valid:

Entering a value (alphanumeric string) in a text box.
If a red line is displayed below the text box, the entered value is not allowed because,
for example, a number of characters greater than the allowed one or an invalid value
has been entered (for example, entering of value 172.18.70.334 as IP address).

Box with possible values displayed in a drop-down menu.
When the value is changed, a red triangle is displayed in the top left edge of the box.
It signals that the value has been changed, but the change has not been communicated yet to the equipment (pressure of push-button Apply).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

41

Equipment status area

This area shows the functional status of the equipment.
Parameters

URGENT <alarms number>. Number of Critical and/or Major alarms. Colour box:

Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity

Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity.

Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.

Select the box to display the active alarm.
NOT URG. <alarms number>. Number of Minor and/or Warning alarms. Colour box:

Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity.

Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity.

Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.

Select the box to display the active alarm.
RADIO 1A. Status of the radio connection with branch 1A. Equipment configuration:

1+0 or 2x(1+0). Colour box:

Green. The radio connection works properly.

Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A.

1+1. Color box:

Green. The radio connection works properly.

Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A works
correctly).

Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A does not
correctly work).

RADIO 2A. Status of the radio connection with branch 2A. Equipment configuration:

1+0. Colour box: Grey. Parameter not meaningful.

1+1 Colour box:

Green. The radio connection works properly.

Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 1A works
correctly).

Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 1A does not
correctly work).

2x(1+0). Colour box:

Green. The radio connection works properly.

Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A.

DOWNLOAD. Update of the equipment firmware. Colour box:

Light blue. The firmware update is in progress.

Grey. The firmware update is not in progress.

MAN. OP. Activation of the manual operations. Colour box:

Light blue. A manual forcing is enabled (e.g. a loop).

Grey. No manual forcing is active.

<number> °C. Operating temperature of the equipment. Colour box:

Green. The operating temperature of the equipment is lower than 75°C.

Orange. The operating temperature of the equipment is between 75°C and 80°C.

Red. The operating temperature of the equipment is higher than 80°C.

Events (area). List of the status/alarm signals of the equipment.
Each signal corresponds to a record that is displayed:

42

Coloured box. Signal type and alarm gravity:

Green/Status. Status signal.

Light blue/Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Yellow/Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.

Orange/Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.

Red/Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.

White/Cleared. Alarm detected/cleared.

Alphanumeric string which details the nature of the signal.

Logic group which the signal belongs to: COMMON, etc.

Date/time of the signal detection.
If the row refers to a detected/cleared alarm, the date/time of alarm detection will be
pointed out under the date/time of alarm clearing.
The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal. The format of date/time changes depending on the setting made in the operating system.

Operations

Verify the active manual operations
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout
Update data

The information displayed in the Equipment status area are updated at regular intervals depending on the timeout set by the user.
The progress of the bar (

) indicates the time between two successive updates.

Select the bar to display the current timeout.
To change the parameter, move the cursor to the new value (number between 5 and 30 seconds).
Press
to dynamically update information of the Events area and remove the detected and
cleared alarms (box White/Cleared).
Display/hide area

When the WEB page is opened, the Events area is displayed.
Press

to hide the area. Press

to display the area again.

See also

Alarms (info)

Verify the active manual operations
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select the MAN. OP box.
A window displays the manual operations actually activated into the equipment.
The wording None active manual operation shows that no manual operation is active.
The information are not dynamically updated. Press

to update the information.

Verify/modify the manual operation timeout
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the equipment.

1. Select the MAN. OP box.
The Manual Operation Timeout box displays the current timeout of the manual operations.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

43

Value 0 indicates that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a manual
operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. The activation of a manual forcing (for instance a loop) affects the traffic.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 172800 sec. (48 hours).
The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the timeout.
3. Press Change and confirm.

44

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE

Opening page

Welcome in the WebLct Software upload utility The WEB LCT program is not present on the
equipment you wish to connect to. Update the WEB LCT application.
Invalid User!. It means that the typed username is wrong and/or not present in the equipment
user list or that the user password is wrong.
The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as Read Only user. It
means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system and
the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/LMT user, to be able to execute the
login of the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the
SCT/LMT user for the execution of the operation.
Too many WEB users!. It means that the equipment has been connected to the maximum number of allowed users (see Limits).
Compatibility issue found. The Equipment software version is greater/lower than WebLct version. This may cause unpredictable problems, means that the firmware version present on the
equipment is not compatible with the version of WEB LCT. Update the firmware of the equipment
Open page

When the page is open, self-explanatory messages are usually displayed about the result of an operation or the impossibility to carry out an action because of the incongruence of the selected parameters.
Moreover, one of the following messages can be displayed:
SYSTEM OFFLINE. The equipment is in disconnected status. In this condition, the parameters
cannot be verified/modified.
The browser sends the command of reconnection at regular intervals (timeout: 20 seconds) until
when the equipment returns in connected status or the WEB LCT page is closed. The Status parameter indicates the operation in progress:

Wait next attempt. The equipment has not replied to the first reconnection attempt.
When timeout is expired, the browser will attempt again.

Reconnection failed. The equipment has not replied to next reconnection attempts.
When timeout is expired, the browser will attempt again.

Reconnection in progress. The equipment is transmitting the re-connection command.

The Info: New attempt in parameter shows the period (expressed in seconds) between a connection attempt and the next one. In any moment, it is possible to execute an immediate connection attempt, pressing Retry.
WARNING. Access enabled only for SYSTEM users. The selected command is available only to
the user with profile System.
You are forcing a manual operation. Operation timeout: <value>. The setting you wish to execute is a manual operation subjected to timeout.
For each equipment, a timeout can be set after which the relevant active manual operations are
automatically deactivated. The wording No Timeout indicates that the timeout is disabled; this
means that a manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it.
Loading The request of data is in progress between the PC and the equipment.
Updating, Applying Changes The sending of data is in progress between the PC and the equipment.
Operation Fail! Unable to Get or Update parameter(s). Wrong user profile or not logged yet! The
operation cannot be executed because the user profile in use is not enabled to execute the action
or is not logged to the equipment yet.
Not Implemented Yet!. The command is not available for the current version of the program.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

45

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU)
Main. It manages the general equipment parameters: supervision ports configuration, Routing Table,
Performance Monitoring measures, etc.
Equipment. It manages the equipment general configuration: radio configuration, modulation, capacity, etc.
Synchronisation. It manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism.
Base Band. It manages the base band parameters.
Radio. It manages the Radio parameters.
Maintenance. It manages the LAN statistics, Fade Margin, RMon, OAM, S/N, PRBS, radio loop and radio
switch.
Switch. It manages the switch of the STM-1 protected and of the Nodal Bus protected.
User Input. It manages the local and remote User Input.
User Output. It manages the User Output.

The description of every single command indicates the status of login/user profile (User Profile parameter)
necessary to use the command or execute the relevant procedures.

46

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

MAIN

Equipment Properties. It manages the properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, etc.) and
executes the equipment software reset.
Port Configuration & ACL. It manages the communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment and the IP Access Control List.
Routing Table. It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by
the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Stored Routing Table. It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in
the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Performance Monitoring. It manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
Report & Loggers Maint. It saves to file the equipment configuration, the status/alarm signals and the
operations executed by the users.
SNTP & Wake Up Config. It manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element and the Wake Up trap.
SD Memory Management. It manages the SD memory card for the backup/restore of the equipment
configuration and software.
Software Info & Maint. It manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equipment, the communication stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default equipment settings.
Backup/Restore Config. It manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment configuration.
Security Config.. It manages the equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and SNMPv3).
Alarm Severity Config. It manages the alarm transmission and their severity level.
User Manager. It manages the users list of the equipment when the protocol SNMPv1/v2c is active.
User Manager SNMP-V3. It manages the users list of the equipment when the protocol SNMPv3 is active.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

47

Equipment Properties
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The Equipment Properties command manages the equipment properties and executes the equipment
software reset.
Operations

Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.)
Modify the equipment identifier
Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC
Verify the equipment addresses
Verify the equipment feature
Enable a new equipment feature
Verify the equipment units
Execute the equipment software reset
GUI

Equipment Properties contextual area

Verify the equipment properties (type, ID, SNMP IP address, etc.)
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
The General Info tab displays the equipment general properties.

Modify the equipment identifier
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING If the selected equipment is configured as element of a node, the relevant identifier can NOT be

modified through this procedure. To change it refer to ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Node Manager manual.
1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
2. Press Change at the side of the Equipment ID parameter.
3. Type an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 50 characters.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING If the selected equipment is configured as element of a node, the relevant IP address of the

SNMP agent can NOT be modified through this procedure. To change it refer to ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Node
Manager manual.
1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
2. Press Change at the side of the Agent IP Address parameter.

48

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

3. Type the new IP address.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC
User Profile | System
WARNING The operation could cause the logout of the user.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
The Equipment Date/Time parameter shows the reference date/time of the equipment.
2. Press Align to PC time and confirm.
The value present in the box Equipment Date/Time is updated by the value of one’s PC.

Verify the equipment addresses
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
2. Select the Network tab.
The tab displays the equipment addresses (Ethernet port, LCT port, MAC address, IP Over OSI port,
NSAP)

Verify the equipment feature
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
2. Select the Equipment Feature tab.
The tab displays the equipment feature enabled on demand.

Enable a new equipment feature
User Profile | System
WARNING In order to enable one or more feature, IT IS NECESSARY to require the enabling certificate,
represented by a file (with sfc extension), to the company that provides the equipment.

For each equipment you wish to enable one or more feature, a specific enabling certificate is required, because there is an univocal link between each certificate and each specific equipment.
1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
2. Select the Equipment Feature tab.
3. Press Browse.
4. Select the certificate (file with sfc extension).
5. Press Open.
The selected file is indicated in the File name box.
6. Press Send Certificate File.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation:

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

49

Operation Done. The operation has been executed with success.

Invalid operation for this equipment…. The selected certificate and equipment are not compatible (wrong serial number or wrong MIB version, etc.).

Verify the equipment units
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
2. Select the Equipment Units tab.
The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.

Execute the equipment software reset
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.
2. Press Restart Equip. and confirm.

50

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Equipment Properties contextual area
The contextual area displays the equipment properties.
Tabs

General Info tab. Equipment properties: type, ID, SNMP IP address, firmware version, WEB LCT
ID and version, date/time, communication stack.
Network tab. Equipment addresses: Ethernet port, LCT port, MAC address, IP Over OSI port,
NSAP.
Equipment Feature tab. Functionalities enabled for the equipment.
Equipment Units tab. Equipment units.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Restart Equip. Execute the equipment software reset
Help. Open the help on-line.

General Info tab
The tab displays the general equipment properties.
Parameters

Equipment Type. Equipment type.
Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
Select the Change option to Modify the equipment identifier.
If the equipment is an element of a node parameter is read-only.
Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.
Select the Change option to Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment.
If the equipment is an element of a node parameter is read-only.
Firmware Version. File name and version of the equipment firmware present on the memory
bench in use.
WEB LCT Version. WEB LCT ALCplus2e version present into the equipment.
WEB LCT Product Code. Identification code of the WEB LCT ALCplus2e application present into
the equipment.
Equipment Date/Time. Reference date/time of the equipment.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
Select the Align to PC time option to Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC.
IP/OSI Stack. Communication stack in use.
See also

Update the firmware of the equipment
Update the WEB LCT application
Modify the communication stack in use

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

51

Network tab
The tab displays the equipment addresses.
Parameters

Ethernet IP Address. IP Address of the communication port with the LAN network (Ethernet
port).
Ethernet IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition of the Ethernet port.
Ethernet MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment.
LCT PPP IP Address. IP/PPP Address of the port for the connection to the PC (LCT port).
LCT PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition of the LCT port.
IP Over OSI. IP address of the internal communication port of the equipment for the interfacing
with the OSI router.
Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
Gosip Address. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.
Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
See also

Verify/modify the Ethernet port configuration
Verify/modify the LCT PPP port configuration
Verify/modify the IP Over OSI port configuration

Equipment Feature tab
The tab displays the list of the equipment feature enabled on demand.
Parameters

Feature name

52

Upgrade up to 8PSK. Maximum equipment modulation up to 8 PSK.

Upgrade up to 16QAM. Maximum equipment modulation up to 16 QAM.

Upgrade up to 32QAM. Maximum equipment modulation up to 32 QAM.

Upgrade up to 64QAM. Maximum equipment modulation up to 64 QAM.

Upgrade up to 128QAM. Maximum equipment modulation up to 128 QAM.

Upgrade up to 256QAM. Maximum equipment modulation up to 256 QAM.

Upgrade up to 14M. Channel spacing up to 14 MHz.

Upgrade up to 28M. Channel spacing up to 28 M Hz.

Upgrade up to 40M. Channel spacing up to 40 MHz.

Upgrade up to 56M. Channel spacing up to 56 MHz.

XPIC activation. XPIC functionality.

Built-in Fade Margin facility. Fade Margin functionality (calculation of the link margin).

SDH overhead and VC12 quality management. Monitoring of the alarms of 2Mbit/s
signal through PDH and SDH rings and transport of SOH bytes on one E1 Radio.

ETH OAM functionality. OAM-FM functionality for Ethernet network.

Sync eth support. Use of Ethernet synchronism sources.

OSPF functionality. OSPF protocol.

Sync quality management. Synchronisation quality management.

Enhanced Eth processing. Ethernet Enhanced functionality management.

Ieee1588 support. Enabling of PTP IEEE1588 protocol for the synchronisation of
Ethernet traffic.

Header compression inhibit. Disables the management of headers of the Ethernet
packets.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Eth ring protection. Ring Protection modality management.

Security package. Equipment security protocols management.

STM-1 transport. STM-1 Bulk functionality management.

E1 transport (PWE3). PWE3 functionality management.

Feature status

Enabled. The functionality is enabled.

Disabled. The functionality is not enabled.

File name. Path and name of the certificate which you wish to enable.
The Select .sfc file wording indicates that no certificate is selected
Push-button

Browse. Open the window of the O.S. for the selection of the certificate.
Send Certificate File. Enable a new equipment feature

Equipment Units tab
The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.
Every row of the table corresponds to an unit.
Parameters

Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment. The wording Unequipped indicates that
the unit is not physically present into the equipment.
Expected Type. Foreseen unit type. The wording Unequipped indicates that the unit is not foreseen.
HW Ver. Unit version.
Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
Par. Part Number. Part Number of the group that contains the unit. Usually the group represents the equipment part that can be replaced. Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the
field will result empty and the part that can be replaced will correspond to the unit itself.
Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit. If the unit is not contained
into a group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers to the unit.
Unit Alarms. Functional status of the unit. Each box identifies an alarm:

Fail. The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning.

Missing. The unit is not present into the equipment (Unequipped wording - Real Type
parameter) also if it is foreseen (unit name - Expected Type parameter).

Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the program interrogations.

HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen one (Expected Type parameter).

SW Mism. The firmware version present into the controller of the peripheral unit (Actual Release) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status (Release Bench) (see Verify the firmware version of the equipment).

The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

White. Alarm deactivated.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

53

Port Configuration & ACL
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The command Port Configuration & ACL manages the communication ports reserved to local and remote
supervision of the equipment, the control list of IP accesses (IP Access Control List) and allows resetting
the equipment software.
Operations

SUPERVISION

PORTS

Verify/modify the Ethernet port configuration
Verify/modify the LCT PPP port configuration
Verify/modify the Radio port configuration
Verify/modify the Radio 1A port configuration
Verify/modify the Radio 2A port configuration
Verify/modify the Line EOC port configuration
Verify/modify the IP Over OSI port configuration
IP ACCESS CONTROL LIST (ACL)
Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List
Add a rule to the IP Access Control List
Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List
Enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List
SOFTWARE

RESET

Execute the equipment software reset
GUI

Port Configuration & ACL contextual area
See also

Available of the communication port
IP Access Control List (info)

Verify/modify the Ethernet port configuration
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
The Ethernet tab displays the configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.
The description and the modality to change the parameters are pointed out here below.

IP Address. IP address of the communication port with the LAN network.
To change the parameter, type the new IP address in the box.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant Net Mask field.
If the selected equipment is configured as element of a node, the relevant IP address of the LAN
can NOT be modified through this procedure. To change it refer to ALCplus2/ALCplus2e Node
Manager manual.

Net Mask. Mask for the network address definition.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.

54

Alarm Severity - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling/severity status of the alarm of
missing/fault of the connection cable (MNGT/ Cable Fail) relevant to the specific LAN management:

Disable. Disabled alarm.

Status. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level: status signal.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level respectively:
Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.

To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list.

Enable - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the specific LAN management:

mdi. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network
Interface Card modality).

mdi-x. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch
modality).

auto. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic
modality.

disable. LAN management disable.

To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list.

Speed/Duplex - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the auto negotiation
and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used
by the specific LAN management:

full duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

half duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

full duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

half duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

auto speed duplex. The auto negotiation is enabled.

To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list.

In Band Management - LAN. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to the
supervision is achieved by means of the traffic LANs and/or the Radio ports of the Ethernet
Switch). If the LAN/Port boxes:

Not active (

Active (

). The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is not active.

). The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is active.

To change the parameter, activate/deactivate the specific boxes.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.13).
Ports where in-band supervision is enabled must have option 802.1Q enabled, in order to properly manage the single VLANs.
Parameter available only if the Tagging procedure of management packets is not active (see
MNGT VLan Tagging).
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node:

When the in band supervision is enabled, it is SUGGESTED to execute the backup of the
configuration of all the node elements. This is necessary because a possible replacement
of a node element needs a partial re-configuration in order to ensure the correct operation of the in band supervision.

The in-band supervision is not forwarded to the management LANs (MNGT/1 and MNGT/
2).

In Band Management - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the in band supervision:

0. No VLan is reserved for the in band supervision.

Value different from 0. For the in band supervision, the VLan with the specific ID is reserved.

A VLan for this management MUST be reserved when the in band supervision is active (at least
one LAN/Port box active).
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 4095; the activation of In Band Management is immediately enabled when the box relevant to the port is activated (restart is not necessary).
It is not possible to set, as ID, a value already used by a reserved VLAN (see Virtual Lan Config.
tab).
Parameter available only if the Tagging procedure of management packets is not active (see
MNGT VLan Tagging).

MNGT VLan Tagging - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Activation status of the Tagging procedure of management packets in input/output from the specific LAN management:

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

55

Disable. The Tagging procedure is not active: the TAG is not managed for the management packets in input to/output from the LAN.

Enable. The Tagging procedure is active: the TAG is managed for the management packets in input to/output from the LAN.
All the management packets in output from the equipment controller are tagged with the
VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure.

Enable Secure. The Tagging procedure is active: only the management packets with VID
value reserved for the Tagging procedure are accepted from the LAN.

To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list.
Parameter available only if the in band supervision is not active (see In Band Management).

MNGT VLan Tagging - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the Tagging procedure:

0. No VLan is reserved for the Tagging procedure.

Value different from 0. For the Tagging procedure, the VLan with the specific ID is reserved.

When the Tagging procedure is active (at least one box MNGT... active), a VLan for this management MUST be reserved.
To change the parameter, set a value between 1 and 4095. The Tagging procedure is immediately activated when the box relevant to a port is enabled (restart is not necessary).
Parameter available only if the in band supervision is not active (see In Band Management).
2. Press Apply and confirm.
If the message Warning! VLAN ID already defined in “Virtual Lan list” or Mac Learning disable is displayed, it means that at least one of the following condition is present:

The identifier set for the in-band supervision corresponds to that already used by a reserved
VLAN. Change the value in the VLan ID box.

The Ethernet port selected for the in-band supervision has not the MAC Address automatic learning enabled in the MAC Table. For this port, set the parameter MAC Learning to the value or
Learn on port basis.

3. Press Store and confirm.
4. Press Restart and confirm.

Verify/modify the LCT PPP port configuration
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the LCT PPP tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port for the connection to the PC where resides
the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
The description and the modality to change the parameters are pointed out here below.

IP PPP Address. IP/PPP address of the port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/
LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
To change the parameter, type the new IP address in the box.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP PPP NetMask field.

IP PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.

IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet
port (if the equipment is managed by IP protocol) or IP Over OSI (if the equipment is managed
by OSI protocol) as IP PPP Address and IP PPP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence,
the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be
modified by the user.

PC IP Address. IP address of the remote device:

Port IP Address + 1. The IP address of the considered port increased by 1 is assigned to
the remote device.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 is assigned to the port, the address
10.10.10.9 will be automatically assigned to the remote device.

56

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Ethernet Broadcast Ip Address - 1 or IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1. The last IP address valid for the IP subnetwork connected to the considered port is assigned to the remote device.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 with mask 255.255.255.0 is assigned to
the port, the address 10.10.10.254 will be automatically assigned to the remote device.
It is suggested to use this setting if you wish to use only one IP address, within the IP
subnetwork, for the connection to the PC.
If the equipment is managed with protocol:

IP, the value Ethernet Broadcast Ip Address - 1 is present.

OSI, the value IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1 is present.

Choose IP Address. The address set by the user in the box is assigned to the remote device.

To change the parameter, select the wished option and, only for the last option, type the wished
IP.
The PPP operating mode is automatic: the port self-configures in Server mode and, when the connection is set up, assigns the IP address to the remote device (see parameter PC IP Address).
3. Press Apply and confirm.
4. Press Store and confirm.
5. Press Restart and confirm.

Verify/modify the Radio port configuration
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The available of the Radio depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the Radio tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.
The description and the modality to change the parameters are pointed out here below.

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
To change the parameter, type the new IP address in the box.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.

IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet
port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address
is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the user.

PPP Mode. Operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the
remote device sets up the connection.

Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.

To change the parameter selects the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
4. Press Store and confirm.
5. Press Restart and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

57

Verify/modify the Radio 1A port configuration
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The available of the Radio 1A depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the Radio 1A tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 1 A signal.
The description and the modality to change the parameters are pointed out here below.

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
To change the parameter, type the new IP address in the box.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.

IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet
port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address
is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the user.

PPP Mode. Operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the
remote device sets up the connection.

Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.

To change the parameter selects the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
4. Press Store and confirm.
5. Press Restart and confirm.

Verify/modify the Radio 2A port configuration
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The available of the Radio 2A depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the Radio 2A tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.
The description and the modality to change the parameters are pointed out here below.

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.
To change the parameter, type the new IP address in the box.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.

IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet
port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address
is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the user.

PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the
remote device sets up the connection.

To change the parameter selects the wished option.

58

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

3. Press Apply and confirm.
4. Press Store and confirm.
5. Press Restart and confirm.

Verify/modify the Line EOC port configuration
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The available of the Line EOC depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the Line EOC tab.
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
The description and the modality to change the parameters are pointed out here below.

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
To change the parameter, type the new IP address in the box.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.

IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet
port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address
is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the user.

PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the
remote device sets up the connection.

To change the parameter selects the wished option.

Signal Input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:

Not Used. No interface.

E1. A timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).

To change the parameter select the wished option.

EOC. Setting of the E1/timeslot used for the connection with the remote terminal:

2Mb Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates that
the system does not use any tributary.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list.
If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the
synchronism (see Synchronisation).

Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot.
The wording Not Assigned indicates that no timeslot has ever been selected.
To change the parameter, type the number of the timeslot (value between 1 and 31).

Area available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
4. Press Store and confirm.
5. Press Restart and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

59

Verify/modify the IP Over OSI port configuration
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The available of the IP Over OSI port (IP Over OSI and NSAP tabs) depends on the equipment

protocol (see Tab.1).
The availability of the parameters present in the IP Over OSI tab depends on the equipment configuration
(see Tab.2).
1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the IP Over OSI tab.
The tab displays some configuration parameters of the internal communication port for the interfacing
with the OSI router.
The description and the modality to change the parameters are pointed out here below.

IP Address. IP address of the internal port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI
router.
To change the parameter, type the new IP address in the box.
The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field.

IP Net Mask. Mask for the internal network address definition.
To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.

Line EOC. Usage modality of the timeslot relevant to an E1:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Disable. The channel is not used.

To change the parameter select the wished option.
Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input box.

Signal Input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:

Not used. No interface.

E1. A timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).

To change the parameter select the wished option.
Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the User or Network value into the Line EOC
box.

EOC. Setting of the E1/timeslot used for the connection with the remote terminal:

2Mb Slot Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates
that the system does not use any tributary.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list.

Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot.
The wording Not Assigned indicates that no timeslot has ever been selected.
To change the parameter, type the number of the timeslot (value between 1 and 31).

Area available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.

Radio. Usage modality of the Radio channel:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Bridge. The radio channel is used in Bridge Mode.

Disable. The radio channel is not used.

To change the parameter select the wished option.

Radio 1A. Usage modality of the Radio 1A channel:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Bridge. The radio channel is used in Bridge Mode.

Disable. The radio channel is not used.

To change the parameter select the wished option.

60

Radio 2A. Usage modality of the Radio 2A channel:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Disable. The radio channel is not used.

To change the parameter select the wished option.
3. Select the NSAP tab.
The tab displays the remnant parameters for the configuration of the internal communication port which
interfaces with OSI router.
The description and the modality to change the parameters are pointed out here below.

Gosip Address. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.
To change the parameter, open the cascade menu and type in the box:

AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth and Reserv. the value of the corresponding byte/s.

Domain, the values of the bytes that represent the Domain.

Area, the values of the bytes that represent the area.

Sys. ID, the value of the wished System ID.

The Sel parameter is read only.
Press OK.
Press Set as Mac Address to set, into the Sys. ID box, the physical address of the equipment (MAC
Address).
4. Press Apply and confirm.
5. Press Store and confirm.
6. Press Restart and confirm.

Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the ACL tab.
3. The tab displays the IP Access Control List (ACL) of the specific IDU.

Add a rule to the IP Access Control List
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING A maximum of 32 rules can be inserted in the list.

Adding two rules with the same IP address/mask is not allowed.
1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the ACL tab.
3. Press Add.
4. In the Name box, set the name of the rule (alphanumeric string of maximum 31 characters).
5. In the IP Address box, set the IP subnetwork or the single IP address which the rule refers to.
6. In the Mask box set the netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork/IP address which the rule refers to (if
a single IP is set, the mask is 255.255.255.255).
7. In the Permission box, set the usage condition of the rule:

Deny Access. The IP subnetwork/IP address is not allowed accessing the equipment.

Allow Access. The IP subnetwork/IP address is allowed accessing the equipment.

8. If you wish the equipment allows or denies the access to any IP address, activate the check-box Any.
If you activates the check-box Any with selected the option:

Deny Access, the equipment will refuse packets sent by any IP address (with the exception
pointed out in par. IP Access Control List (info).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

61

Allow Access, the equipment will accept packets sent by any IP address.

Selecting the check-box Any is equivalent to setting IP address to 0.0.0.0 and netmask to 0.0.0.0.
9. Press Apply.
The rule is inserted in the list in alphanumerical order with respect to the name (Name column).
10.Press Apply and confirm.

Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the ACL tab.
3. Select the row relevant to the rule you wish to delete from the list.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
4. Press Remove and confirm.
The rule is removed from the list and communicated to the equipment.

Enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Select the ACL tab.
3. In the Status box, select the option:

Disable, to disable the use of the IP Access Control List.

Enable, to enable the use of the IP Access Control List.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Execute the equipment software reset
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

1. Select Main > Port Configuration & ACL.
2. Press Restart and confirm.

62

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Port Configuration & ACL contextual area
The contextual area displays the communication ports reserved to local and remote supervision of the
equipment, the control list of IP accesses (IP Access Control List).
Tabs

Ethernet tab. Configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.
LCT PPP tab. Configuration of the communication port for the connection to the PC where resides
the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Radio tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.
Radio 1A tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 1A signal.
Radio 2A tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal or Radio
2A signal.
Line EOC tab. Configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
IP Over OSI tab / NSAP tab. Configuration of the internal communication port for the interfacing
with the OSI router.
ACL tab. IP Access Control List (ACL).
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.
Store. Store the values into the equipment controller.
Retrieve. Read again the values set into the equipment controller.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Ethernet tab
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port with the LAN network.
Parameters

IP Address. IP address of the communication port with the LAN network.
Net Mask. Mask for the network address definition.
Alarm Severity - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling/severity status of the
alarm of missing/fault of the connection cable (MNGT/ Cable Fail) relevant to the specific LAN
management:

Disable. Disabled alarm.

Status. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level: status signal.

Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level respectively: Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.

Enable - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the specific LAN management:

mdi. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).

mdi-x. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch
modality).

auto. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.

disable. LAN management disable.

Speed/Duplex - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed
used by the specific LAN management:

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

63

full duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

half duplex 10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

full duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

half duplex 100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

auto speed duplex. The auto negotiation is enabled.

In Band Management - LAN. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to
the supervision is achieved by means of the traffic LANs and/or the Radio ports of the Ethernet
Switch). If the LAN/Port box is:

Not active (

Active (

). The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is not active.

). The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is active.

Parameter available only if the Tagging procedure of management packets is not active (see
MNGT VLan Tagging).
In Band Management - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the in band supervision:

0. No VLan is reserved for the in band supervision.

Value different from 0. For the in band supervision, the VLan with the specific ID is
reserved.

Parameter available only if the Tagging procedure of management packets is not active (see
MNGT VLan Tagging).
MNGT VLan Tagging - MNGT/<LAN management number>. Activation status of the Tagging procedure of management packets in input/output from the specific LAN management:

Disable. The Tagging procedure is not active: the TAG is not managed for the management packets in input to/output from the LAN.

Enable. The Tagging procedure is active: the TAG is managed for the management
packets in input to/output from the LAN.

All the management packets in output from the equipment controller are tagged with
the VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure.

Enable Secure. The Tagging procedure is active: only the management packets with
VID value reserved for the Tagging procedure are accepted from the LAN.

Parameter available only if the in band supervision is not active (see In Band Management).
MNGT VLan Tagging - VLan ID. VLan identifier reserved for the Tagging procedure:

0. No VLan is reserved for the Tagging procedure.

Value different from 0. For the Tagging procedure, the VLan with the specific ID is
reserved.

Parameter available only if the in band supervision is not active (see In Band Management).
See also

Verify/modify the Ethernet port configuration

LCT PPP tab
The tab displays the configuration of the communication port for the connection to the PC where resides
the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
Parameters

IP PPP Address. IP/PPP address of the port for the connection with the PC where resides the
SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
IP PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PC IP Address. IP address of the remote device:

64

Port IP Address + 1. The IP address of the considered port increased by 1 is assigned
to the remote device.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 is assigned to the port, the address
10.10.10.9 will be automatically assigned to the remote device.

Ethernet Broadcast Ip Address - 1 or IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1. The last IP
address valid for the IP subnetwork connected to the considered port is assigned to
the remote device.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 with mask 255.255.255.0 is assigned
to the port, the address 10.10.10.254 will be automatically assigned to the remote
device.
If the equipment is managed with protocol:

IP, the value Ethernet Broadcast Ip Address - 1 is present.

OSI, the value IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1 is present.

Choose IP Address. The address set by the user in the box is assigned to the remote
device.

The PPP operating mode is automatic: the port self-configures in Server mode and, when the
connection is set up, assigns the IP address to the remote device (see parameter PC IP Address).
Push-button

IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port (if the equipment is managed by IP protocol) or IP Over OSI (if the equipment is managed by OSI protocol) as IP PPP Address and IP PPP NetMask of the considered port. As
consequence, the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value,
which can be modified by the user.
See also

Verify/modify the LCT PPP port configuration

Radio tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the radio signal.
Parameters

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. Operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.

Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.

Push-button

IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the
user.
See also

Verify/modify the Radio port configuration

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

65

Radio 1A tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 1A signal.
Parameters

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. Operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.

Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.

Push-button

IP Unnumbered The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the
user.
See also

Verify/modify the Radio 1A port configuration

Radio 2A tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.
Parameters

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the Radio 2A signal.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.

Push-button

IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the
user.
See also

Verify/modify the Radio 2A port configuration

66

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Line EOC tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol/configuration (see Tab.1).

The tab displays the configuration of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
Parameters

IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the EOC signal.
IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.
PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:

Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and
keeps active the connection to the remote device.

Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for
the remote device sets up the connection.

Signal Input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:

Not Used. No interface.

E1. A timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).

EOC. Setting of the E1/timeslot used for the connection with the remote terminal:

2Mb Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates
that the system does not use any tributary.

Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot. The wording Not Assigned indicates that
no timeslot has ever been selected.

Parameter available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
Push-button

IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port as IP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the
user.
See also

Verify/modify the Line EOC port configuration

IP Over OSI tab

WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol (see Tab.1).

The availability of the parameters present in the tab depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.2).
The tab displays some configuration parameters of the internal communication port for the interfacing with
the OSI router.
Parameters

IP Address. IP address of the internal port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI
router.
IP Net Mask. Mask for the internal network address definition.
Line EOC. Usage modality of the timeslot relevant to an E1:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Disable. The channel is not used.

Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input box.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

67

Signal Input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:

Not used. No interface.

E1. A timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).

Parameter meaningful only if it has been selected the User or Network value into the Line EOC
box.
EOC. Setting of the E1/timeslot used for the connection with the remote terminal:

2Mb Slot Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used indicates that the system does not use any tributary.

Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot. The wording Not Assigned indicates that
no timeslot has ever been selected.

Parameter available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal Input area.
Radio. Usage modality of the Radio channel:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Bridge. The radio channel is used in Bridge Mode.

Disable. The radio channel is not used.

Radio 1A. Usage modality of the Radio 1A channel:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Bridge. The radio channel is used in Bridge Mode.

Disable. The radio channel is not used.

Radio 2A. Usage modality of the Radio 2A channel:

User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.

Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.

Disable. The radio channel is not used.

See also

Verify/modify the IP Over OSI port configuration

NSAP tab
WARNING The available of the tab depends on the equipment protocol (see Tab.1).

The tab displays the remnant parameters for the configuration of the internal communication port which
interfaces with OSI router.
Parameters

Gosip Address. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.
Push-button

Set as Mac Address. Set, into the Sys. ID box (Gosip Address), the physical address of the
equipment (MAC Address).
See also

Verify/modify the IP Over OSI port configuration

68

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

ACL tab
The tab displays the IP Access Control List (ACL).
Parameters

Status parameter indicates the use status of the IP Access Control List:

Enable. The use of the IP Access Control List is enabled: the access to the equipment
by other elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is allowed only if the IP address of the element matches the rules pointed out in the list.

Disable. The use of the IP Access Control List is disabled: the access to the equipment
by other elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is not defined by the rules pointed out in the
list.

Table. Rules used by the IP Access Control List. Each line identifies a rule:
Name. Name of the rule.
IP Address. IP subnetwork or single IP network which the rule refers to.
Mask. Netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork or to the IP address which the rule refers to.
Permission. Usage conditions of the rule:

Allow Access. The IP subnetwork/address is allowed accessing the equipment.

Deny Access. The IP subnetwork/address is not allowed accessing the equipment.

The rules are sorted in alphanumeric order with respect to their name (Name column).
Push-button

Add. Add a rule to the IP Access Control List.
Remove. Remove a rule from the IP Access Control List.
See also

Enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List
IP Access Control List (info)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

69

Available of the communication port
Depending on the type of configuration and protocol (IP/OSI) managed by the equipment, only the tabs
relevant to the communication ports managed by this configuration and/or protocol will be available as
shown in Tab.1.
For the IP Over OSI port the availability of the parameters present in the IP Over OSI tab depends on the
equipment configuration (see Tab.2).
Tab.1 Available of the communication ports
IP
Radio configuration

(1)

PROTOCOL

In Band Management
option

Unequipped

Enable/Disable

Ethernet
LCT PPP
Line EOC

1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option disable

Disable

Ethernet
LCT PPP
Radio
Line EOC

Enable

Ethernet
LCT PPP
Line EOC

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option enable

Disable

Ethernet
LCT PPP
Radio 1
Radio 2

Enable

Ethernet
LCT PPP

OSI
Radio configuration

(1)

Unequipped
1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option disable/enable
(1)

70

Available
communication ports

PROTOCOL

In Band Management
option

Available
communication ports

Enable/Disable

Ethernet
LCT PPP
IP Over OSI (IP Over OSI
and NSAP tabs)

See Configurator.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Tab.2 Available parameters of the IP Over OSI tab
Radio configuration (1)
Unequipped

In Band Management
option

Parameters present in the
IP Over OSI tab

Enable/Disable

IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC

1+0
1+1 Freq. Div
1+1 Hot Standby
2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe
2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe
2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option disable

Disable

IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC
Radio

Enable

IP Address
IP Net Mask
Line EOC
Signal Input
EOC

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe with East-West
option enable

Disable

IP Address
IP Net Mask
Radio 1
Radio 2

Enable

IP Address
IP Net Mask

(1)

See Configurator.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

71

IP Access Control List (info)
The IP Access Control List is a mechanism used to control and filter the source IP addresses which are allowed accessing to equipment.
This mechanism consists in a list of rules (Access Control Entry) which determine if an IP subnetwork or a
single IP address is allowed accessing to the selecting equipment.
Every rules are composed by a descriptive part and a decision-making part. The descriptive part of the rule
is represented by the IP address (or by a set of IP addresses) source of the packet. The decision-making
part is the action to execute: making the packet passes (Allow Access) or refusing it (Deny Access).
For an ALCplus2e equipment, the analysis of the packet consists in considering the following conditions:
1. The rules present in ACL are considered only if the use of ACL itself is enabled.
2. The control is applied only to the packets destined to the local equipment.
3. The access to the equipment is always allowed by the LCT PPP port (see Port Configuration & ACL).
4. The access is always allowed if the IP address coincides with that of a user who has executed a Login
procedure. The user is allowed modifying ACL without involving the loss of the connection with the
equipment.
5. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is not contained in any Deny Access
rule.
6. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is contained in, at least, one Allow
Access rule.
7. If ACL does not contain rules, enabling it is equivalent to forbidding the access to the equipment from
the Ethernet ports to every IP address.

72

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Routing Table
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING When all pieces of equipment belongs to the same IP network and sending packets to other networks is not necessary, the Routing Table and the address of the Gateway equipment must not be necessarily defined because the network can manage its own internal traffic.

Setting the Routing Table and Default Gateway is necessary when equipment must send packets between
two different networks, then the traffic must be re-routed from a network to another one (routing functionality of the equipment).
The Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Operations

Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment
Add an element to the Routing Table
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway
Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway
GUI

Routing Table contextual area
See also

Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)

Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway used by the equipment
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Routing Table.
The Routing Table contextual area displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).

Add an element to the Routing Table
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Routing Table.
2. Press Add.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network
5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the equipment acting as Gateway for the destination network.
6. Press Apply.
The new element is inserted into the table. The system records the new element into the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

73

Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Routing Table.
2. Select the element of the Routing Table.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Local protocol) cannot be deleted.
3. Press Remove and confirm.
The system deletes the element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into
the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).

Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Routing Table.
2. Into the Default Gateway box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.
In the next box is automatically indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway
equipment corresponds to.
3. Press Apply (next to Delete push-button) and confirm.
The system inserts the new Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong
to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.

Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Routing Table.
2. Press Delete and confirm.
The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).

74

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Routing Table contextual area
The contextual area shows the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the
equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
Each row of the table corresponds to an item of the Routing Table.
Parameters

Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element.
Net Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element.
Hop. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway.
Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected
to:

Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.

Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.

Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.

Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.

Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb
EOC communication port.

<no wording>. internal port (internal loopback).

The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI). The
current setting of the parameters relevant to each port can be verified selecting Main > Port
Configuration & ACL.
Protocol. Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between specific port (Interface) and destination IP network:

Local. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface. The IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software.

NetMgmt. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the
user (static element).

Ospf. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment
interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the OSPF
protocol (dynamic element).

Other. All the other situations that are not comprised into one of the previous cases
(this label generally does not shown; it has been anticipated for future uses).

Default Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Running Default Gateway. The following box indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds to.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Add. Add an element to the Routing Table.
Remove. Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table.
Apply. Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway.
Delete. Delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway.
See also

Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

75

Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)

Routing Table

The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages
exchanged among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one
network to the other one.
Running Routing Table
Each equipment at its initialization (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements
of the Routing Table that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication
ports provided with the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal).
These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.
If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically
change it into the equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the
equipment, because the elements of the Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.
If it is necessary, the user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other
ones.
The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller
(Stored Routing Table); the system does not record the elements (automatically set) into
the backup memory of the controller because they are newly set at every equipment
start-up.
The Running Routing Table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the
elements present into the Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up.
Stored Routing Table
The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the equipment restart.
In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the
Routing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid
only for the elements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants
to change an address of the equipment supervisory ports.
In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table).
The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At the next equipment
start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing
Table used by the equipment.
Default Gateway

The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a
receiver unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.

76

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Stored Routing Table
User Profile | System

The Stored Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Operations

Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory of the controller
Add an element into the Stored Routing Table
Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table
Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
GUI

Stored Routing Table contextual area
See also

Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)

Verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway present into the backup memory
of the controller
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > Stored Routing Table.
The Stored Routing Table contextual area displays the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway
address present in the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored
Default Gateway).

Add an element into the Stored Routing Table
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > Stored Routing Table.
2. Press Add.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network.
5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the equipment acting as Gateway for the destination network.
6. Into the Interface box, set the supervisory port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment
is connected to:

Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.

Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or
the browser for the start of WEB LCT.

Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.

Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.

Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb EOC communication port.

The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI).
7. Press Apply.
The system inserts the new element into the table.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

77

8. Press Save and confirm.
The system saves the new element into the backup memory of the equipment.
The system records the new element ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will insert this new element also in the current routing table (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements whose equipment (Hop)
is associated to an active interface.

Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > Stored Routing Table.
2. Select the element of the Stored Routing Table.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
3. Press Remove and confirm.
4. Press Save and confirm.
The system removes the element from the backup memory of the equipment.
The system deletes the element ONLY from the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will delete such an element also into the current Routing Table (Running Routing Table).

Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > Stored Routing Table.
2. Into the Default Gateway box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.
3. Into the next box, set the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds
to:

Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.

Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or
the browser for the start of WEB LCT.

Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.

Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.

Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb EOC communication port.

The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI).
4. Press Apply (next to Delete push-button) and confirm.
5. Press Save and confirm.
The system saves the new IP address of Default Gateway into the backup memory of the equipment.
The system records the IP address of Default Gateway ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment
(Stored Routing Table). The equipment will display such an IP address only at the next restart procedure of the equipment itself.

Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > Stored Routing Table.
2. Press Delete and confirm.
3. Press Save and confirm.
The system removes the IP address of Default Gateway from the backup memory of the equipment.

78

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Stored Routing Table contextual area
The contextual area shows the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present in the backup
memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
Each row of the table corresponds to an item of the Routing Table.
Parameters

Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element.
Net Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element.
Hop. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway.
Interface. Supervision port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment is connected
to:

Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.

Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.

Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.

Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.

Radio 2A/Line EOC. Communication port represented by the 2A radio signal or 2Mb
EOC communication port.

The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI). The
current setting of the parameters relevant to each port can be verified selecting Main > Port
Configuration & ACL.
Protocol. Parameter not meaningful in this context.
Default Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Stored Default Gateway. The next
box indicates the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds
to.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Read again the data from the memory of the equipment after a Retrieve command.
For instance, if the user wants updating the Stored Routing Table displaying the elements manually added by the user into the Running Routing Table, he has to press Retrieve and later the
Refresh one.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Add. Add an element into the Stored Routing Table.
Remove. Remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table.
Retrieve. Read again the data from the backup memory and load them into the equipment
memory.
Save. Save the elements of the table into the backup memory of the equipment.
Apply. Set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table.
Delete. Delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table.
See also

Routing Table and Default Gateway (info)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

79

Performance Monitoring
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The Performance Monitoring command manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
Operations

Verify the status of the PM measures
Activate a PM measure
Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously
Deactivate a PM measure
Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms
Reset the values of the records daily and primary
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms
Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (G828 E1 Line Side/G828 E1 Internal Side)
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)
GUI

Performance Monitoring contextual area
See also

PM measures
PM measures (info)

Verify the status of the PM measures
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Master or Reserve > Performance Monitoring.
The Performance Monitoring contextual area displays the PM measures available.
The measures are subdivided in groups. Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the
group can be expanded. The measures of only one group at a time can be displayed:
G828 group
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure, checks the quality of the received signal at radio
side.
G828 E1 Line Side measure, checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU
board E1 (tributary A or B) at line side.
G828 E1 Internal Side measure, checks the quality of the received signal from one of the
IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at internal side.
RxPwr group
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure, checks the power of the signal at reception.
TxPwr group
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure, checks the power of the signal at transmission.
ACM group
ACM Radio <radio branch> measure, traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
G829 RstB1 group
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure, checks the quality of the received signal
at line side (STM-1).
G829 MstB2M1 group

80

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure, checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
G828 Vc12 group
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure, checks
the quality of the received VC-12 into the STM-1.
Next to every measure, the relevant status is displayed:
Stopped. The measure is not on progress.
Running. The measure is on progress.

Activate a PM measure
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Select the group that contains the measure.
3. Execute one of the following operations:

Press Start at the side of the measure in Stopped status to be activated and confirm.
The measure is started-up and its status switches from Stopped to Running.

Press Show at the side of the measure in Stopped status to be activated.
In the <PM measure name> window, select the Start command and confirm.
The measure is started-up.

Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Select the group.
3. Press Start Current and confirm.
The not active measures are started and their status passes from Stopped to Running.

Deactivate a PM measure
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Select the group that contains the measure.
3. Execute one of the following operations:

Press Stop at the side of the measure in Running status to be deactivated and confirm.

Press Show at the side of the measure in Running status to be deactivated.

The measure is stopped and its status switches from Running to Stopped.
In the <PM measure name> window, select the Stop command and confirm.
The measure is stopped.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

81

Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Select the group.
3. Press Stop Current and confirm.
The active measures are stopped and their status passes from Running to Stopped.

Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Show at the side of the wished measure.
The window displays the results of the measures and the status of the alarms relevant to the exceeding
of the threshold limits (see Fig.4).
Fig.4 Window (PM measure)

1

2

3
(1)

4

Commands:
Refresh. Update the data.
Clear Counters. Reset the values contained into the records (daily or primary).
Clear Alarms. Execute the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding.
Start. Active the measure. Command displayed in alternative to the Stop.
Stop. Deactive the measure. Command displayed in alternative to the Start.
Chart View. Not available for the current version of the application.
Commons. Set the thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.

(2)

Measuring unit of the parameters in the table. The option changes according to the measures:
G828 and G829 measures

Seconds. Into the table there are the parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.

Blocks. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the blocks as measuring
unit.

ACM Radio measure

82

Seconds. The counters relevant to the ACM profiles are present in the table.

UpDownShift. The counters DownShift and UpShift are present in the table.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

RxPwr Radio measure

Rlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring
unit.

TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.

TxPwr Radio measure

Tlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring
unit.

TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.

To change the type of the displayed parameters, select the arrow present on the side of the label
and choose from the list the new value.
(3)

Status of the threshold exceeding alarms and configuration parameters. These fields change according to the selected measure:
G828 and G829 measures

15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.

UAS. Unavailability alarm.

2Mb Selection. Tributary used for the measure. The No 2Mb Used wording indicates that
no tributary is set for the measure.
Parameter available only for the G828 E1 Line Side and G828 E1 Internal Side measure.

ACM Radio measure

15M <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

24H <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the daily
observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.

Policy. Modality used to increase the counters:

Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile
is equal to the one currently active.

Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM
profile is higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation).

Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and
the current modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:

Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.

Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.

RxPwr Radio measure

15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.

Rlt Thresh. Threshold levels of the received power actually set. These parameters can
be configured by the user.

TxPwr Radio measure

15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.

Tlt Thresh. Threshold levels of the transmitted power actually set. These parameters
can be configured by the user.

The colour of the alarm boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical,
Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

83

(4)

Table representation of the measure results. For every parameter, the result of the measure is
pointed out relevant to a given observation period (daily or primary record):

Type. According to the selected measure this field indicates:

G828, G829, RxPwr Radio and TxPwr Radio measures: Control parameters (see
PM measures).
Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit (see
note 2).

ACM Radio measure: Counters. One counter is foreseen for every ACM profile (see
PM measures).
For every counter, the column of the specific observation period indicates (expressed
in seconds) the number of times the counter is increased. The rule used to increased
a counter changes according to the currently active modality (see Policy parameter).
Besides one counter per modulation, two further counters are foreseen:

DownShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period,
has changed assuming a profile lower than the previous one.

UpShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period,
has changed assuming a profile higher than the previous one.

Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the counters.
Such results have been subdivided according to the counter type (see note 2).

Curr. Day. Current daily record (24 hours).

Last Day. Preceding daily record.

Curr. 15m. Current primary record (15 minutes).

15m 4h. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).

What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row indicates the status
of the records (Counters Status):

Mean.less. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by
errors.

Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and it detected some performance
errors. If one or more alarms are active (see note 3) means that the counter(s) have
exceeded their threshold value.

Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record
gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day.

Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could
have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles.

Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the equipment. When the equipment
has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure
point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status.

---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.

Reset the values of the records daily and primary
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Show at the side of the wished measure.
3. Select the Clear Counters command and confirm.
The values displayed into table are reset.

84

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Reset the threshold exceeding alarms
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Show at the side of the wished measure.
3. Select Clear Alarms and confirm.
All the active alarm status boxes are deactivated, except for the unavailability alarms (present only for
G828 and G829).

Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Show at the side of the wished measure.
3. Select Commons.
The Commons window displays a list of options on the left side. The selection of each option displays,
in the right part of the window, the relevant parameters. If the:
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>, G828 Radio <radio branch>, G828 E1 Line Side or G828 E1 Internal Side measure is selected, the following parameters are present in the window:

General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters:

N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with SES over which starts the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10).

N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without
SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10).

N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed as percentage of the errored blocks - over which
it is declared a SES.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 100% (default 30%).

15M Es. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H Es. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M Ses. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

85

24H Ses. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M Sep. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute
period - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H Sep. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour period - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

UAS. Severity of the UAS alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter select the wished option.

G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> or G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3TUG2-TUG12> measure is selected, the following parameters are present in the window:

86

General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters:

N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with SES over which starts the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10).

N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without
SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10).

N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed as percentage of the errored blocks - over which
it is declared a SES.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 100% (default 30%).

15M Es. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es FE alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H Es. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 rep-

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

resents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es FE alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M Ses. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses FE alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H Ses. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses FE alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M Sep. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute
period - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep FE alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP FE events within a 15
minute period - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H Sep. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

87

24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour period - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep FE alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of SEP FE events within a 24
hour period - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

UAS. UAS alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter select the wished option.

UAS FE. UAS FE alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter select the wished option.

UAS Bidi. UAS BIDI alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter select the wished option.

ACM Radio <radio branch> measure is selected, the following parameters are present in the window:

88

15M 4QAMS. Severity and threshold of the 15M 4QAM Strong alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M 4QAMS Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M 4QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 4QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M 8PSK. Severity and threshold of the 15M 8PSK alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M 16QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 16QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M 32QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 32QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M 32QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 32QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M 64QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 64QAM alarm:

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M 64QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 64QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M 128QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 128QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M 128QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 128QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

15M 256QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 256QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

15M 256QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute
period, when the counter 256QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H 4QAMS. Severity and threshold of the 24H 4QAM Strong alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H 4QAMS Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H 4QAM. Severity and threshold of the 24H 4QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H 8PSK. Severity and threshold of the 24H 8PSK alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H 16QAM. Severity and threshold of the 24H 16QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H 32QAM. Severity and threshold of the 24H 32QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H 32QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 32QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 rep-

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

89

resents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H 64QAM. Severity and threshold of the 24H 64QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H 64QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 64QAM has increased- over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H 128QAM. Severity and threshold of the 24H 128QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H 128QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 128QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

24H 256QAM. Severity and threshold of the 24H 256QAM alarm:

Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H 256QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour
period, when the counter 256QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure is selected, the following parameters are present in the window:

15M Rlts. Threshold and severity of the 15M Rlts alarms:

Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as
number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the received power is lower than
the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - over which the system activates the
relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default
0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H Rlts. Threshold and severity of the 24H Rlts alarms:

Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as
number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the received power is lower than the
RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 86400 (default
0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

Rlt. Threshold levels of the received power:

Rlt 1 <current value> dBm, Rlt 2 <current value> dBm, Rlt 3 <current value> dBm, Rlt
4 <current value> dBm, Rlt 5 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second,
the third, the fourth and the fifth threshold level of the received power.
To change a threshold, move the cursor over a value comprised between -100dBm and
-20dBm.

To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm.
In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a branch
are not automatically reported even on the other branches.
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure is selected, the following parameters are present in the window:

15M Tlts. Threshold and severity of the 15M Tlts alarms:

90

Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of
seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1,

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default
0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

24H Tlts. Threshold and severity of the 24H Tlts alarms:

Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of
seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1,
TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 86400 (default
0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.

Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

Tlt. Threshold levels of the transmitted power:

Tlt 1 <current value> dBm, Tlt 2 <current value> dBm, Tlt 3 <current value> dBm, Tlt
4 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second, the third and the fourth
threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change a threshold move the cursor over a value comprised between -40dBm and
35dBm.

To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm.
In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a branch
are not automatically reported even on the other branches.
Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (G828 E1 Line Side/G828 E1 Internal
Side)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING The operation is not available when the system uses as supervisory port (EOC) equipment tributary (see Port Configuration & ACL). In such a case, the system automatically uses for the PM measures,
the same tributary used for the supervisory operations.

The change of the tributary for the G828 E1 Line Side measure automatically changes the value of the
tributary for the G828 E1 Internal Side measure and vice versa.
1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 E1... measure.
3. Select Commons.
4. In the Commons window, select the 2Mb Selection option.
The 2Mb Selector parameter indicates the 2Mbit/s used for the calculation oft he measure control parameters. The selected value:

Trib A, the tributary A is used for the measure.

Trib B, the tributary B is used for the measure.

No 2Mb Used, no tributary is set for the measure.

To change the parameter, select the wished value from the list (Trib A or Trib B).
If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the synchronism
(see Synchronisation).
Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window.
5. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

91

Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING This operation stops the measure ACM Radio, if active.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.
2. Press Show at the side of the ACM Radio <radio branch> measure (ACM group).
3. Press Change.
4. In the Policy window, select the option:

Active Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is equal to the currently active
one, are increased.

Not Available Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation), are
increased.

5. Press Apply and confirm.

92

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Performance Monitoring contextual area
The contextual area shows the PM measures.
The measures are subdivided in groups. Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the group
can be expanded. The measures of only one group at a time can be displayed.
PM measures

G828 group
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio
side.
G828 E1 Line Side measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU
board E1 (tributary A or B) at line side.
G828 E1 Internal Side measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the
IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at internal side.
RxPwr group
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
TxPwr group
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
ACM group
ACM Radio <radio branch> measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
G829 RstB1 group
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure checks the quality of the received signal
at line side (STM-1).
G829 MstB2M1 group
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
G828 Vc12 group
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure checks the
quality of the received VC-12 into the STM-1.
Next to every measure the relevant status is pointed out:
Stopped. The measure is not on progress.
Running. The measure is on progress.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Start Current. Activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously.
Stop Current. Deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously.
Start. Active the specific measure. Push-button displayed in alternative to the Stop.
Stop. Deactive the specific measure. Push-button displayed in alternative to the Start.
Show. Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of the specific measure.
See also

Activate a PM measure
Deactivate a PM measure
Display the results and the threshold exceeding alarms
Reset the values of the records daily and primary
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and of the alarms
Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (G828 E1 Line Side/G828 E1 Internal Side)
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)
PM measures
PM measures (info)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

93

PM measures

G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>
G828 Radio <radio branch>
G828 E1 Line Side
G828 E1 Internal Side
G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>
ACM Radio <radio branch>
RxPwr Radio <radio branch>
TxPwr Radio <radio branch>

G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>
WARNING Measure available only if the management of STM-1(s) is active (see Configurator).

The measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>
WARNING Measure available only if the management of STM-1(s) is active (see Configurator).

The measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parameters:
Byte B2
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of

94

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
Byte M1
BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting
of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into
the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
Byte B2 and M1
UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according
to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

G828 Radio <radio branch>
WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.

The G828 Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

G828 E1 Line Side
WARNING To execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.

Measure not available if the PWE3 function is enable (see Configurator).
The measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at
line side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

95

ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

G828 E1 Internal Side
WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.

To execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.
Measure not available if the PWE3 function is enable (see Configurator).
The measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 (tributary A or B) at
internal side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>
WARNING Measure available only if the management of STM-1(s) is active (see Configurator).

Measure not available if the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
The measure checks the quality of the received VC-12 into the STM-1.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.

96

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting
of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into
the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according
to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

ACM Radio <radio branch>
WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.

Measure meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is active.
The ACM Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles (transmitter) in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters (UpShift and DownShift):
4QAM Str. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM Str. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
4QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode*.
8PSK. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 8PSK. The rule used to increase the counter changes
according to the active increase mode*.
16QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 16QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
32QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 32QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
64QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 64QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
128QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 128QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
256QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 256QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
DownShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has
changed assuming an ACM profile lower than the previous one.
UpShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming an ACM profile higher than the previous one.
* The counters relevant to the ACM profiles can be increased according to the following modes:

Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to
the one currently active.

Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher
than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

97

Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:

Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.

Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.

The mode used to increase the counters of the ACM profiles is common to all the counters and must be
selected by the user.

RxPwr Radio <radio branch>
WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.

The RxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15
min or 24 hours).
Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold
level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 5 threshold levels.
The parameters are implemented according to the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.

TxPwr Radio <radio branch>
WARNING Measure available only if the equipment is provided with the radio.

The TxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in 1+1 or 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
The measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period
(15 min or 24 hours)
Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the pre-defined
threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.
The parameters are implemented according to the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.

98

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

PM measures (info)
A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of
specific parameters.
Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can
be changed).
The exceeding of the threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition generates an alarm.
The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as
normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the threshold limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms.
The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure
type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommendations (for instance G.828, G.826, etc.).
The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed only after a command forwarded
by the user.
When it has been activated a PM measure, the main controller of the equipment starts the storing of the
values relevant to the control parameters. The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each
record contains the values recorded into a specific time range (observation period).
If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another
observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure.
The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary records) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated but such
records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the
daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time
11.4011.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.3011.45), while the first daily record will have as observation period 11.4000.00.
When the user requires the display of the results of the PM measures, the daily and primary records relevant to the running PM measures are displayed in the WEB LCT page of the equipment.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary
records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day).
The preceding records are overwritten.
When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record.
If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the
system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure.
For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly
activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.009.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.099.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.029.07 will not be
stored.
If equipment has some PM measures on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will successively restarted or turned on the measures activated before the turning off will be automatically re-started.
The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measure has been stopped, will result empty
and when it has been reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the preceding records.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

99

Report & Loggers Maint.
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The Report & Loggers Maint. command saves to file the equipment configuration, the status/alarm signals and the operations executed by the users.
Operations

Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users to file
Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller
Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller
GUI

Report & Loggers Maint. contextual area

Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users to file
User Profile | Read Only, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING In order to execute this operation, the display of menu bar in the browser must be active.

1. Select Main > Report & Loggers Maint.
2. Activate, in the Report Options area, the information you wish to save to file:

Inventory report. Whole equipment configuration: WEB LCT version, properties, list of units, status/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default gateway, remote equipment list,
User Inputs, User Outputs, operating parameters, etc.

Fault report. List of status/alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms) and
signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history).

Command Log. List of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX users,
stored in the equipment controller.

It is possible to select one or more options. Depending on the activated options, a file will be created
containing the relevant data.
3. Press Generate Report.
In sequence, are displayed:

Report WEB page, where the information, which will be saved to file depending on the activated
options, are pointed out.

A window displaying the save mode of the file according to the browser currently in use.

4. Follow the instructions in the window to save the file.
The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Report WEB page.

Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > Report & Loggers Maint.
2. Press Delete all alarm logger events and confirm.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.

100

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > Report & Loggers Maint.
2. Press Delete all command logger items and confirm.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

101

Report & Loggers Maint. contextual area
The contextual area allows to save to file the equipment configuration, the status/alarm signals and the
operations executed by the users.
Parameters

Inventory report. Whole equipment configuration: WEB LCT version, properties, list of units,
status/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default gateway, remote equipment
list, User Inputs, User Outputs, operating parameters, etc.
Fault report. List of status/alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms)
and signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history).
Command Log. List of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX users,
stored in the equipment controller.
It is possible to select one or more options. Depending on the activated options, a file will be created
containing the relevant data.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Generate Report. Save the configuration, the alarms and the operations executed by the users
to file
Delete all alarm logger events. Delete the alarms stored into the equipment controller
Delete all command logger items. Delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller

102

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Report WEB page
The WEB page Report, depending on the activated options, shows:
Web LCT Version. WEB LCT ALCplus2e version present into the equipment.
Equipment Configuration, BW & Mod./link ID, ACM Table, General Preset, etc. Equipment parameters. The whole equipment parameters are subdivided in groups. The format of the parameters
present in each group is self-explicative and changes according to the type of represented data.
Command Logger. Operations list. To each operation, it is devoted a record that shows the following
information:

Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation. The format of date/time
changes according to the setting made in the operating system.

Source address. IP address of the machine from which it has been executed the operation.

User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.

Object. Object to which the operation refers.

Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.
The instances relevant to the OAM-FM objects (see OAM) refer to numeric indicators having the
following meaning:

OAM CFM MA. The instance relevant to this object have 2 formats: one with two field and
one with three fields. The format with:

2 fields is equivalent to <Domain identifier>.<MA identifier> (for example 1.500).

3 fields is equivalent to <Bridge identifier>.<Domain identifier>.<MA identifier>
(for example 1.1.500).

OAM CFM MEP. The instance is equivalent to <Domain identifier>.<MA identifier>.<MEP
identifier> (for example 1.500.602).

In the equipment managed by WEB LCT/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX:

<MA identifier> corresponds to the VLAN identifier (VLAN ID).

<Bridge identifier> corresponds to 1.

Value Set. Set value.

The presence of the symbol  shows that the information is not available because it is a not significant
one for the type of operation to which it refers.
Current Alarm. To each signal, it is devoted a record that indicates the following information:

Severity. Type of signal:

Status. Status signal

Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm detected coupled respectively with the Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical severity.

Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the signal. The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.

Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the signal.

Alarm Log. Alarms history. To each signal, it is devoted a record that indicates the following information:

Severity. Type of signal:

Disable. Alarm signal reset

Status. Status signal

Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm detected coupled respectively with the Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical severity.

Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the signal. The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.

Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the signal. If:

The wording CLEARED is absent, the record refers to a detected alarm.

The wording CLEARED is present, the record refers to a cleared alarm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

103

SNTP & Wake Up Config.
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The SNTP & Wake Up Config. command manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time
of the equipment from a network element (SNTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality).
Operations

Verify the SNTP functionality
Set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality
Disable the SNTP functionality
Verify the Wake Up functionality status
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
Disable the Wake Up functionality
GUI

SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area
See also

SNTP functionality (info)
Wake Up functionality (info)

Verify the SNTP functionality
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > SNTP & Wake Up Config.
The SNTP tab displays the activation status of SNTP functionality and the current setting of the relevant
execution parameters.

Set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING The execution parameters (Main Server IP Address, Reserve Server IP Addr, etc.) can be modified even when the SNTP functionality is already active.

1. Select Main > SNTP & Wake Up Config.
2. Set the IP address of the main element present in the network, from which the equipment automatically
gets the reference date/time, in the Main Server IP Address box.
Typing a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) involves the activation of the automatic acquisition of the
reference date/time.
3. Set the IP address of the secondary element present in the network, from which the equipment automatically gets the reference date/time, in the Reserve Server IP Address box.
4. Set the time interval between a request of refresh of the reference date/time and the next one in the
Polling Interval (Sec.) box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 16777215 seconds.
5. Set the time interval (t) the equipment must wait for, before re-attempting the transmission of a request to the main or secondary element in the Polling Timeout (Sec.) box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 30 seconds.

104

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

6. Set the number of times that the equipment must re-attempt the transmission of a request to the main
or secondary element in the Polling Retries box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 10.
7. Press Apply and confirm.

Disable the SNTP functionality
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > SNTP & Wake Up Config.
2. Reset the value present in the Main Server IP Address box.
The value can be reset deleting the IP address present in the box or setting the value 0.0.0.0.
3. Reset the value present in the Reverse Server IP Address box.
The value can be reset deleting the IP address present in the box or setting the value 0.0.0.0.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the Wake Up functionality status
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

1. Select Main > SNTP & Wake Up Config.
2. Select the Wake Up tab.
The tab displays the sending status of the Wake Up trap and the current setting of the relevant sending
parameters.

Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING The execution parameters (NMS IP Address, Timeout, etc.) cannot be modified when the Wake
Up functionality is already active. To modify them, it is necessary Disable the Wake Up functionality and
them modify them.

Operation meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.
1. Select Main > SNTP & Wake Up Config.
2. Select the Wake Up tab.
3. Set the IP address of the server, which the Wake Up trap must be sent to, in the NMS IP Address box.
4. Only if the equipment and the server are inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP address (Gosip
Address box) opening the cascade menu and typing in the box:

AFI, IDI, Ver, Auth and Reserv. the value of the corresponding byte/s.

Domain, the values of the bytes that represent the Domain.

Area, the values of the bytes that represent the area.

Sys. ID, the value of the wished System ID.

The Sel parameter is read only.
5. Press OK.
6. Set the time interval, for which the Wake Up trap is sent at the end of which it is automatically disabled,
in the Timeout (Minutes) box.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

105

Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 0 and 1440 minutes.
The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or the
NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
7. Set the physical location (for example, the name of the site) of the equipment in the NE Location box.
The setting of the parameter is optional.
8. Select the Enable option.
9. Press Apply and confirm.

Disable the Wake Up functionality
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

1. Select Main > SNTP & Wake Up Config.
2. Select the Wake Up tab.
3. Select the Disable option or reset the value present in the NMS IP Address box (value 0.0.0.0).
4. Press Apply and confirm.

106

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area
The contextual area displays the parameters to configure the automatic acquisition of the reference date/
time of the equipment from a network element (SNTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality).
Tabs

SNTP tab. SNTP functionality configuration.
Wake Up tab. Wake Up functionality configuration.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

SNTP tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the SNTP functionality.
Parameter

Main Server IP Address / Reserve Server IP Addr. Activation status and IP address of the
main NE (Main) and of the secondary NE (Reserve) present in the network which the equipment
automatically gets the reference date/time from. The automatic acquisition of the reference
date/time of the equipment is:

Active, when a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is present in the Main Server IP
Address and/or Reverse Server IP Address box.

Inactive, when the value 0.0.0.0 (IP address reset) is present in the boxes Main Server IP Address and Reverse Server IP Address.

Polling Interval (Sec.). Time interval (expressed in seconds) between a request of reference
date/time update and the next one.
Polling Timeout (Sec.). Time interval (expressed in seconds) that the equipment must wait
before re attempting the transmission of a request to the main or secondary element.
Polling Retries. Number of times that the equipment must re attempt the transmission of a
request to the main or secondary element.
NTP Server Lost Alarm. The activation of the NTP Server Lost Alarm indicates that none of the
set network elements is reachable, as consequence the reference date/time of the equipment is
not aligned. The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

See also

Set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality
Disable the SNTP functionality
SNTP functionality (info)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

107

Wake Up tab
WARNING Tab meaningful only for equipment which use protocol SNMPv1/v2c.

The tab displays the configuration parameters of the Wake Up functionality.
Parameter

Status. Transmission status of Wake Up trap. The sending of the Wake Up trap is:

Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).

Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).

NMS IP Address. IP address of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to. With server
we mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a different management system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed.
Gosip Address. NSAP address (Gosip) of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to.
Parameter meaningful and available only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network.
Timeout (Minutes). Time interval for which the Wake Up trap, when enabled, is sent to the
server. The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually
disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
NE Location. Optional parameter. The user can insert the physical location (for example the
name of the site) of the equipment in this field. This information is communicated to the remote
manager together with the characteristics of the equipment. The supervision system NMS5UXB or NMS5LX does not use this information.
See also

Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
Disable the Wake Up functionality
Wake Up functionality (info)

108

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

SNTP functionality (info)
The ALCplus2e equipment, via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) protocol, can update its date/time
using an element within the network as reference (SNTP functionality).
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible to define a maximum of two elements, one main (set
in the Main Server IP Address box) and one secondary (set in the Reserve Server IP Addr box) from which
the equipment automatically gets the reference date/time each n seconds (set in the Polling Interval box).
Entering a valid value for the main and/or secondary element causes the activation of the functionality.
If the main element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/time, this
request is sent for n times (set in the Polling Retries box) each t seconds (set in the Polling Timeout box).
At the end of this requests, if the main element does not answer, the equipment requires the updating of
the date/time to the secondary element.
If the secondary element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/
time, this request is sent for n times each t seconds. At the end of this request, if the secondary element
does not answer the equipment, the system activates the NTP Server Lost Alarm and requires the update
of the date/time of the main element and so on.
If no network element set can be reached, the reference date/time of the equipment is not updated. This
condition is signalled by the activation of NTP Server Lost Alarm (SNTP tab).
To deactivate the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time, it is necessary to reset the IP address
of the main and secondary elements.
See also

Verify the SNTP functionality
Set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality
Disable the SNTP functionality
SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

109

Wake Up functionality (info)
WARNING What reported here below is valid when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol (see SNMP

protocol (info).
The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a remote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).
This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the supervision
systems NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX.
The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not managed by
the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is reported in the relevant
documentation.
This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. The implementation of
the Wake Up functionality is the following.
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible:

Define the IP address and the NSAP address (meaningful only if equipment and server are inserted within an OSI network) of the server where the supervision system, which the trap must
be sent to (NMS IP Address option - Wake Up tab) is installed.

Define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the trap is
automatically disabled (Timeout option).
If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the user
manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.

Activate and deactivate the sending of the trap.
To activate the Wake Up functionality, it is necessary to set a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
as IP address of the server (NMS IP Address option) and select the Enable option.
To deactivate the functionality, it is necessary to select the Disable option or reset the NMS IP
Address option (value 0.0.0.0).

When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap every minute
for the time interval defined by the user (Timeout option). For example, if the value 60 has been set as
timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the sending of the trap is automatically
disabled.
If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up
notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables the sending of the
Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off).
See also

Verify the Wake Up functionality status
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
Disable the Wake Up functionality
SNTP & Wake Up Config. contextual area

110

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

SD Memory Management
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The SD Memory Management command manages the SD memory card (Secure Digital Memory Card)
for the backup/restore of the equipment software and configuration.
Operations

Verify the status and the configuration of the SD
Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU
Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD
MANAGEMENT

AND MAINTENANCE OF THE

SD

Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to the controller
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
GUI

SD Memory Management contextual area
See also

SD memory card (info)

Verify the status and the configuration of the SD
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
The SD Memory Management contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the SD present in the IDU unit.

Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING In case of replacement of the IDU unit of equipment, it is possible to use the SD, where the
equipment configuration and software (Boot SD) have been previously saved, to restart the new controller
based on the data present in SD.

This operation is very important because it avoids the equipment re-configuration necessary after a change
of the IDU unit.
Here below the whole procedure is described, which must be applied so that the automatic equipment restart from SD is successful.
1. Save the equipment configuration and software to the SD:
a. Insert the SD in the equipment.
b. Open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment.
c. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
d. Press Create BOOT SD and confirm.
The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD, the following operations are executed in this order:

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

111

Deletion of all the files present in the SD.

Creation of the file structure of type Boot SD.

Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).

Copy of the backup files (configuration parameters).

If the operation has been successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the
parameter Type assumes the value Boot SD.
e. Press:

Enable automatic restore (all) and confirm, to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD: at the restart, both the configuration data and the equipment software
will be pasted from the SD to the new controller.

Enable automatic restore (Data only) and confirm, to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD: at the restart, only the configuration data will be pasted from the
SD to the new controller.

If the operation has been successful and, in the previous step, the selected command was:

Enable automatic restore (all), the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Automatic SW download from SD assume the value Enabled.

Enable automatic restore (Data only), the parameter Automatic data restore from SD assumes the value Enabled.

At this point, if the SD is not removed from the equipment, the controller activates the automatic synchronisation of the data: this means that every configuration change is automatically saved even to the
SD.
If the equipment software is updated, this is not automatically saved into the SD. Moreover, the procedure for the automatic restart is aborted (the parameters Enable automatic restore (all) and/or Enable automatic restore (Data only) assume the value Disabled). In this case, it is suggested to execute
again this procedure in order to enable again the SD to the automatic restart.
2. As soon as the equipment becomes faulted and the IDU unit needs to be replaced, switch off the malfunctioning IDU, remove the SD card and insert it in the new IDU unit.
3. Install and switch the new IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment and sw configuration into the new controller, the following checks are
executed:

The status of the equipment controller must be Replaced Controller.

The data structure of the SD must be of type Boot SD.

The value of EC serial number (present in the descriptor file of SD) must be different from that
stored in the equipment controller.

In the descriptor file of the SD, the automatic restart from SD must be active (parameter Automatic SW download from SD and/or Automatic data restore from SD - value Enabled).

In case of automatic restart enabled only for the configuration data (selection of the Enable automatic restore (Data only) command - see step 1e), the configuration data stored in the SD
must be referred to equipment sw version older than or equal to that currently active in the controller.

If the above mentioned checks were successful:
a. The backup configuration files are copied from the SD to the controller.
b. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded). This operation is executed only if:

The Enable automatic restore (all) command has been selected at step 1e.

The running version of the equipment software (Running) is different from that present
in the SD.

c. The Serial Number of the controller present in the descriptor file of the SD is updated.
d. The Serial Number of the equipment controller is updated.
e. The controller with change of the memory bench in use (Bench Switch) is forced to restart if
even the sw update (selection of the Enable automatic restore (all) command - see step 1e) has
been required.
f. The controller restarts with the updated sw (if required) and applying the configuration data read
from the SD.

112

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the automatic restart is not executed
and the controller stays in status Replaced Controller waiting for an intervention of the user.

Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING If the equipment software must be updated on different equipment, the SD can be used to execute the operation automatically without the use of the management software (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or
NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).

Here below the whole procedure, which must be applied in order that the automatic update of the equipment sw from SD is successful, is described.
1. Save the equipment software master to the SD:
a. Insert the SD into the equipment where the new sw version is present.
b. Open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment
c. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
d. Press Create Sw DWL SD and confirm.
The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD, the following operations are executed in this order:

Deletion of all the files present in the SD

Creation of the file structure of type Sw Dwl SD.

Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).

If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the parameter Type assumes the value Sw download SD.
e. Press Enable automatic restore and confirm, in order to enable the automatic update of the
equipment sw from SD on the equipment restart.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Automatic SW download from SD assumes the
value Enabled.
f. Press Enable “Not running” Sw delete and confirm, if you wish that, once the update and the
change of the memory bench of the controller are ended, the sw present in the bench StandBy
(bench where the old sw is present), is automatically deleted.
If the operation was successful, the parameter “Not running” Sw delete assumes the value Enabled.
2. Switch the equipment off, remove the SD card and insert it into another equipment whose software you
wish to update.
The removal of the SD card can be executed even with equipment on. In this case, the integrity of the
data present on the memory is not ensured, because when the equipment is on, the system performs
writing operations in background on SD card. The removal of the memory during one of these operations could damage the data present in the memory itself.
3. Switch the IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment sw into the new controller, the following checks are executed:

The data structure of the SD must be of type Sw Dwl SD.

The automatic update from SD must be active in the descriptor file of the SD (parameter Enable
automatic restore).

The sw version stored in the SD must be different from both the versions present in the memory
benches of the controller.

If the above mentioned checks were successful:
a. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded).
b. The restart of the controller with change of the memory bench in use is forced (Bench Switch)
and, then, if set (see step 1.f), the sw present in the StandBy bench is deleted.
c. The controller restarts with the updated software.
If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the operation is not executed.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

113

Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING This operation deletes ALL the files of the structure Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD. The deletion of a

single file os not foreseen.
1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
2. Press Delete SD files and confirm.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Not formatted.

Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
2. Press Disable automatic restore and confirm.
Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Automatic SW download from SD assume the value Disabled.

Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after
an automatic sw update from SD
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
2. Press Disable “Not running” Sw delete and confirm.
Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameter “Not running” Sw delete assumes the value
Disabled.

Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to
the controller
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Boot SD are present.

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
2. Press Force automatic restore and confirm.

Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.

1. Select Main > SD Memory Management.
2. Press Copy Sw from SD and confirm.
The equipment sw is copied from the SD to the controller, overwriting the inactive memory bench
(Loaded status).

114

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

SD Memory Management contextual area
The contextual area displays the status and the configuration of the SD present in the equipment.
Parameters

Status. SD status:
SD status

Presence of SD in
the equipment

Compatibility SD data
structure - equipment

Compatibility SD data equipment type

Loaded

Yes

Yes

Yes

Equipment Type
Mismatch

Yes

Yes

No

Not formatted

Yes

No

No

Not Present

No

-

-

Type. Type of data present in SD:

Boot SD. The SD contains the equipment configuration parameters and the equipment software.

Sw download SD. The SD contains only the equipment software.

Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present or memory data structure not
recognized/compatible with the equipment, etc.).

Automatic data restore from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the configuration data from
SD:

Enabled. The automatic update of the data from SD is enabled.

Disabled. The automatic update of the data from SD is not enabled.

Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).

Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
Automatic SW download from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the equipment software
from SD:

Enabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD is enabled.

Disabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD is not enabled.

Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).

“Not running” Sw delete. Enabling of the automatic deletion of the equipment software present in the StandBy memory bench (status Loaded - see Software Info & Maint.) after an automatic sw update from SD:

Enabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is enabled.

Disabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is not enabled.

Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).

Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Sw Dwl SD.
EC serial number. Serial number of the controller which has generated the version of the data
and equipment software present in SD.
The empty field indicates that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
EC system version. File name and version of the equipment software currently used by the
controller which has generated the version of Boot SD present in the SD.
The empty field shows that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
SW system version. File name and version of the equipment sw present in the SD.
The empty field shows that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
In the left part of the contextual area, the commands for the management of SD are displayed. Tab.3 lists the commands. For every command, the use, depending on the data present
in the SD, and the mean times for the execution of the operation are pointed out.
The No actions available! wording shows that the SD is not present.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

115

Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU
Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to the controller
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
SD memory card (info)

116

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

SD memory card (info)

Storing the equipment data into SD
Use of the SD for the equipment management
Commands for the management/maintenance of SD
Warnings about the correct use of SD card

Storing the equipment data into SD
ALCplus2e equipment is provided with a reader, which allows storing the following equipment data on SD
(Secure Digital) memory cards:
Equipment configuration parameters and equipment software. Saving these data generates a
data structure named Boot SD into the SD.
Equipment software. Saving these data generates a data structure named Sw Dwl SD into the
SD.
WARNING Both the data structures cannot be saved at the same time in the same SD. The creation of the
structure Boot SD automatically deletes the data structure Sw Dwl SD and vice versa.

What just said is valid only for the information with data structure recognized by ALCplus2e equipment and
relevant management programs (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX). Any other type of data
stored in SD (user file) is not deleted or damaged by the commands described in this chapter.
When the user saves the configuration parameters and/or the equipment software on SD, the following file
data structure is automatically created:
Root
Descriptor.txt. Descriptor file of text type, where the characteristics of the data present in the
SD are present: type of equipment the data refer to, type of data in SD (Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD),
etc.
This information is used by the management software to execute the compatibility checks between the data of the SD and the equipment where the SD is inserted.
Backup. Backup file of the equipment configuration parameters
Software. Files of equipment software (equipment Sw/Fw + WEB LCT)
If SD is of type Sw Dwl SD, the directory Backup will be empty.
ALCplus2e equipment supports the following cards:

SD memory card (Secure Digital).

SDHC memory card (Secure Digital High Capacity).

Use of the SD for the equipment management
The SD can be used to make the following operations easy and fast:

Execute the automatic equipment restart from SD in case of replacement of IDU
This operation allows saving the whole equipment configuration, sw/fw included, on the SD and
keeping it constantly updated.
In fact, after the creation of the data structure of type Boot SD in the SD, the controller, after
any configuration change, updates the data present in the in the SD, keeping them constantly
updated.
When the equipment is faulted, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the faulted IDU unit
and insert it into the new IDU unit.
When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the data and the
sw present in the SD are copied into the controller returning the equipment configuration to the
condition before the fault.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

117

Execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD
This operation allows saving, on the SD, the new equipment sw/fw which will result to be the
master sw to use for the updating of other equipment.
At this point, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the IDU and to insert into a different IDU.
When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the sw present
in the SD is copied into the controller.

As help for the management of SD, by means of the SD Memory Management contextual area, the following can be executed:
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the StandBy memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD
Force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD to the controller
Copy the equipment sw from the SD to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
SD memory card (info)

Commands for the management/maintenance of SD
The commands available to the user for the management/maintenance of the SD are listed in Tab.3.
The table shows, for every command, the use depending on the type of data structure present in the SD
and the mean execution times of the operations.
Tab.3 Commands for the management of SD
Command
Create BOOT SD
Create Sw DWL SD

SD without data structure

SD with data structure Boot SD

SD with data structure Sw Dwl SD

Time

(1)

It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment configuration parameters and
equipment sw (Boot SD) from the controller to the SD

5 min.

It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment sw (Sw Dwl SD)
from the controller to the SD

5 min.

It deletes all the files of the structure Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD

1/2 min.

Delete SD files
Copy Sw from SD

-

-

It copies the equipment sw from SD
to controller overwriting the inactive
memory bench (status Loaded).

5 min.

Enable automatic
restore (all)

-

It enables the automatic equipment
restart from SD: when the equipment
restarts, both the configuration data
and the equipment sw will be copied
from the SD.

-

1/2 sec.

Enable automatic
restore (Data only)

-

It enables the automatic equipment
restart from SD: when the equipment
restarts, only the configuration data
will be copied from the SD to the new
controller

-

1/2 sec.

Enable automatic
restore

-

-

It enables the automatic equipment
restart from SD: when the equipment
restarts, the equipment sw will be
copied from the SD to the controller.

1/2 sec.

Disable automatic
restore

-

It disables the automatic update of
the equipment sw from SD

1/2 sec.

118

It disables the automatic restart of
the equipment from SD

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Command

SD with data structure Boot SD

SD with data structure Sw Dwl SD

Enable
“Not running”
Sw delete

-

-

It enables the automatic deletion of
the equipment sw present in the
StandBy memory bench (status
Loaded - see Software Info & Maint.)
after an automatic update of the sw
from SD

1/2 sec.

Disable
“Not running”
Sw delete

-

-

It disables the automatic deletion of
the equipment sw present in the
StandBy memory bench after an automatic update of the sw from SD

1/2 sec.

Force automatic
restore

-

It forces the restore, from SD to controller, of the configuration data and
of the equipment sw

-

5 min.

(1)

Time

(1)

SD without data structure

Mean execution time of the operation.

Warnings about the correct use of SD card

Deletion of data

The SD card supplied with the equipment is ready for use (formatting not needed).
Once used for the first time, the data stored in the SD card can be deleted using the commands
present in WEB LCT (see Commands for the management/maintenance of SD).
It is suggested never to format the card, because a wrong formatting (unknown format) will prevent the SD card to work correctly.
Removal of SD card

It is suggested to remove the SD card from the equipment only after it has been switched off.
Only in this way, we are sure not to damage the data stored in the card because, when the
equipment is on, writing operations are performed in background on SD card.
The removal of the memory during one of these activities could damage the data present in the
memory itself.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

119

Software Info & Maint.
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The Software Info & Maint. command manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present
in the equipment, the communication stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default equipment settings.
Operations

EQUIPMENT

FIRMWARE

Verify the firmware version of the equipment
Update the firmware of the equipment
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller
WEB LCT
Verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment
Update the WEB LCT application
COMMUNICATION

STACK/FACTORY

DEFAULT

Verify the communication stack in use
Modify the communication stack in use
Restore Factory Default of the equipment
SOFTWARE

RESET

Execute the equipment software reset
GUI

Software Info & Maint contextual area
See also

Equipment firmware (info)
Factory Default of the equipment (info)

Verify the firmware version of the equipment
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
The Equipment Firmware tab shows version, status and composition of the equipment firmware.

Update the firmware of the equipment
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING The application automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not
present (Bench Status parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value).

This operation cannot be executed when the firmware update is already in progress (Download Status parameter - Downloading value).
The firmware update procedure could change the equipment functions.
Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Security Config.), check out that:

120

Protocol FTP. The program WEB LCT Console or the program SCT/LMT is active, otherwise start
them.

Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on one’s PC (see Installation and configuration of SSH
server).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Moreover, if the protocol SNMPv1/v2c is used, the default SFTP credentials are the same of the
SCT user, used to access the WEB LCT page. If the protocol SNMPv3 is used, the equipment is
not provided with default SFTP credentials. In this case, the credentials must be set (see Migrate
from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol).
1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
2. Press Upgrade.
3. In the box Download file path, type the path and the name of the file you wish to use for update.
The file you wish to use for the operation must be on the local PC (PC where the browser used for the
display of WEB LCT is running).
4. Set the download type to be executed, selecting the option:

Forced, if you are updating the firmware of main controller of the equipment.

Only difference or not present / peripheral, if you are updating the firmware of peripheral units
(FPGA file and/or application code).

5. Activate the Bench Switch? box, if at the end of the download, the system has automatically to execute
a switching of the memory bench in such a way to use the bench with the firmware that has been updated.
6. Press Start and confirm.
Before executing the updating, the system executes a compatibility check between the file to be forwarded to the equipment and the one present on the terminal.
The check consists of comparing the technology type of the equipment.
If the parameters are incompatible, the application does not executes the firmware update: the wording
Interrupted is displayed in the Download Status box of the bench whose firmware you are updating.
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Download Status box of the bench
whose firmware you are updating dynamically updates the progress of the operation, which requires
some minutes:

Downloading. The operation is running.
The Abort push-button, present in the Download Status box during the firmware update, can
be used to stop the operation. Its selection requires the confirmation.
During the updating, the system deletes the firmware present into the bench memory and it updates the firmware of the equipment one component at a time.
If the operation is stopped, into the memory bench there will be only the already updated components. In this case, the new version can result unusable because it is not an integral one (the
bench will be in Not Loaded status).
In this case, the controller keeps the minimum functions necessary to allow a new updating of
the firmware.

Complete. The update operation is ended.
The Software Version box shows the new firmware version.

Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Memory benches cannot be switched during the firmware update (Download Status parameter
- Downloading value) and when the firmware of the equipment is not present on a bench (Bench Status
parameter - Not Loaded value).

Usually, the switch of the memory benches of main controller does NOT interrupt the traffic. This operation
can temporarily interrupt the traffic if the new loaded version contains a new FPGA version.
1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
2. Press Bench Switch and confirm.
The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status
and vice versa.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

121

Verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
2. Select the Web LCT tab.
The tab displays the characteristics of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment.

Update the WEB LCT application
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
2. Select the Web LCT tab.
3. Press Browse.
4. Select the file you wish to use for the update.
The File name box displays the selected file.
5. Press Upload and the confirm.
Before starting the update, the compatibility between the WEB LCT which must be sent to the equipment and the one present in the terminal is checked.
The check consists in comparing the type of equipment.
If the parameters are not compatible, the application does not execute the update of WEB LCT (the
system displays the message Upload aborted. Probable cause wrong).
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started. The update requires some minutes.
At the end of the operation, to avoid the misalignment between the displayed data and the new application, the WEB LCT page is closed and the page Login is displayed.

Verify the communication stack in use
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
2. Select the IP/OSI stack switch tab.
The tab displays the communication stack in use.

Modify the communication stack in use
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
2. Select the IP/OSI stack switch tab.
3. Select the option relevant to the new communication stack: IP or OSI.
4. Activate the Factory Default check-box if you wish that the change of communication stack restores the
default equipment settings.

122

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The operation, if executed on equipment subjected to the radio supervision, could cause the loss of the
link because the restore of the factory settings involves the re-channelling of the radios to the default
values.
5. If the equipment uses the protocol:

SNMPv1/v2c. Press Apply. Into the Please insert system password box, type the access code of
System user and press OK.

SNMPv3. Press Apply and confirm.

At the end of the operation, the message The new settings will be active after a software restart is displayed.
6. Press OK to close the window.
7. Press Restart and confirm.
If the Factory Default check-box has been activated at step 4, the default configuration will be automatically applied at the equipment restart (see Factory Default of the equipment (info).

Restore Factory Default of the equipment
User Profile | System
WARNING The operation, if executed on equipment subjected to the radio supervision, could cause the loss

of the link because the restore of the factory settings involves the re-channelling of the radios to the default
values.
1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
2. Select the IP/OSI stack switch tab.
3. Activate the Factory Default check-box.
4. If the equipment uses the protocol:

SNMPv1/v2c. Press Apply. Into the Please insert system password box, type the access code of
System user and press OK.

SNMPv3. Press Apply and confirm.

At the end of the operation, the message The new settings will be active after a software restart is displayed.
5. Press OK to close the window.
6. Press Restart and confirm.
The default configuration will be automatically applied at the equipment restart (see Factory Default of
the equipment (info).

Execute the equipment software reset
User Profile | System
WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.
2. Select the IP/OSI stack switch tab.
3. Press Restart and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

123

Software Info & Maint contextual area
The contextual area displays the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT present in the equipment, the communication stack used by the equipment.
Tabs

Equipment Firmware tab. Version and status of the equipment firmware.
Web LCT tab. Version of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment.
IP/OSI stack switch tab. Communication stack in use.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Equipment Firmware tab
The tab shows the version, the status and the composition of the equipment firmware.
Parameters

FIRST

TABLE.

Version and status of the equipment firmware.

Software Version. File name and version of the equipment firmware respectively present on
the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column).
Bench Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2
column):

Running. It is on progress the firmware relevant to the subject memory bench.

Loaded. The firmware is present into the bench but actually it is not on progress
(StandBy).

Not Loaded. The firmware is not present into the memory bench.

Downloading Status. Status of the update operation of the firmware respectively present on
memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column):

---. Firmware update is not in progress.

Downloading. It is on progress the updating of the firmware relevant to the memory
bench.

Interrupted. The update of the firmware has been interrupted.

Complete. The update operation is ended.

SECOND TABLE. List of the codes and of the FPGA files that compose the equipment firmware. Every row
corresponds to a firmware element (code or FPGA) for which is pointed out in the column:
Unit. Name of the unit or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or the programmable device (FPGA file).
Software. Firmware name. Usually the name shows the component type:

FW_Boot. Boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not provided
with a version of the memory benches.

FW_appl. Application code.

Conf or FPGA Configuration file of the programmable devices.

Actual Release. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller.
For some elements, the system shows the version and also the relevant identification code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a different code type).
Release Bench 1. Firmware version present into the memory bench 1 of the controller.
Release Bench 2. Firmware version present into the memory bench 2 of the controller.

124

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Push-button

Upgrade. Update the firmware of the equipment.
Bench Switch. Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller.
See also

Equipment firmware (info)

Web LCT tab

The tab displays the characteristics of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment.
Parameters

Description. Application type present into the equipment (WEB LCT).
Code. Identification code of the WEB LCT application present into the equipment.
Current version. WEB LCT version present into the equipment.
Push-button

Browse. Open the window of the O.S. for the selection of the file you wish to use for the update.
Upload. Update the WEB LCT application.

IP/OSI stack switch tab
WARNING Tab available only to System.

The tab displays the communication stack in use of the equipment.
Parameters

Current Stack. Communication stack in use:

IP. Communication stack Full IP.

OSI. Communication stack IP Over OSI.

Push-button

Apply. Modify the communication stack in use and/or Restore Factory Default of the equipment.
Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.
See also

Factory Default of the equipment (info)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

125

Equipment firmware (info)
The firmware of the equipment is the assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management of the
entire equipment (firmware of the main controller and firmware of the peripheral units).
The firmware of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory benches (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status.
Each bench can contain one firmware version (also different from the other one) of the equipment.
It is possible to update the sw/fw of the equipment, relevant to a memory bench, at a time. The application
automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not present (Bench Status
parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value).

126

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Factory Default of the equipment (info)
Through the WEB LCT application, the Factory Default settings of equipment can be restored.
This operation can be executed during the change of the equipment communication stack (see Modify the
communication stack in use) or as independent operation (see Restore Factory Default of the equipment).
In both cases, at the restart or at the new switch-on of the equipment, the Factory Default configuration
will be applied.
All the settings executed until then by the user will be deleted (for example, user list, remote equipment
list, cross connections, etc.).
In order to login to the equipment, the default user must be used. Username: SYSTEM - Password: siaemicr.
The communication ports of the equipment will be restored to the addresses pointed out in Tab.4.
These addresses differ depending on the type (High or Low) of ODU of branch 1. The equipment keeps
always in memory the type (High or Low) of the last connected ODU. If no ODU has never been connected
to the IDU, the addresses of ODU Low must be used. If an ODU of High type is connected to equipment
configured with ODU of Low type (and vice versa), the equipment automatically changes its own default
addresses.
Tab.4 Factory Default - ALCplus2e
IF
Parameter
Ethernet port

LCT PPP port

Line EOC port

Radio 1A port

Default Gateway

Agent IP Address

IP Over OSI port

Default Gateway

Agent IP Address

NETWORK

IP Address

NetMask

ODU

172.20.254.14

255.255.255.0

Low

172.20.255.15

255.255.255.0

High

172.20.1.2

255.255.255.248

Low

172.20.1.9

255.255.255.248

High

172.20.2.2

255.255.255.248

Low

172.20.2.9

255.255.255.248

High

172.20.3.2

255.255.255.248

Low

172.20.3.4

255.255.255.248

High

172.20.3.4

-

Low

172.20.3.2

-

High

THE EQUIPMENT IS INSERTED INTO AN

Parameter

LCT PPP port

IP

As IP Address of the LCT PPP port
IF

Ethernet port

THE EQUIPMENT IS INSERTED INTO AN

IP Address

OSI

NETWORK

NetMask

ODU

172.20.254.14

255.255.255.0

Low

172.20.255.15

255.255.255.0

High

172.20.1.2

255.255.255.248

Low

172.20.1.9

255.255.255.248

High

172.20.9.2

255.255.255.0

Low

172.20.9.4

255.255.255.0

High

172.20.9.4

-

Low

172.20.9.2

-

High

As IP Address of the LCT PPP port

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

127

Backup/Restore Config.
User Profile | Station Operator, System

The Backup/Restore Config. command manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment
configuration.
Operations

Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)
GUI

Backup/Restore Config. contextual area
See also

Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)

Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Security Config.), check out that:

Protocol FTP. The program WEB LCT Console or the program SCT/LMT is active, otherwise start
them.

Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on one’s PC (see Installation and configuration of SSH
server).
Moreover, if the protocol SNMPv1/v2c is used, the default SFTP credentials are the same of the
SCT user, used to access the WEB LCT page. If the protocol SNMPv3 is used, the equipment is
not provided with default SFTP credentials. In this case, the credentials must be set (see Migrate
from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol).

1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config.
2. Type, in the Backup file name box, the path where you wish to save the file and the name of the file
with bak extension.
It is possible to set a name already existing for the file in the chosen path. In this case, the data present
in the file will be overwritten.
WARNING If the equipment uses the SFTP protocol you must set the path defined during the configu-

ration of the SSH server (see Installation and configuration of SSH server - SFTP tab).
3. Press Backup and confirm.
A window shows the progress of the operation.
To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm.
A message displays the result of the operation.

Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Security Config.), check out that:

128

Protocol FTP. The program WEB LCT Console or the program SCT/LMT is active, otherwise start
them.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on one’s PC (see Installation and configuration of SSH
server).
Moreover, if the protocol SNMPv1/v2c is used, the default SFTP credentials are the same of the
SCT user, used to access the WEB LCT page. If the protocol SNMPv3 is used, the equipment is
not provided with default SFTP credentials. In this case, the credentials must be set (see Migrate
from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol).

If equipment uses SNMPv3 protocol, the operation will allow retrieving the list of SNMPv3 users only if executed on the same IDU which has generated the backup file.
If the configuration restore is made on a different IDU, the list of SNMPv3 users is not retrieved and the
IDU will be restarted with SNMPv1/v2c protocol active.
1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config.
2. Set, in the Restore file name box, the name of the file you wish to use to restore the configuration.
3. Press Restore and confirm.
A window shows the progress of the operation.
To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm.
A message displays the result of the operation.

Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the
last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Depending on the protocol set for the file transfer (see Security Config.), check out that:

Protocol FTP. The program WEB LCT Console or the program SCT/LMT is active, otherwise start
them.

Protocol SFTP. A SSH server is installed on one’s PC (see Installation and configuration of SSH
server).
Moreover, if the protocol SNMPv1/v2c is used, the default SFTP credentials are the same of the
SCT user, used to access the WEB LCT page. If the protocol SNMPv3 is used, the equipment is
not provided with default SFTP credentials. In this case, the credentials must be set (see Migrate
from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol).

1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config.
The Reverte parameter shows the date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program
before the last restore operation.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in one’s operating system.
The wording --- shows that the file is not available.
2. Press Revert and confirm.
A window shows the progress of the operation.
To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm.
A message displays the result of the operation.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

129

Backup/Restore Config. contextual area
The contextual area contains the items to manage the backup/restore of the file of the whole equipment
configuration.
Parameters

Backup file name. Path and name of the file which you wish to save the whole equipment configuration to.
Restore file name. Path and name of the file which you wish to use for the restore of the previously saved configuration.
Reverte. Date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program before the last restore operation.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in one’s operating system. The
wording --- shows that the file is not available.
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Backup. Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration).
Restore. Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration).
Reverte. Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the
last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration).
See also

Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)

130

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)

Backup

The WEB LCT program allows save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration).
The saved file is in binary format and can be saved on PC or external support according to the
user needs.
Restore

In any moment, the user can restore the equipment configuration saved to file transferring the
data of the file to the same equipment (configuration restore).
Before restoring the configuration, the equipment saves its own current configuration and keeps
it available until the successive restore operation.
Revert

In any moment, the user can retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the
program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration).
In this way, two backup versions will be always available for equipment: one executed by the
user and the other automatically executed by the program before the last restore operation.
See also

Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)
Backup/Restore Config. contextual area

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

131

Security Config.
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Command available only if the Security package functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature

tab).
The Security Config. command manages the equipment security protocols (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS and
SNMPv3).
Operations

Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3)
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode)
SSH
Configure the SSH protocol
HTTP/HTTPS
Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol
Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol
Update the certificates (HTTPS)
FTP/SFTP
Migrate from FTP protocol to SFTP protocol
Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c)
Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3)
Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol
Change the FTP access credentials
SNMP
Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol
Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol
GUI

Security Config. contextual area
See also

Security (info)
SSH protocol (info)
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info)
FTP/SFTP protocol (info)
SNMP protocol (info)

Verify the security protocols of the equipment (SSH, SFTP, HTTPS, SNMPv3)
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Security Config.
The Security Config. contextual area displays the active security functions of the equipment.

132

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING In order to create a secure equipment network, it is necessary to execute this operation for all

the pieces of equipment in the network.
For the correct management of SSH protocol, it is necessary to install a SSH server on one’s PC (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).
The migration HTTP > HTTPS and the migration SNMPv1/v2c > SNMPv3 can be executed only by the user
with SYSTEM profile.
1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Exclusive in order to activate the management of SSH/
SFTP protocols.
3. Press Apply.
A message informs the operator that the operation involves the equipment restart and asks if apply the
change or not.
4. Press:

Yes and confirm if you wish not to apply the protocol change but to apply possible changes to
other configuration parameters.

No and confirm if you wish to apply the protocol change. The operation restarts the equipment.

5. Configure the SSH protocol
6. Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol
7. Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol
8. Migrate from FTP protocol to SFTP protocol

Activate the equipment management in Not Secure Mode
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING The migration HTTPS > HTTP and the migration SNMPv3 > SNMPv1/v2c can be executed only

by users with SYSTEM profile.
1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Unavailable in order to activate the management of Telnet/
FTP protocols.
3. Press Apply.
A message informs the operator that the operation involves the equipment restart and asks if apply the
change or not.
4. Press:

Yes and confirm if you wish not to apply the protocol change but to apply possible changes to
other configuration parameters.

No and confirm if you wish to apply the protocol change. The operation restarts the equipment.

5. Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol
6. Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol
7. Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

133

Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure
Mode)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING It is suggested to use the mixed mode only during the migration of the network equipment from
Secure Mode to Not Secure Mode or vice versa.

1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Available in order to activate the management of the security protocols (SSH/SFTP, etc.) and of the protocols which do not ensure security (Telnet, FTP).
3. Press Apply.
A message informs the operator that the operation involves the equipment restart and asks if apply the
change or not.
4. Press:

Yes and confirm if you wish not to apply the protocol change but to apply possible changes to
other configuration parameters.

No and confirm if you wish to apply the protocol change. The operation restarts the equipment.

5. Activate or deactivate the security protocols according to one’s security need.
The activation of a security protocol ensures the security only for the functionality relevant to the protocol.

Configure the SSH protocol
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security (info).

1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. To set the version of the SSH (Secure SHell) protocol managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select
the box (parameter SSH Version):

v1. Version 1 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH server.
Option not available when the value None is selected for the Cipher Algorithm parameter.

v2. Version 2 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH client.

The active box ( ) indicates that the specific version 2 of the SSH protocol is managed by the equipment; the inactive box indicates that the version is not managed.
3. To set the public key asymmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select
the box (parameter SSH Host Key):

DSA (only v2). DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) key cypher algorithm.
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of SSH protocol.

RSA. RSA key cypher algorithm.

The active box (
aged.

) indicates that the specific key is manage; the inactive box that the key is not man-

It is not possible to deactivate both the keys.
4. To set the algorithm for the authentication of the messages managed by the equipment in Secure Mode,
select the box (parameter Authentication):

134

None. No authentication algorithm.

HMAC - SHA-1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) based on hash code
(HMAC).

HMAC - SHA1 - 96. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 with 96 bit digest based on hash code
(HMAC).

HMAC - MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The active box ( ) indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the algorithm
is not managed.
If the None box is active, no algorithm is managed.
The activation of None box automatically deactivates all the other boxes. The activation of at least one
box HMAC... automatically deactivates the box None.
5. To set the symmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode, select the box
(parameter Cipher Algorithm):

None. No cypher algorithm.

3DES - CBC. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.

AES 128, 192, 256 (only v2) - CBC. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm
with 128 bit key (AES 128), 192 bit key (AES 192) or 256 bit key (AES 259).
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of the SSH protocol.

The active box ( ) indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the algorithm
is not managed.
If the None box is active, no algorithm is managed.
The activation of None box automatically deactivates all the other boxes. Moreover it deactivates the
option V1 (parameter SSH Version).
The activation of at least one 3DES.../AES...box automatically deactivates the box None.
6. Press Apply and confirm.

Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol
User Profile | System
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security (info).

First time you execute this operation, it is necessary to have the files relevant to the SSL certificate of the
equipment which you are connected to. To generate them, see HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).
1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. If the files relevant to SSL (Certificate Status parameter - Present value) certificate are already present
on the equipment, go directly to step 9.
If the files (Certificate Status parameter - Not present value) are not present on the equipment, execute
the next step.
3. In the Certificate Upload Manager area, select the C.A. Certificate option.
4. Press Browse, select the file containing the intermediate SSL certificate (CA Root Certificate) (extension .pem or .crt) and press Open.
The selected file is indicated in the File name box.
5. Press Send Certificate File and confirm.
The message Operation failed due to connection problem, certificate corrupted or invalid indicates that
the operation has not been executed due to connection problems, corrupted certificate or certificate
format not supported.
6. In the Certificate Upload Manager area, select the SSL Certificate option.
7. Press Browse, select the file containing the private key + final SSL certificate (extension pem or crt)
and press Open.
The selected file is indicated in the File name box.
8. Press Send Certificate File and confirm.
9. Activate the HTTP Secure Server (HTTPS) box.
10.Press Apply and confirm.
The current page is closed and the WEB LCT login page is opened in HTTPS mode.
The message Invalid certificate file, please upload new file indicates that the loaded certificates are not
reciprocally compatible, for example because SSL certificate has been loaded instead of CA or because

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

135

the Certificate Authority which has signed the SSL certificate is not the same present in CA certificate.
Repeat the operation loading certificates reciprocally compatible.
If a browser encounters a certificate whose Certificate Authority is not present in its own list, an error
page is displayed and the browser asks the user to accept or to refuse the connection.
If you decide to activate however the connection wit the equipment, the confidential transfer of the
data is not ensured.
For the detailed description of the error messages, see the browser documentation.

Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol
User Profile | System
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is in Not Secure Mode (see Security (info).

1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Deactive the HTTP Secure Server (HTTPS) box (WEB LCT Security area).
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The current page is closed and the WEB LCT login page is opened in HTTP mode.

Update the certificates (HTTPS)
User Profile | System
WARNING Operation available only if HTTPS protocol is active (see Security (info) and the files relevant to
the SSL (Certificate Status parameter - Present value) certificate are already present on the equipment.

For the generation of the new certificates, see HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).
1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Depending on the file you wish to update, select the option:

C.A. Certificate. File containing the intermediate SSL certificate (CA Root Certificate).

SSL Certificate. File containing the private key + final SSL certificate.

3. Press Browse, select the wished file (.pem or .crt extension) and press Open.
The selected file is indicated in the File name box.
4. Press Send Certificate File and confirm.
The message Operation failed due to connection problem, certificate corrupted or invalid indicates that
the operation has not been executed due to connection problems, corrupted certificate or certificate
format not supported.
The parameter Certificate Status gets the value To Update.
5. Press Update to new Certificate and confirm.
The new certificate is now in use.
The parameter Certificate Status gets the value Present.

Migrate from FTP protocol to SFTP protocol
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security (info).

1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Select SFTP option (Mode parameter, File transfer area).

136

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

3. Press Apply and confirm.
4. If the equipment use the:

SNMPv1/v2c protocol, you can Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c).

SNMPv3 protocol, you can Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3)

Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol.

Operation meaningful only if the management of the SFTP protocol is active and when the equipment works
as SSH client.
The default SFTP credentials are the same used by the SCT user to access to the WEB LCT page.
The change of the SFTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page
will be re-opened, the default credentials will be used.
1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Press Reset SFTP Credentials.
3. Into the User box, type the new user name: alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1
up to 8.
4. Into the Password box, type the new access code: alphanumeric string with a number of characters
from 1 up to 8.
5. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available when the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol.

Operation meaningful only if the management of the SFTP protocol is active and when the equipment works
as SSH client.
The setting of the credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page will
be opened again, the credentials shall be set again.
1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Press Set SFTP Credentials.
3. Into the User box, type the new user name: alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1
up to 16.
4. Into the Password box, type the new access code: alphanumeric string with a number of characters
from 1 up to 16.
5. Press Apply and confirm.

Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is in Not Secure Mode (see Security (info).

1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Select FTP option (Mode parameter, File transfer area).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

137

3. Press Apply and confirm.
4. If you want you can Change the FTP access credentials

Change the FTP access credentials
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only if the management of the FTP protocol is active and when the equip-

ment works as SSH client.
The default FTP credentials are: user Anonymous, no password.
The change of FTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT page will
be re-opened, the default credentials will be used.
1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Press Reset FTP Credentials.
3. Into the User box, type the new user name: alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1
up to 8 (SNMPv1/v2c) or 16 (SNMPv3).
4. Into the Password box, type the new access code: alphanumeric string with a number of characters
from 1 up to 8 (SNMPv1/v2c) or 16 (SNMPv3).
5. Press Apply and confirm.

Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol
User Profile | System
WARNING This operation deletes the current user list and automatically restarts the equipment.

Operation meaningful only if the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security (info).
1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Press Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V1/V2 Click to switch in SNMP-V3.
3. Into the Please insert system password box, type the access code of System user and press OK.
4. Create the SNMPv3 user who will be used for the first connection to the equipment:
a. Set the user name (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 30 characters) in the User
box.
b. In Auth. Password and Confirm Auth. Password boxes, type the authentication password associated to the user (alphanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 30 characters).
The fields are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.
The user you are creating will have profile System, authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) and no algorithm and encryption password associated. These parameters are automatically defined by the system and cannot be changed.
It is recommended to memorize the user credentials, because they will be useful to execute
the first access to the equipment after the restart.
5. Press Create user, switch in SNMPv3 and restart and confirm.
After the restart, the SNMPv3 protocol will be active for the equipment.
It is strongly recommended to create immediately the list of SNMPv3 users for the equipment (see Add
a SNMPv3 user and Users list management (SNMPv3)).
If the equipment is managed even by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX, create the user necessary to the supervision
system for the connection to the equipment. This user must have profile System and be the same for
all the pieces of equipment managed by the same NMS system.

138

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol
User Profile | System
WARNING This operation deletes the current list of SNMPv3 users and automatically restarts the equip-

ment.
Once the equipment is restarted, the pre-defined users SYSTEM and NMS5UX and the SNMPv1/v2c user
list defined before the migration to SNMPv3 will be valid (see Users list management (SNMPv1/v2c).
1. Select Main > Security Config.
2. Press Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V3 Click to switch in SNMP-V1/V2 and confirm.
Once the equipment is restarted, the SNMPv1/v2c protocol will be active.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

139

Security Config. contextual area
The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to the security functions available on the equipment.
Parameters

PROTOCOLS

AREA

Secure Protocols. Management of the security protocols of the equipment:

Available. The equipment manages the FTP and Telnet protocols (Not Secure Mode)
and the SFTP and SSH protocols (Secure Mode).

Unavailable. The equipment manages only the FTP and Telnet protocols (Not Secure
Mode).

Exclusive. The equipment manages only the SFTP and SSH protocols (Secure Mode).

SSH Version. Version of the SSH (Secure SHell) protocol managed by the equipment in Secure
Mode:

v1. Version 1 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH server.

v2. Version 2 of SSH protocol.
Option meaningful only if the equipment works as SSH client.

The active box ( ) indicates that the specific version of the SSH protocol is managed by the
equipment; the inactive box indicates that the version is not managed.
SSH Public Key. Public key algorithm used for the authentication (equipment in Secure Mode):

Group 1 SHA 1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm).

Read only parameter.
SSH Host Key. Public key asymmetrical cypher algorithms managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:

DSA (only v2). DSA (Digital Signature Algorithm) key cypher algorithm.
Option available only if the equipment manages the version 2 of SSH protocol.

RSA. RSA key cypher algorithm.

The active box (
managed.

) indicates that the specific key is managed; the inactive box that the it is not

Authentication. Authentication algorithm of the messages managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:

None. No authentication algorithm.

HMAC - SHA-1. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) based on
hash code (HMAC).

HMAC - SHA1 - 96. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 with 96 bit digest based on hash
code (HMAC).

HMAC - MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on
hash code.

If the None box is active ( ), no algorithm is managed. The activation of the other boxes indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the it is not managed.
Cipher Algorithm. Symmetrical cypher algorithm managed by the equipment in Secure Mode:

None. No cypher algorithm.

3DES - CBC. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based
on the repetition of DES algorithm for three times.

AES 128, 192, 256 (only v2) - CBC. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm with 128 bit key (AES 128), 192 bit key (AES 192) or 256 bit key (AES
259).
Option meaningful only if the equipment manages the version 2 of the SSH protocol.

If the None box is active ( ), no algorithm is managed. The activation of the other boxes indicates that the specific algorithm is managed; the inactive box that the it is not managed.
WEB LCT SECURITY

AREA

HTTP Secure Server (HTTPS). Management of HTTP or HTTPS protocol.

140

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The active box ( ) indicates that the equipment manages the HTTPS protocol, the inactive box
indicates that the equipment manages the HTTP protocol.
Certificate Status. Status of the certificate:

Not present. The certificates are not present on the equipment.

Present. If the active protocol is:

HTTP, the value indicates that the CA and SSL certificates are already present
on the equipment and the you can activate the HTTPS protocol.

HTTPS, the value indicates that valid CA and SSL certificates are present and
in use on the equipment.

To Update. New certificates have been loaded on the equipment, but they are not in
use yet. To complete the update, press Update to new certificate.
Value meaningful only if the HTTPS protocol is active.

File name. Path and name of the certificate you wish to load.
The wording Select certificate file (.pem or .crt) indicates that no file is selected.
C.A Certificate. Option to select to load the file containing the intermediate SSL certificate (CA
Root Certificate) on the equipment.
SSL Certificate. Option to select to load the file containing the private key + final SSL certificate
on the equipment.
FILE

TRANSFER AREA

Mode. Network protocol for the file transfer used by the equipment:

FTP. Network protocol for the file transfer: File Transfer Protocol.

SFTP. Network protocol for the secure file transfer: SSH File Transfer Protocol.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
WEB LCT SECURITY

AREA

Update to new Certificate. Update the certificates (HTTPS)
Browse. Open the window of the O.S. for the selection of the certificate.
Send Certificate File. Transfer the selected certificate to the equipment.
FILE

TRANSFER AREA

Reset FTP Credentials. Change the FTP access credentials.
Reset SFTP Credentials. Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c).
Push-button present when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
Set SFTP Credentials. Set the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv3).
Push-button present when the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol.
Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V1/V2 Click to switch in SNMP-V3. SNMPv1/v2c protocol
active. Press the push-button to Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol.
Current SNMP stack is SNMP-V3 Click to switch in SNMP-V1/V2. SNMPv3 protocol active.
Press the push-button to Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol.
See also

Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode
Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode)
Configure the SSH protocol
Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol
Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol
Migrate from FTP protocol to SFTP protocol
Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol
Security (info)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

141

SSH protocol (info)
HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info)
FTP/SFTP protocol (info)
SNMP protocol (info)

142

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Security (info)
ALCplus2e equipment can operate in Secure Mode, in Not Secure Mode and in mixed mode (Secure Mode/
Not Secure Mode).
First time the equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, the equipment is configured in Not Secure Mode (used protocols: SNMPv1/v2c, FTP and HTTP).
WARNING To create a secure equipment network, it is necessary to configure ALL the pieces of equipment
in the network in Secure Mode.

Secure Mode

Equipment in Secure Mode ensures management sessions protected by the use of the protocol:
SSH for the secure and encrypted access (see SSH protocol (info).
SFTP for the management of the secure data transfer (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).
SNMPv3 for the management of the authenticated and encrypted SNMP messages (see
SNMP protocol (info).
HTTPS for the protected access to WEB LCT page (see HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info).
To activate this mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Exclusive
and activate the management of the security protocol (see Activate the equipment management
in Secure Mode).
Not Secure Mode

Equipment in this mode does not ensure protected management sessions because it uses protocols which do not ensure the security of the information transmitted on the network: Telnet
and FTP protocols.
To activate this mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Unavailable
and deactivate the management of the security protocols (see Activate the equipment management in Secure Mode.
WARNING In Not Secure Mode, the security protocols SNMPv3 and HTTPS can be activates. Activating them ensures the security only for the functionality relevant to the protocol.

Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode

The equipment can operate in mixed mode, managing both the security protocols (SSH/SFTP,
etc.) and the protocols which do not ensure the security (Telnet, FTP).
To activate the mixed mode, it is necessary to set the parameter Secure Protocols to value Available (see Activate the equipment management in mixed mode (Secure Mode/Not Secure Mode))
and activate or deactivate the single security protocols according to one’s need.
WARNING It is suggested to use the mixed mode only during the migration of the network equipment from Not Secure Mode to Secure Mode or vice versa.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

143

SSH protocol (info)
SSH (Secure SHell) protocol allows implementing secure connections between two system, using a client/
server architecture.
SSH protocol is available in two versions: version 1 (SSH1) and version 2 (SSH2).
Documents defining the protocol can be found at http://www.ietf.org.
ALCplus2e

The equipment can operate with protocol SSH1 and/or SSH2.
Besides the choice of the protocol, you can define the authentication and encryption algorithms
managed by the equipment (see Configure the SSH protocol).
In order to ensure the file transfer is secure mode, SFTP protocol must be used together with
SSH protocol (see FTP/SFTP protocol (info).
For the correct management of SSH protocol, it is necessary to install a SSH server on one’s PC
(see Installation and configuration of SSH server).

Installation and configuration of SSH server

1. Install the free SSH server freeSSHd.
a. Execute the guided installation of freeSSHd.exe.
b. When asked Do you want to run FreeSSHd as a system service? press No.
2. Verify that, during the program installation, a service has not been installed in Windows.
a. Open the Windows Task Manager window.
b. Select the Services tab.
c. Press Services.
d. Verify that the list does not contain the option FreeSSHDServices.
e. If present, select it, open the Properties window and set the parameter Startup type -> Manual.
3. Configure the SSH server.
a. Open the freeSSHd settings window.
b. Select the SSH tab.
c. Activate the Start SSH server on free SSHd startup box and press Apply.
d. Select the Telnet tab.
e. Deactivate the Start Telnet server on free SSHd startup box and press Apply.
f. Select the Authentication tab and verify the setting of the following parameters:

Password authentication -> Allowed.

Public key authentication -> Allowed.

If the parameters are set in different way, set them as displayed and press Apply.
g. Select the Encryption box and verify the setting of the parameter:

Allowed ciphers -> Any.

If the parameter is set in different way, set it as displayed and press Apply.
h. Select the Tunneling tab and verify the setting of the following parameters:

Allow local port forwarding -> inactive box.

Allow remote port forwarding -> inactive box.

If the parameters are set in different way, set them as displayed and press Apply.
i.

144

Select the SFTP tab, in the SFTP home path set the path of the home directory for the file transfer (equipment in Secure Mode) and press Apply.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The file path must be in C:\. It is suggested NOT to save the files in C:\, but to create a subfolder
in C and set it to save the files (for instance, C:\ftps or C:\backup).
This, when the equipment is in Secure Mode (Secure Protocols -> Exclusive), allows saving the
backup files without being Administrator user (in some version of Windows, in order to save the
files in C:\, it is necessary to be Administrator user).
j.

Select the Automatic updates tab and verify the setting of the following parameters:

Check for new version on startup -> inactive box.

Update without asking me for confirmation -> inactive box.

Show info messages from freeSSHd.com -> inactive box.

If the parameters are set in different way, set them as displayed and press Apply.
k. Select the Logging tab, in the Log file box set the path/filename to save the log file and press
Apply.
l.

Select the Host restrictions tab and verify the setting of the parameter:

Refuse these IP addresses -> active box.

If the parameter is set in different way, set it as displayed and press Apply.
m. Select the Users tab, press Add and create the SFTP users setting the following characteristics
and press OK.

Login -> User name

Authorization -> Password stored as SHA1 hash.

Password/Password (again) -> Access code.

User can use -> Shell, SFTP.

WARNING If the equipment uses the protocol:

SNMPv1/v2c, it is suggested to create the pre-defined user SYSTEM (Login -> SYSTEM,
Default password -> SIAEMICR) and/or the users presents in the user list of the equipment because the equipment uses, as default SFTP credentials, the same of the SCT user
used to access the WEB LCT page.

SNMPv3, create the wished users because the equipment has not the default SFTP credentials. For the credentials (username and password), set an alphanumeric string of
minimum 1 and maximum 16 characters.

4. Restart the SSH server and verify its status.
a. Open the freeSSHd settings window.
b. Select the Server status tab and verify that:

The Telnet server is not running (Telnet server is not running).

the SSH server is running (SSH server is running).

WARNING After the configuration of SSH server, if the one or more parameters must be changed, to make
the change operative, restart the server selecting the Unload command present in the contextual menu of
the FreeSSHD Service application.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

145

HTTP/HTTPS protocol (info)
HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is used to transfer hypertext pages within WEB.
All HTTP traffic takes place via the TCP/IP protocol on port 80 of PC.
HTTPS (HyperText Transfer Protocol over SSL) is a variation of HTTP and uses, besides TCP/IP protocol,
SSL layer (Secure Sockets Layer) which implements the encryption and the authentication of the transmitted data. All HTTPS traffic takes place on port 443 of PC.
In web browsers, URI which refers to this technology is named https.
For more information about RFC 2818 specification (HTTP Over TLS).
ALCplus2e

Equipment can operate with HTTP protocol or HTTPS protocol.
Protocols are implemented in exclusive mode in such a way that, when a user connects via HTTPS, HTTP requests will be re-addressed to HTTPS and vice versa.
WARNING First time equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, equipment uses HTTP protocol.

In order to preserve the security, HTTPS protocol must be used.
You can migrate from HTTP to HTTPS protocol and vice versa in any moment (see Migrate from
HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol/Migrate from HTTPS protocol to HTTP protocol).
The opening of the WEB LCT page via HTTPS protocol is supported with Internet Explorer 9 or
later.
SSL certificate - ALCplus2e

The migration from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol is possible only if you have a digital certificate SSL for WEB Server.
Main aim of this certificate is to authenticate the server (for example, ALCplus2e equipment) at
the customers’ (e.g., user PC where the WEB LCT page relevant to equipment is opened).
SSL foresees that, on connection, the server provides its certificate; if the certificate is signed
by a recognised certification Authority (Trusted certificates), then a secure communication can
be started.
From the physical point of view, the certificate is a file containing the information relevant to the
issuing authority, to the subject of certificate and additional information indicating the use which
the certificate has been released for.
WARNING ALCplus2e equipment is not provided with SSL certificates when it is put in field.
Moreover, the restore of Factory Default deletes possible certificates already loaded on equipment.

How to get a SSL Trusted certificate

You can get a SSL certificate requiring it to a recognised certification authority (Certification Authority - CA), that is a public authority enable to the univocal emission of certificates.
The Certification Authority ensures the identity of the owner of the certificate signing the public
and private keys by its own private key.
The procedure to request the certificate can change from CA to CA depending on the required
information and on the procedure for the generation and the communication of the pair of key
(see documentation of specific CA).
Generally, all CA’s will require to provide a CSR (Certificate Signing Request), that is a request
containing the data which shall be certificated.
The generation of CSR includes also the generation of a Private Key, which will not be included
in CSR itself will be used only to sign the request of certificate. This key shall be kept with great
care and secrecy because, as explained hereinafter, it will be necessary during the server configuration.
The information to include in CSR changes depending on the context for which you request the
certification. CA will define which information is useful.
In any case the name/address of server (Common Name), which you require the certificate for,
will be required.
For the generation of SSL certificates relevant to ALCplus2e equipment, the Common Name of
the certificate must correspond to the IP address of the equipment for which you wish to use

146

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

the certificate (for more information, see Certificate license - ALCplus2e hereinafter in the chapter).
With IP address we mean the address of the supervision port which you wish to use to reach the
equipment, that is the address entered in the URL of browser to open the WEB LCT page.
WARNING SSL certificates can be provided in different formats. ALCplus2e equipment accepts
certificates in PEM format (file with extension .pem or .crt).

As result of the certification request, CA will provide the files relevant to:

Final SSL certificate.

Intermediate SSL certificate (CA Root Certificate). This certificate defines the Certification Authority responsible for the issue of the SSL certificate.

Now, it is necessary to add the private key (generated at the same time of CSR) and the relevant
SSL certificate into a single file.
When composing the file, you shall paste the private key at the top, immediately followed by
the relevant final SSL certificate. Both for the private key and the certificate, the block between
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- and -----END CERTIFICATE----- (ends included) must be inserted.
An example is reported here below:
-----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY----Content of private key
-----END RSA PRIVATE KEY---------BEGIN CERTIFICATE----Content of final SSL certificate
-----END CERTIFICATE----It is suggested to verify that even the file of the intermediate SSL certificate (CA Root Certificate) has the following format:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----Content of CA certificate
-----END CERTIFICATE----These actions will create the following files to load on the server, that is in ALCplus2e equipment:

File containing the private key + final SSL certificate.
In WEB LCT, this file must be loaded on the equipment selecting the option SSL certificate
(see Migrate from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol/Update the certificates (HTTPS).

File containing the intermediate SSL certificate (CA Root Certificate).
In WEB LCT, this file must be loaded on the equipment selecting the option C.A. Certificate.

SSL UnTrusted certificates - ALCplus2e

It is possible to create, and load on the equipment, certificates self-generated by the user (e.g.
via OpenSSL).
The self-signed certificates (UnTrusted certificates) are not generally considered trustworthy by
browsers. They are useful for verification purpose, but the standard use of them does not ensure
the security of server-client connection.
To ensure the security within an equipment network, it is necessary to use certificates signed
by a certification authority (Trusted certificates).
Certificate license - ALCplus2e

The certificate license is valid for only one piece of equipment, because SSL certificates are specific with respect to the Common Name for which they are required and released.
During the authentication of a server (equipment) at a client (user PC), one of the first executed
check consists in comparing the value of the field Common Name present in the certificate with
the URL of the web page you are opening.
The equipment WEB LCT page is opened at URL //<equipment IP address>. This involves that
the Common Name of the certificate must correspond to the equipment IP address.
So, if you wish to migrate a whole network of ALCplus2e equipment from HTTP protocol to HTTPS protocol, it is necessary to have a SSL certificate for every equipment where the relevant
Common Name corresponds to the equipment IP address.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

147

Certificate expiry - ALCplus2e

Generally, SSL certificates have a quite long expiry.
When the certificates on the equipment expiry, they must be replaced with new valid certificates
by means of the procedure Update the certificates (HTTPS).

148

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

FTP/SFTP protocol (info)
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) and SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) are two protocols for the file transfer
based on TCP.
Main difference between FTP and SFTP is the management of security.
The FTP protocol does not foresee the data encryption, while the SFTP protocol is based on SSH protocol
for the data encryption and the secure file transfer.
ALCplus2e

The equipment can be used for the file transfer (download/upload) the FTP protocol or the SFTP
protocol.
When the equipment is switched-on for the first time after the restore of the Factory Default
setting or after the recovery of the whole equipment configuration from file (see Backup/Restore
Config.), the equipment uses the FTP protocol.
The protocol can be changed from FTP to SFTP and vice versa in any moment (see Migrate from
FTP protocol to SFTP protocol and Migrate from SFTP protocol to FTP protocol).
FTP protocol- ALCplus2e
WARNING The FTP protocol is available when the equipment is in Not Secure Mode (see Security

(info).
The default FTP credentials of the equipment are: user Anonymous, no password.
The FTP credentials can be changed at one’s wish (see Change the FTP access credentials).
The change of FTP credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB LCT
page will be re-opened, the default credentials will be used.
The program SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console must be used as help for the WEB LCT application,
in order to manage the FTP protocol.
The instructions for the installation and use of the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console are reported
in the relevant manuals.
SFTP protocol - ALCplus2e
WARNING The SFTP protocol is available when the equipment is in Secure Mode (see Security

(info).
If the equipment uses the protocol:
SNMPv1/v2c, the default SFTP credentials are the same used by the SCT user to access
to the WEB LCT page.
The SFTP credentials can be changed at one’s wish (see Change the SFTP access credentials (SNMPv1/v2c).
The change of credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the WEB
LCT page will be re-opened, the default credentials will be used.
SNMPv3, the equipment has not default SFTP credentials.
In this case, it is necessary to set the credentials (see Set the SFTP access credentials
(SNMPv3).
The setting of the credentials is valid only for the current WEB LCT session. When the
WEB LCT page will be open newly, the credentials shall be set again.
In both cases, for a correct management of the data transfer, the SFTP credentials shall correspond to the user (or to one of the users) defined during the installation of the SSH server.
As help for the management of SFTP protocol through the WEB LCT application, the SSH server
must be installed and configured (see Installation and configuration of SSH server).
The modalities for the installation and the use of SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console are reported in
the relevant manuals.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

149

SNMP protocol (info)
The SNMP protocol is available in 3 versions: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c and SNMPv3.
The main differences between SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3 are the management of message security and the
control of the accesses.
SNMPv1/v2c

The versions 1 and 2 of SNMP have the security model based on the community: messages are
passed not-encrypted and can be copied or modified.
SNMPv3

The version 3 of SNMP, instead, foresees a security model based on the user for the protection
of the messages and the control of the access.
In SMNMPv3, every user has his own authentication password and encryption password for the
packets.
In order to authenticate the packets, SNMPv3 utilizes the HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA1 algorithm.
The secret key used to calculate the HMAC code is the user password; in order to be authenticated, the packet must contain even the user name besides the HMAC code.
Moreover, the SNMPv3 protocol foresees the possibility to cipher the part of the packet containing the OID of the MIB objects and the relevant values using the cipher algorithm DES56; the
key used for the cipher procedure is different from the key used for HMAC authentication.
This allows defining if allowing the user an access:

Without authentication (noAuthNoPriv).

With authentication (AuthNoPriv).

With authentication and encryption (AuthPriv).

For more information, refer to RFC 3410, 3411, 3412, 3413, 3414, 3415, 3584 specifications.
ALCplus2e

The equipment can work with SNMPv1/v2c protocol or with SNMPv3 protocol.
When the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol, only SNMPv1/v2c packets are accepted and
processed.
When the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol, only SNMPv3 packets are accepted and processed. Possible received SNMPv1/v2c packets are discarded.
In order to ensure the security, it is necessary to use SNMPv3 protocol.
When the equipment uses SNMPv3, the opening of the page WEB LCT is supported with Internet
Explorer 9 or later.
WARNING First time equipment is switched-on or after the restore of the Factory Default, equipment uses SNMPv1/v2c protocol.

It is possible to pass from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol and vice versa in any moment (see Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol/Migrate from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol).
The operation can be executed only by a user with profile System and involves the automatic
restart of the equipment.
The migration:

SNMPv1/v2c -> SNMPv3, deletes the SNMPv1/v2c user list and requires the creation
of the first SNMPv3 user (with security level AuthNoPriv - see Tab.5).

SNMPv3 -> SNMPv1/2, deletes the SNMPv3 user list. When the equipment is restarted, the pre-defined users SYSTEM and NMS5UX and the SNMPv1/v2c user list defined
before the migration to SNMPv3 will be valid (see User list (info).

Tab.5 displays, for every SNMP version, the security levels supported by the equipment and the
description of the provided security mechanisms.

150

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Tab.5 Security mechanisms in SNMPv1/v2c and SNMPv3
Security
model

Security level

Authentication

Encryption

Description

Notes

SNMPv1/v2c

noAuthNoPriv

Community
String

No

WEB LCT allows creating up to 12
Community-based authentication: the passwords are transmit- users with this security level.
ted not encrypted and displayed
in the traces

SNMPv3

noAuthNoPriv

Username

No

Authentication based on user
name

With WEB LCT, the creation of users with this security level is not
foreseen

AuthNoPriv

MD5 or SHA

No

Authentication based on algorithms HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA

With WEB LCT it is possible to create an unlimited number of users
with this security level.
These users can connect to the
equipment via WEB LCT*, SCT/
LMT and/or NMS.

AuthPriv

MD5 or SHA

DES 56

Authentication based on algorithms HMAC-MD5 or HMAC-SHA
and encryption with algorithm
CBC-DES (DES-56) in addition to
authentication

With WEB LCT it is possible to create an unlimited number of users
with this security level.
These users can connect to the
equipment via WEB LCT, SCT/LMT
and/or NMS.

* The connection to equipment via WEB LCT is allowed only to user AuthNoPriv with authentication MD5.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

151

Alarm Severity Config.
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The Alarm Severity Config. command manages the alarm transmission and their severity level.
Operations

Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
Enable/disable an alarm
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm
Change the severity level of an alarm
GUI

Alarm Severity Config. contextual area
See also

Alarms (info)

Verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.
The Alarm Severity Config. contextual area displays the alarms configuration.

Enable/disable an alarm
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.
2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm.
3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting:

Disable, to disable the alarm.

Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical to enable the alarm. Select the option relevant to the
severity level to be assigned to the alarm

4. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed
next to the name of the changed alarm.
5. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING It is possible to change the forwarding status of the trap only if it has been enabled the alarm

(see Enable/disable an alarm).
1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.
2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm.

152

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

3. Set the Trap parameter, selecting:

Enable, to enable the forwarding of the alarm trap to the management system.

Disable, to disable the forwarding of the alarm trap to a possible management system external
to the equipment (for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).

4. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed
next to the name of the changed alarm.
5. Press Apply and confirm.

Change the severity level of an alarm
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.
2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm.
3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting the severity you wish to associate to the alarm: Status, Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical.
If the alarm was disabled (Disable option selected), the selection of a different option, besides modifying the alarm severity level, automatically enables it.
4. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed
next to the name of the changed alarm.
5. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

153

Alarm Severity Config. contextual area
The contextual area displays the alarms configuration.
Alarms are subdivided into groups.
When contextual area is opened, only the groups are displayed (Group/Alarm column).
To expand and compress the list of alarms associated to a group, select the symbol
next to the name
of the group. Every selection of the symbol makes the list assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if compress it is expanded and vice versa).
When a group is expanded, for every alarm is displayed the characteristics.
The groups and the alarms change according to the equipment configuration.
Parameters

Group/Alarm. Alarm name.
A coloured box is before the name, pointing out the alarm status and severity:

White box with red X. Alarm disabled.

Green box. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.

Light blue box. Alarm enabled with Warning severity.

Yellow box. Alarm enabled with Minor severity.

Orange box. Alarm enabled with Major severity.

Red box. Alarm enabled with Critical severity.

The presence of an asterisk [*] between the box and the alarm name shows that at least one
characteristic of the alarm has been changed.
Severity. Enabling status of the alarm and, if it is enabled, the relevant seriousness level:

Disabled. Alarm disabled.

Status. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.

Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm enabled with severity respectively Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical.

Not available in this SW version. Alarm not supported by the current firmware version
present into the equipment controller.

Trap Notification. Forwarding status of the trap:

Enabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to the management system is enabled.

Disabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to a possible external management system is disabled (for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).

---. Information not meaningful because the alarm is disabled.

Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Edit Alarm Config. Enable/disable an alarm, Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an
alarm or Change the severity level of an alarm
See also

Alarms (info)

154

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Alarms (info)
The term alarm defines the fault signal generated by an error or malfunction of the equipment or of any
component that composes it.
The signals referring to any event that does not indicates a malfunction but a status change, an operation
in progress or an operating indication are defined status signals.
Instead the term event defines each signal of status, detected alarm and cleared alarm.
A maximum of 400 events are recorded in the equipment controller. When this limit is exceeded, each new
event will overwrite the oldest event.
Enabling/disabling alarms

The equipment alarms can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to the needs.
Disabling an alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the
equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm had never occurred.
On the contrary, enabling an alarm (default condition) means that, when the alarm is detected,
this is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see next item), the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in
the current alarms and the history alarms.
WARNING The enabling/disabling of the alarm is independent for each alarm and local to the
equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must be executed
for each alarm of each equipment.

Enabling/disabling traps

The trap is a message (in this case of detection or clearing of an alarm) spontaneously sent by
the equipment to a possible external management system, for example SCT/LMT and/or
NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX.
The forwarding of the trap of each alarm can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according
to his own needs.
Disabling a trap means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not registered in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program.
On the contrary, enabling a trap (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm,
this is registered in the equipment controller and communicated to the management system,
which displays it in the current alarms and the history alarms.
WARNING The enabling/disabling of the forwarding of the trap is independent for each alarm
and local to the equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must
be executed for each alarm of each equipment.

Alarm severity

Each alarm acknowledged and managed by the management program has an associated severity level which determinates the importance of the alarm.
This severity is not fixed, but can be changed by the user as he likes.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

155

User Manager
User Profile | System
WARNING Command available only if the SNMPv1/v2c protocol is active.

The User Manager command manages the SNMPv1/v2c users list of the equipment.
Operations

Verify the user list
Add a user to the list
Modify a user into the list
Delete a user from the list
Change the password and the timeout of the System user
Change the network password and timeout
Change the password and the timeout of the NMS5UX user
Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login
GUI

User Manager contextual area
See also

User list (info)

Verify the user list
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > User Manager.
The User Manager contextual area displays the user list currently stored in the equipment.

Add a user to the list
User Profile | System
WARNING Into each list, it is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 users for each profile (up to a maximum of 12 users).

1. Select Main > User Manager.
2. Select Add.
3. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to
8).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list. Then, when
the user name has been assigned, it can not be changed later.
4. Into the Password and Confirm Password box, type the access code of the (alphanumeric string with a
number of characters from 1 up to 8).
5. Into the User Profile box, set the profile to be assigned to the user:

156

Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward commands
or execute changing to the equipment configuration.

Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Station Op. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute
changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user
list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations
available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).

It is not possible to create a user with System profile.
6. Set the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by the user. If you wish:

The session of WEB LCT opened by the user (even if disconnected) is kept for an undefined period (session timeout disabled), deactivate the box Login Timeout.

The session of WEB LCT opened by the user, if disconnected, is automatically terminated once
reached a specific time limit (session timeout disabled), activate the box Login Timeout and type
a value between 1 and 43200 sec. (12h) in the box User Keep Alive (Sec.).
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been
closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).

7. Press Apply and confirm.
The new user is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.

Modify a user into the list
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > User Manager.
2. Select the user and press Modify or double click on the user.
3. Execute the changing.
The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones above pointed out into the par. Add a user to
the list.
Each time even a single parameter is changed, the access code (parameter Password, Confirm password) must be inserted.
The user name (parameter User) cannot be modified.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Delete a user from the list
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > User Manager.
2. Select the user.
3. Press Remove and confirm.

Change the password and the timeout of the System user
User Profile | System
WARNING If you wish to change only the timeout, it is necessary to input the current password of the System user in the Password and Confirm Password fields.

1. Select Main > User Manager.
2. Press System.
3. To change the password, into the Password and Confirm Password box, type the new access code of
System user (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8).
4. To change the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by System user:

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

157

Disable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the System user (even if disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time (session timeout disabled).

Enable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the System user, if disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit (Session timeout enabled).
To set time limit type, in the User Keep Alive (Sec.) box, a value between 1 and 43200 sec.
(12h).

With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been closed but
for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
5. Press Apply and confirm.

Change the network password and timeout
User Profile | System
WARNING If you wish to change only the timeout, it is necessary to input the current network password in
the Password and Confirm Password fields.

1. Select Main > User Manager.
2. Press Network.
3. To change the password, into the Password and Confirm Password box, type the new network password
(alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8).
4. To change the timeout of the WEB LCT session of the remote equipment:

Disable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session of the remote equipment (even if disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time (session timeout disabled).

Enable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session of the remote equipment, if disconnected,
will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit (Session timeout enabled).
To set time limit type, in the User Keep Alive (Sec.) box, a value between 1 and 43200 sec.
(12h).

With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been closed but
for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
5. Press Apply and confirm.

Change the password and the timeout of the NMS5UX user
User Profile | System
WARNING The changing of the NMS5UX user (CEM password) has to be executed only if it is changed the

default password used by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system.
If you wish to change only the timeout, it is necessary to type the current NMS5UX user password into the
Password and Confirm Password fields.
1. Select Main > User Manager.
2. Press CEM.
3. To change the password, into the Password and Confirm Password box, type the new NMS5UX user
password (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8).
4. To change the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by NMS5UX user:

Disable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the NMS5UX user (even if disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time (session timeout disabled).

Enable the Login Timeout box. The WEB LCT session opened by the NMS5UX user, if disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit (Session timeout enabled).
To set time limit type, in the User Keep Alive (Sec.) box, a value between 1 and 43200 sec.
(12h).

158

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been closed but
for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
5. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login
User Profile | System
WARNING The remote user has the same characteristics of the NMS5UX user with the only exception that
he does not need for a login password.

It is possible to set a maximum of 2 remote users.
1. Select Main > User Manager.
2. Press Permanent Login.
The box:

Manager IP Address 1 shows the IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user.

Manager IP Address 2 shows the IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user.

Value 0.0.0.0 indicates the parameter is disabled.
The setting of the Trap Version 2 box present below every box indicates the version of SNMP protocol
used for the trap sending. If the box is:

Active. For the specific remote user, the sending of trap in version 2 is enabled.

Inactive. For the specific remote user, the sending of trap in version 1 is enabled.

3. To change the IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user, type a valid IP address in the
Manager IP Address 1 box.
4. To change the IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user, type a valid IP address in
the Manager IP Address 2 box.
5. Activate the Trap Version 2 option, under the relevant Manager IP Address… box, to set the trap management of version 2 (SNMPv2).
If the option is not activated, the version 1 (SNMPv1) of the traps is used.
6. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

159

User Manager contextual area
The contextual area displays the user list currently stored in the equipment when the SNMPv1/v2c protocol
is active.
The System and NMS5UX users are not pointed out into the list.
Parameters

User name. User name.
Profile. User profile:

Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward
commands or execute changing to the equipment configuration.

Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only
maintenance operations (MAN OP).

Station Op. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands
or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).

User Keep Alive. Timeout of WEB LCT session opened by the user:

No Timeout. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if
disconnected) will be kept for an indefinite period of time.

<number> Seconds. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user,
if disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.

With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT page has been
closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).
Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Add. Add a user to the list.
Modify. Modify a user into the list.
Remove. Delete a user from the list
System. Change the password and the timeout of the System user
Network. Change the network password and timeout
CEM. Change the password and the timeout of the NMS5UX user
Permanent Login. Verify/modify the IP address of Permanent Login
See also

User list (info)

160

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

User Manager SNMP-V3
User Profile | System
WARNING Command available only if the SNMPv3 protocol is active.

The User Manager SNMP-V3 command manages the SNMPv3 users list of the equipment.
Operations

Verify the SNMPv3 user list
Add a SNMPv3 user
Modify a SNMPv3 user
Delete a SNMPv3 user
GUI

User Manager SNMP-V3 contextual area
See also

User list (info)
SNMP protocol (info)

Verify the SNMPv3 user list
User Profile | System

1. Select Main > User Manager SNMP-V3.
The User Manager SNMP-V3 contextual area displays the user list currently stored in the equipment
which uses the SNMPv3 protocol.

Add a SNMPv3 user
User Profile | System
WARNING It is possible to define the number of wished users.

The parameters for the setting of the user name and of the relevant password are Case Sensitive; pay
attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.
1. Select Main > User Manager SNMP-V3.
2. Press Add.
3. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to
30).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list.
The parameter can not be changed later.
4. Set, in Authorization Protocol box, the authentication algorithm associated to the user:

MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.

SHA. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) with 96 bit digest based on hash
code (HMAC).

The parameter can not be changed later.
5. Into the User Profile box, set the profile to be assigned to the user:

System. The user with this profile can create/modify/delete users in the user list, verify/modify
the equipment configuration.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

161

Station Operator. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or
execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying
the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment force the logout of a user and all those
operations available only to the user with System profile.

Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP).

Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward commands
or execute changing to the equipment configuration.

6. Set, in Auth. Password and Confirm Auth. Password boxes, the authentication password associated to
the user (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 30).
7. Set, in Privacy Protocol box, the cypher algorithm associated to the user:

No Privacy. No cypher algorithm.

DES. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the repetition of
DES algorithm for three times.

The parameter cannot be changed later.
8. Only if in the previous step you have selected the value DES, set, in Privacy Password and Confirm Privacy Password boxes, the cypher password associated to the user (alphanumeric string with a number
of characters from 1 up to 30).
9. Press OK.
The new user is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.

Modify a SNMPv3 user
User Profile | System
WARNING The name (parameter User), the authentication algorithm (parameter Authorization Protocol)

and the cypher algorithm (parameter Privacy Protocol) associated to the user can NOT be changed. To
change them, it is necessary to delete the user and create him again with the wished characteristics.
The user profile (parameter User Profile) of the user currently in use cannot be changed.
The fields for the setting of the keys are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.
1. Select Main > User Manager SNMP-V3.
2. Select the user and press Modify.
3. To change the user profile, into the User Profile box, set the new value:

System. The user with this profile can create/modify/delete users in the user list, verify/modify
the equipment configuration.

Station Operator. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or
execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying
the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment force the logout of a user and all those
operations available only to the user with System profile.

Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP).

Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward commands
or execute changing to the equipment configuration.

4. To change the authentication password associated to the user:
a. Activate the Change Auth. Password box.
b. Set the current authentication password in the Old Auth. Password box.
c. Set the new password (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 30) in the
Auth. Password and Confirm Auth. Password boxes.
5. If a cypher algorithm (box Privacy Protocol, value DES) is associated to the user, the relevant password
can be changed:
a. Activate the Change Priv. Password box.
b. Set the current cypher password in the Old Privacy Password box.

162

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

c. Set the new password (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 30) in the
Privacy Password and Confirm Privacy Password boxes.
6. Press OK.

Delete a SNMPv3 user
User Profile | System
WARNING The user currently in use cannot be removed.

1. Select Main > User Manager SNMP-V3.
2. Select the user.
3. Press Remove and confirm.
The message The current profile cannot be removed indicates that the current user has been selected.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

163

User Manager SNMP-V3 contextual area
The contextual area displays the SNMPv3 user list currently stored in the equipment.
Each table row corresponds to a user.
Selecting the heading of a column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumeric order with
respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip directed downwards) and so on.
Parameters

User. User name.
Profile. User profile:

System. The user with this profile can create/modify/delete users in the user list, verify/modify the equipment configuration.

Station Operator. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following
operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment force the
logout of a user and all those operations available only to the user with System profile.

Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only
maintenance operations (MAN OP).

Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward
commands or execute changing to the equipment configuration.

Authorization Protocol. Authentication algorithm associated to the user:

MD5. Authentication algorithm MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.

SHA. Authentication algorithm SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) with 96 bit digest
based on hash code (HMAC).

Privacy Protocol. Cypher algorithm associated to the user:

No Privacy. No cypher algorithm.

DES. 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) block cypher algorithm based on the
repetition of DES algorithm for three times.

Push-button

Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Add. Add a SNMPv3 user.
Modify. Modify a SNMPv3 user.
Remove. Delete a SNMPv3 user
See also

User list (info)
SNMP protocol (info)

164

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

User list (info)
The users list is a list of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment via the WEB
LCT application, the SCT/LMT program or the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system.
If a user is not present into the users list memorized into the controller on equipment, such a user will not
be able to connect and/or to execute the login of that equipment.
The management of the user list changes depending on the version of the SNMP protocol used by the
equipment:
Users list management (SNMPv1/v2c)
Users list management (SNMPv3)

Users list management (SNMPv1/v2c)
WARNING What reported here below is valid when the equipment uses the SNMPv1/v2c protocol (see SNMP

protocol (info).
The migration from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol involves the automatic deletion of the user
list.
The equipment has two predefined users.
Besides these users, for every piece of equipment it is possible to create up to 12 different users which can
be utilized to connect to the equipment via WEB LCT or SCT/LMT (see Add a user to the list).
Once a user is created, you can change his configuration (see Modify a user into the list) or delete him (see
Delete a user from the list).
The users of the user list of a piece of equipment (except for predefined ones) can be created via WEB LCT,
SCT/LMT or NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX.
Predefined users

SYSTEM. User of the WEB LCT application or SCT/LMT program with the following features:
User name: System (unchangeable parameter).
Timeout: No Timeout (changeable parameter).
Profile: System (unchangeable parameter).
Password: Siaemicr (default) (changeable parameter - see Change the password and
the timeout of the System user).
The System user is single one for every equipment and he can not be deleted.
This user can create/modify/delete users in the user list, verify/modify the equipment configuration.
NMS5UX. User of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system, with the following features:
User name: NMS5UX (unchangeable parameter).
Timeout: No Timeout (changeable parameter).
Profile: System (unchangeable parameter).
Password: Pre-define (changeable parameter - see Change the password and the
timeout of the NMS5UX user).
The NMS5UX user can not be deleted.
More information about the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system is reported in the relevant documentation.
User characteristics

User/Password. User name and password for the access which allow the program acknowledging the user as user authorized to start WEB LCT or SCT/LMT.
The same user can open more WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.
Once assigned, the user name cannot be changed.
The System user can modify his password and the passwords of all the other users of the list.
If the System user forgets his own password, it is necessary to call the assistance service of the
product provider.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

165

User profile. User profile which allows opening the program and having determinate commands
and features available.
The profile of a user, once assigned, cannot be changed by the System user.
The program WEB LCT allows creating a user with one of the following profiles:

Station Operator. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following
operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment force the
logout of a user and all those operations available only to the user with System profile.

Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only
maintenance operations (MAN OP).

Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward
commands or execute changing to the equipment configuration.

Timeout of WEB LCT session opened by the user. It is possible to:

Disable the timeout: the WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if disconnected)
will be kept for an undefined period.

Enable the timeout: the WEB LCT session opened by the user, if disconnected, will be
automatically terminated once the set timeout is reached.
With “disconnected session” we mean one WEB LCT session for which the relevant
WEB LCT page has been closed but the disconnection from the piece of equipment
has not been executed (logout of the user).

Users list management (SNMPv3)
WARNING What reported here below is valid only if the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol (see SNMP

protocol (info).
The migration from SNMPv3 protocol to SNMPv1/v2c protocol involves the automatic deletion of the user
list.
When the equipment uses the SNMPv3 protocol, it has not predefined users.
During the migration from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol, the system requires the creation of
a SNMPv3 user with security level AuthNoPriv (see Migrate from SNMPv1/v2c protocol to SNMPv3 protocol).
This user will be utilized for the first connection with the equipment after the migration.
Then, through the WEB LCT application, it will be possible to create all the wished SNMPv3 users.
With a SNMPv3 user, it is possible to connect to the equipment via WEB LCT or SCT/LMT.
If the equipment is managed even by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX, it is necessary to create the SNMPv3 user utilized by the supervision system for the connection to the equipment. This user must have profile System
and be the same for all the pieces of equipment managed by the same system NMS.
User characteristics

User. user name.
Once assigned, the user name cannot be changed.
User Profile. User profile which allows opening the program and having determinate commands
and features available.
The user profile can be changed by a user with System profile, except for the user currently in
use. In this case, it is necessary to connect with a different System user and execute the change.
The WEB LCT program allows creating a user with one of the following profiles:

166

System. The user with this profile can create/modify/delete users in the user list, verify/modify the equipment configuration.

Station Operator. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following
operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment force the
logout of a user and all those operations available only to the user with System profile.

Read & Write. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only
maintenance operations (MAN OP).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Read Only. The user with this profile can check the parameters but it can not forward
commands or execute changing to the equipment configuration.

Authorization Protocol/Password. Algorithm for the authentication of the packets and relevant password associated to the user.
The available authentication algorithms are:

MD5 (Message Digest version 5) based on hash code.

SHA-1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) with 96 bit digest based on hash code (HMAC).

The authentication algorithm, once assigned, cannot be changed. The authentication password
can, instead, be changed by a user with profile System.
Privacy Protocol/Password. Algorithm for the cypher of the packets and relevant password
associated to the user.
It is possible not to associate any cypher algorithm to one user or to associate the block cypher
algorithm 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) based on the repetition of the DES algorithm
for three times. In this case, even a cypher password shall be defined.
The cypher mode (no cypher or DES), once assigned, cannot be changed. The cypher password
(if defined), instead, can be changed by a user with profile System.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

167

EQUIPMENT

Configurator. It manages the equipment configuration.
BW & Mod./Link ID. It manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation
and link identification number.
General Preset. It manages the modem and radio parameters.
Xpic. It manages the XPIC function.
STM1 Bulk Config.. It manages the STM-1 Bulk function (transparent transport of the STM-1).

168

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Configurator
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The Configurator command manages the equipment configuration.
The configurator parameters change depending on the type or on the expansion present in the equipment.
Operations

IDUBOARD ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD XPIC
Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality (East-West)
Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet traffic
concatenation) (Pipe los Forwarding)
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet nodal
Bus (Ethernet elements) (Nbr of Eth. Elements)
Verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the node (Node Element ID)
Verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node (STP Mode)
Verify/modify the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1s
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD

EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC

2XSTM-1 32E1
2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of the PWE3 function (PWE3)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)
Verify/modify the management of STM-1 (STM-1 MST Mode)
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and
SDH ring (Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms)
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality (East-West)
Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet traffic
concatenation) (Pipe los Forwarding)
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet nodal
Bus (Ethernet elements) (Nbr of Eth. Elements)
Verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the node (Node Element ID)
Verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node (STP Mode)
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD

EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC

NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1
NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1
EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1

Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)
Verify/modify the management of STM-1 (STM-1 MST Mode)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

169

Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and
SDH ring (Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms)
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality (East-West)
Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet traffic
concatenation) (Pipe los Forwarding)
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet nodal
Bus (Ethernet elements) (Nbr of Eth. Elements)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with TDM nodal Bus
(TDM elements) (Nbr of TDM Elements)
Verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the node (Node Element ID)
Verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node (STP Mode)
Verify/modify the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node (TDM Nodal Bus Protection)
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD

EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
EXP.
XPIC
XPIC
XPIC

16E1 ONLY 1+0
16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3
16E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0
EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
EXP. 16E1 PWE3

Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of the PWE3 function (PWE3)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)
Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet traffic
concatenation) (Pipe los Forwarding)
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet nodal
Bus (Ethernet elements) (Nbr of Eth. Elements)
Verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the node (Node Element ID)
Verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node (STP Mode)
Verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet
Switch and CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs of the node (Nodal Port Based VLAN)
GUI

Configurator contextual area
See also

Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info)
PWE3 function (info)

170

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Verify/modify the radio configuration
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The change of the radio configuration can determine the deletion of the Ethernet Switch config-

uration (see Tab.6) and the deletion of the Bundles/PWE3 channels (see Tab.18).
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Radio parameter indicates the equipment radio configuration:

Unequipped. Equipment without radio.

1+0. Equipment with radio unprotected configuration.

1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential type.

1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential type.

2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in unprotected configuration and
Ethernet traffic concatenation.

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected configuration and two Ethernet channels.

2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and
Ethernet traffic concatenation.

2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and two
Ethernet channels.

The availability of the values changes depending on the IduBoard type as depicted in Tab.7.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
WARNING The radio configuration 1+1 Freq. Div is not supported when the equipment has bandwidth

56MHz.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Xpic activation functionality is not enabled
(see Equipment Feature tab).

Tab.6 Radio configuration change

Change

From
Unequipped

1+0

1+1 FD (1)

1+1 HS (2)

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

1+0

Yes

-

No

No

Yes

No

1+1 FD (1)

Yes

No

-

No

Yes

Yes

1+1 HS (2)

Yes

No

No

-

Yes

Yes

2x(1+0) SP (3)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2x(1+0) DP (4)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Unequipped

To

2x(1+0) SP (3) 2x(1+0) DP (4)

Yes. The Switch configuration is restored to default. All the VLAN’s are deleted, except for those reserved
(management).
No. The Switch configuration is not changed.
(1)

1+1 Freq. Div.

(2)

1+1 Hot Standby.

(3)

2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe / 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe.

(4)

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe / 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

171

Tab.7 Available of the general parameters
IDU Board type

(1)

Radio configuration

Management

1+0

1+1

2x(1+0)
(3)

2x(1+0)
Xpic (4)

STM-1

Nodal
Bus

Matrix

PWE3

IduBoard Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard

X

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Xpic

X

X

X

X

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1

X

X

X

-

X

-

X

-

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

X

-

X

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

X

-

X

-

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

X

X

X

-

X

-

X

X

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

X

-

X

X

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

X

-

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

X

-

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

X

X

X

X

X

-

X

X

IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1

X

X

X

-

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

X

X

X

-

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

X

(5)

X

X

(5)

X

-

-

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3

X

(2)

X

X

-

-

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0

X

-

-

-

-

-

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

X

X

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(5)

X

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 PWE3

X

X

(1)

Verify the equipment units

(2)

1+1 Freq. Div / 1+1 Hot Standby.

(3)

2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe / 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe.

(4)

2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe / 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe.

(5)

X

X

-

X

With the PWE3 function active, the matrix is not available (see Tab.14).

Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The management of the Ethernet Enhanced functionality cannot be deactivated in one or both
the following conditions:

172

2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe radio configuration.

PWE3 function enable.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

In this situation, the values Absent (Remember Enh Values) and Absent (Reset Enh Values) will not be
present in the list. In order to execute the operation, it is first necessary to change the radio configuration
and/or deactivate the PWE3 function.
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Ethernet Enh. parameter indicates the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality:

Present. Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is active.

Absent (Remember Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active.
In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced Ethernet management, the controller keeps in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.

Absent (Reset Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active. In the
case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced Ethernet management, the controller have not kept in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Enhanced Eth processing functionality is
not enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).

Verify/modify the management of the PWE3 function
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment provided with PWE3 function (see Tab.7).

In order to activate the PWE3 function, the equipment must be configured in the following way:

Ethernet Enh. > Present

Node Type > No Nodal

STM-1 Bulk function disable (see STM1 Bulk Config.).

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The PWE3 parameter indicates the enabling status of the PWE3 function (see PWE3):

Enabled. PWE3 function enable.

Disabled. PWE3 function disable.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the E1 transport (PWE3) functionality is not
enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).

Verify/modify the management of synchronisation
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The synchronisation cannot be disabled if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for, at least, one
STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Sync Enable parameter indicates the management of synchronisation:

Disabled. Synchronisation disable.

Enabled. Synchronisation enable.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

173

Verify/modify the management of STM-1
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.7).

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The STM-1 MST Mode parameter indicates the management of the STM-1:

None. The management of STM-1 is deactive.

1+0. The management of one unprotected STM-1 is active (MST mode).

1+1 MSP. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP mode).

2 x (1+0) MST. The management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST mode).

1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP mode). For STM-1
with optical interface, the Automatic Laser Shutdown function is permanently disabled.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
If the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.) and the equipment is in radio configuration:

1+0 or 1+1, the parameter is automatically set to 1+0. The value cannot be modified.

2x(1+0), the values 1+0 and 2 x (1+0) MST are available.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH
and SDH ring
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.7) and if the management
of STM-1 is active.

Operation common to all the 2Mbit/s tributary.
Operation not available if the STM-1 Bulk function (see STM1 Bulk Config.) or the PWE3 function (see
PWE3) is active.
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms parameter indicates the monitoring status of the alarms of the
2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring in input to a SDH ring where the ALCplus2e equipment acts
as connection elements:

Disabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is not active.

Enabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is active.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
Activating the monitoring (selection of option Enabled) forbids the execution of protected TributaryRadio connections in TDM matrix (see Cross Connection).
Moreover, if no protected Tributary-Radio connection is present in the TDM matrix, the existing connections are not deleted. Otherwise, if at least one protected Tributary-Radio connection is present, all
the connections are deleted.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the SDH overhead and VC12 quality management functionality is not enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).

174

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration (see

Tab.7).
When the East-West modality is enabled, the equipment takes the Ring Ethernet modality configuration.
In this modality, the Switch Ethernet must have the following configuration in order to ensure the correct
traffic management:

LAN in Fallback modality.

Radio port in Fallback modality.

All the VLAN of the Ring registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The East-West parameter indicates the management of the East-West modality:

No. The management of the East-West modality is not active.

Yes. The management of the East-West modality is active: the radio signal is routed in two different direction named, for accepted custom, East and West.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet
traffic concatenation)
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single
Pipe radio configuration (see Tab.7).

Operation meaningful when the Link Loss Forwarding modality is active (see LLF tab).
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The parameter Pipe los forwarding indicates the modality of forwarding of the link loss for equipment
with two radio direction and concatenation of the Ethernet traffic:

Single link. The block of the local port due to LLF takes place for the disconnection of a single
radio.

Dual link. The block of the local port due to LLF takes place for the disconnection of both radios.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Equipment cannot be configured as belonging to one node if the PWE3 function is active (see

PWE3).
In this situation, the value Nodal will not be present in the list. In order to execute the operation, it is first
necessary to deactivate the PWE3 function.
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Node Type parameter indicates if the equipment is element of a node:

No Nodal. The equipment does not belong to a node.

Nodal. The equipment belongs to a node.
With node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2 and/or
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or TDM nodal Bus.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

175

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet nodal Bus (Ethernet elements)
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment belongs to a node (Node Type parameter - Nodal val-

ue).
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter indicates the number of elements of the node interconnected with
Ethernet nodal Bus:

No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected with the Ethernet nodal Bus.

2, 38. The first two, threeeight elements of the node are interconnected by the Ethernet nodal
Bus.
For example, if the value 3 is set, this means that the equipment occupying the first three logic
positions within the node are interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus. The logic position of the
equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with identifying number 1 will be
considered in first position, 2 in second position and so on.
The value 1 is not available because the nodal interconnection is realized among minimum two
and maximum eight equipment.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with TDM nodal
Bus (TDM elements)
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment that manage the nodal Bus (see Tab.7) and belonging

to a node (Node Type parameter - Nodal value).
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Nbr of TDM Elements parameter indicates the number of elements of the node interconnected with
TDM nodal Bus:

No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected by the TDM nodal Bus.

2, 38. The first two, threeeight elements of the node are interconnected by the TDM nodal
Bus.
For example, if the value 4 is set, this means that the equipment occupying the first four logic
positions within the node are interconnected by the TDM nodal Bus. The logic position of the
equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with identifying number 1 will be
considered in first position, 2 in second position and so on.
The value 1 is not available because the nodal interconnection is realized among minimum two
and maximum eight equipment.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

176

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the node
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment belonging to a node and for which the number of Ether-

net elements and/or TDM elements has been already defined (Nbr of Eth Elements and/or Nbr of TDM Elements parameter - value different from No Elements).
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The Node Element ID parameter indicates the number identifying the equipment in the node: 1 ÷ 8.
2. To change the parameter, select the option relevant to the number you wish to assign to the equipment.
The values available in the list change depending on the maximum number of Ethernet elements (see
Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter) and/or by TDM elements (see Nbr of TDM Elements parameter) composing the node. For example, if a node with 4 Ethernet elements and 3 TDM elements has been defined, the values 1, 2, 3 and 4 will be available in the list.
The identifying number represents even the logic position assumed by the equipment in the node. This
position is important in the definition of the Ethernet elements and/or TDM elements.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment belonging to a node, for which the number of Ethernet
elements has been already defined and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is an Ethernet
element.

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The STP Mode parameter indicates the enabling status of the protocol Spanning Tree (STP) at level of
node:

Disable. STP at level of node disabled.

bridge1-pro. STP at level of node enabled: the equipment belongs to Bridge 1.

bridge2-pro. STP at level of node enabled: the equipment belongs to Bridge 2.

all-pro. STP at level of node enabled: the equipment belongs both to Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.

The STP Mode parameter is available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of Eth
Elements parameter and the value of the Node Element ID parameter is a number lower than or equal
to the number set for the Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment belonging to a node, for which the number of TDM elements has been already defined and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is a TDM element.

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
The TDM Nodal Bus Protection parameter indicates the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node:

Not Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is not protected.

Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is protected.

The TDM Nodal Bus Protection parameters available only if a value different from No Elements is set
for the Nbr of TDM Elements parameter and the value of the Node Element ID parameter is a number
lower than or equal to the number set for the Nbr of TDM Elements parameter.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

177

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1s
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment of IduBoard Only 1+0, IduBoard or IduBoard Xpic type.

For all other equipment see Cross Connection.
1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
2. Select the Tributary A-B Mapping tab.
The parameter Tributary A Mapping indicates the mapping of first E1 of base board:

Unmapped. Tributary A is not connected to any Radio E1.

Radio A E1-1. Tributary A is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).

Radio A E1-2. Tributary A is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).

The parameter Tributary B Mapping indicates the mapping of second E1 of base board:

Unmapped. Tributary B is not connected to any Radio E1.

Radio A E1-1. Tributary B is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).

Radio A E1-2. Tributary B is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).

3. To change the parameters, select the wished option.
The same Radio channel cannot be set for the tributaries of base board. For instance, if the value Radio
A E1-1 is set for tributary A, the value Radio A E1-2 must be set for tributary B and vice versa.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet
Switch and CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the
other IDUs of the node
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment belonging to a node, for which the number of Ethernet
elements has been already defined and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is an Ethernet
element.

1. Select Equipment > Configurator.
2. Select the Nodal Port Based VLan tab.
The tab displays the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU)
of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs of the node interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus.
The tab is available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of Eth Elements parameter in the Configurator tab, and the value of the Node Element ID parameter is a number lower than
or equal to the number set for the Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter.
3. To modify the enabling status of a port:
a. Select the bar relevant to the IDU of the node for which you wish to change the status of the
ports.
b. Select, in the table, the check-box corresponding to the combination: port (Ethernet Switch or
CPU) local IDU - port (Ethernet Switch or CPU) of node element.
At each selection, the check-box assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if the
check sign is present, it is removed and vice versa).
The presence of the check sign means that the transit between the two ports is allowed. Its absence means that the transit is forbidden.

178

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The transit of the packets of the LAN 1 and LAN 2 of the local Ethernet Switch from/to the ports of the
Ethernet Switch of the specific node element is automatically enabled by the system.
If you wish to disable one of this check-box, the message Changing these settings may result in loss
of Ethernet traffic through the node. Continue? is displayed, warning that the change of the setting can
cause the loss of traffic of the Ethernet nodal Bus.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

179

Configurator contextual area
The contextual area displays the equipment configuration.
Tabs

Configurator tab. General configuration of the equipment.
Tributary A-B Mapping tab. Mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1.
Nodal Port Based VLan tab. Enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet
Switch and CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs
of the node interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Configurator tab
The tab displays the general configuration parameters of the equipment.
The configuration parameters change depending on the type or on the equipped expansion.
Parameters

Radio. Equipment radio configuration:

Unequipped. Equipment without radio.

1+0. Equipment with radio in unprotected configuration.

1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential
type.

1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential
type.

2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in unprotected configuration and Ethernet traffic concatenation.

2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two independent radio directions in unprotected configuration and two Ethernet channels.

2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and Ethernet traffic concatenation.

2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe. Equipment with two radio directions in XPIC configuration and two Ethernet channels.

The availability of the values changes depending on the IduBoard type as depicted in Tab.7.
Ethernet Enh. Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality:

Present. Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is active.

Absent (Remember Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is
not active. In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced
Ethernet management, the controller keeps in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.

Absent (Reset Enh Values). Management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality is not active. In the case, the equipment uses the Ethernet interface (Radio side) compatible
with ALCplus2.
If you have changed from an Enhanced Ethernet management to a not Enhanced
Ethernet management, the controller have not kept in memory all the settings relevant to Enhanced Ethernet.

180

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms. Monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal
through PDH and SDH ring in input to a SDH ring where the ALCplus2e equipment acts as connection elements:

Disabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is not active.

Enabled. The monitoring of the 2Mbit/s signal (PDH) is active.

Parameter not available if the value None is set for STM-1 MST Mode and/or the STM-1 Bulk
function (see STM1 Bulk Config.) or the PWE3 function (see parameter PWE3) is active.
Node Type. Belonging of the equipment to a node:

No Nodal. The equipment does not belong to a node.

Nodal. The equipment belongs to a node.

With node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2 and/or
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or TDM nodal Bus.
Pipe los forwarding. Modality of forwarding of the link connection for equipment with two radio
directions and concatenation of the Ethernet traffic:

Single link. The block of the local port due to LLF takes place for the disconnection of
one single radio.

Dual link. The block of the local port due to LLF takes place for the disconnection of
both radios.

Parameter available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single
Pipe radio configuration (see Tab.7).
Parameter meaningful when the Link Loss Forwarding modality is active (see LLF tab).
PWE3. Management of PWE3 function:

Enabled. Function enable.

Disabled. Function disable.

Parameter available only for equipment that support the PWE3 function (see Tab.7).
Sync Enable. Management of synchronisation:

Disabled. Synchronisation disable.

Enabled. Synchronisation enable.

STM-1 MST Mode. Management of the STM-1:

None. The management of STM-1 is deactive.

1+0. The management of one unprotected STM-1 is active (MST modality).

1+1 MSP. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP modality).

2 x (1+0) MST. The management of two unprotected STM-1 is active (MST modality).

1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of one protected STM-1 is active (MSP modality).
For STM-1 with optical interface, the Automatic Laser Shutdown function is permanently disabled.

Parameter available only for equipment provided with STM-1 (see Tab.7).
East-West. Management of the East-West modality:

No. The management of the East-West modality is not active.

Yes. The management of the East-West modality is active: the radio signal is routed
in two different direction named, for accepted custom, East and West.

Parameter available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration (see
Tab.7).
Nbr of Eth. Elements. Number of elements of the node interconnected by Ethernet nodal Bus
(Ethernet elements):

No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus.

2, 38. The first two, threeeight elements of the node are interconnected by the
Ethernet nodal Bus.
For example, if the value 3 is set means that the equipment occupying the first three
logic positions within the node are interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus. The logic position of the equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with
identifying number 1 will be considered in first position, 2 in second position and so
on.

Parameter available only if the value Nodal is set for the Node Type parameter.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

181

Nbr of TDM Elements. Number of elements of the node interconnected by the TDM nodal Bus
(TDM elements):

No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected with the TDM nodal Bus.

2, 38. The first two, threeeight elements of the node are interconnected by the
TDM nodal Bus.
For example, if the value 4 is set, this means that the equipment occupying the first
four logic positions within the node are interconnected by the TDM nodal Bus. The logic position of the equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with
identifying number 1 will be considered in first position, 2 in second position and so
on.

Parameter available only for equipment that manage the nodal Bus (see Tab.7) and belonging
to a node (Node Type parameter - Nodal value).
Node Element ID. Identifying number of the equipment in the node:

1. In node, the equipment is identified by number 1.

2. In node, the equipment is identified by number 2.


8. In node, the equipment is identified by number 8.

The identifying number represents even the logic position assumed by the equipment in the
node. This position is important in the definition of the Ethernet elements and/or TDM elements.
Parameter available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of Eth. Elements
and/or Nbr of TDM Elements parameter.
STP Mode. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol at level of node (STP node):

Disable. STP node disabled.

bridge1-pro. STP node enabled: the equipment belongs to Bridge 1.

bridge2-pro. STP node enabled: the equipment belongs to Bridge 2.

all-pro. STP node enabled: the equipment belongs both to Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.

Parameter available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of Eth. Elements
parameter and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is an Ethernet element.
This means that the value of Node Element ID must be a number lower than or equal to the
number set for the parameter Nbr of Eth. Elements.
TDM Nodal Bus Protection. Management of the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node:

Not Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is not protected.

Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is protected.

Parameter available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of TDM Elements
parameter and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is a TDM element.
This means that the value of Node Element ID must be a number lower than or equal to the
number set for the parameter Nbr of TDM Elements.
See also

Verify/modify the radio configuration (Radio)
Verify/modify the management of Ethernet Enhanced functionality (Ethernet Enh.)
Verify/modify the management of the PWE3 function (PWE3)
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation (Sync Enable)
Verify/modify the management of STM-1 (STM-1 MST Mode)
Verify/modify the monitoring status of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH
ring (Translate PDH Into SDH Alarms)
Verify/modify the management of the East-West modality (East-West)
Verify/modify the LLF modality (equipment with two radio directions and Ethernet traffic concatenation) (Pipe los Forwarding)
Verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with Ethernet nodal Bus
(Ethernet elements) (Nbr of Eth. Elements)
Verify/modify the number of elements of the node interconnected with TDM nodal Bus (TDM elements) (Nbr of TDM Elements)
Verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the node (Node Element ID)
Verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of node (STP Mode)

182

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Verify/modify the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the node (TDM Nodal Bus Protection)
Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info)
PWE3 function (info) (PWE3)

Tributary A-B Mapping tab
WARNING Tab available only for equipment of IduBoard Only 1+0, IduBoard or IduBoard Xpic type.

The tab displays the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1.
Parameters

Tributary A Mapping. Mapping of first E1 of base board:

Unmapped. Tributary A is not connected to any Radio E1.

Radio A E1-1. Tributary A is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).

Radio A E1-2. Tributary A is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).

Tributary B Mapping. Mapping of second E1 of base board:

Unmapped. Tributary B is not connected to any Radio E1.

Radio A E1-1. Tributary B is connected to the first Radio channel (E1-1).

Radio A E1-2. Tributary B is connected to the second Radio channel (E1-2).

See also

Verify/modify the mapping of tributaries A and B with Radio E1s

Nodal Port Based VLan tab
WARNING Tab available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the Nbr of Eth Elements pa-

rameter in the Configurator tab, and the value of the Node Element ID parameter is a number lower than
or equal to the number set for the Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter.
The tab displays the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU)
of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs of the node interconnected
by the Ethernet nodal Bus.
The tab contains a series of bars.
Each bar corresponds to an element of the node interconnected by Ethernet nodal Bus (Ethernet element).
The number reported in the bar after the prefix IDU indicates the equipment identifying number.
The selection of a bar expands the below which displays a table.
In the table:

The rows Lan... and Port... represent the ports of the Ethernet Switch of the local IDU.

The row InBand represents the port towards the CPU of the local IDU.

The columns Lan... and Port... represent the ports of the Ethernet Switch of the node element
pointed out in the bar (IDU...).

The column InBand represents the port towards the CPU of the node element pointed out in the
bar (IDU...).

In the table each check-box represents a different combination: local IDU port (Ethernet Switch/CPU) node element port ((Ethernet Switch/CPU).
The presence of the check sign in a check-box indicates that, for this combination of ports, the transit of
the packets is allowed. The absence of the check sign indicates that the transit is not allowed.
The colour of the Lan 1 and Lan 2 of the local IDU is different with respect to the others to point out that
the ports are used for the Ethernet nodal interconnection.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

183

The activation of the transport from/to the Inband ports (CPU) allow activating the inband supervision
among the IDU’s of the node without need to use a VLAN dedicated for this function.
It is possible to display the table of one IDU at a time.
See also

Verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports (Ethernet Switch and
CPU) of the local IDU to/from the ports (Ethernet Switch and CPU) of the other IDUs of the node

184

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring (info)
The networks with traffic protection of end to end type foresee that the duplication of the path is made on
the whole network, both SDH and PDH.
In these networks, it is then necessary that the Switch in reception is made not only depending on the
quality of the SDH network, but also depending on the quality of the signal incoming in the network itself.
To execute this operation, it is foreseen, in the ALCplus2e equipment, to monitor the 2Mbit/s signal incoming in the SDH network and to report the alarm conditions as alarms of VC12 causing the switching of the
path also in presence of alarms or degradation of the PDH signal (see Verify/modify the monitoring status
of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

185

BW & Mod./Link ID
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio.

For the equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is present the BW & Mod./Link ID command. For the
equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration are present the BW & Mod./Link ID 1A (radio branch 1 parameters)
and BW & Mod./Link ID 2A (radio branch 2 parameters) commands.
The BW & Mod./Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive
modulation and link identification number.
Operations

Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation
Modify the reference band/modulation
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation. These parameters change depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation itself.
ADAPTIVE

MODULATION

ACTIVE

Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) (Tx Power Ramp)
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
(Upper Modulation/Lower Modulation)
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled) (Exclude 4QAM Strong)
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM
Traffic)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) (TDM Capacity)
ADAPTIVE

MODULATION INACTIVE

Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM
Traffic)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) (TDM Capacity)
Verify/modify the link identification number
Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1
GUI

BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area
See also

Adaptive modulation (info)

Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Modulation & Capacity tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the
configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation.

186

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Modify the reference band/modulation
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change
is automatically done also on the other branch.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Bandwidth & Modulation parameter indicates the current reference band/modulation. For each one
of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Upgrade up to... functionality is not enabled
(see Equipment Feature tab).

Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change
is automatically done also on the other branch.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The ACM Engine parameter indicates the operating status of the adaptive modulation.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

Disabled. Adaptive modulation disabled.

Enabled. Adaptive modulation enabled.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

The profile is used only if a modulation equal to the minimum modulation has been selected as reference.
In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Tx Power Ramp parameter indicates the power profile of the RF transmitter.
2. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disabled. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.

Ramp to Ref. Modulation. Mean power constant up to a reference modulation. For the next modulations: power increasing when the modulation decreases.

Ramp to Max. Power. Maximizes the power in every modulation depending on ODU type.
Parameter available only for equipment with ODU ASN version 2.1.0 and higher and ODU AS03 version 1.5.0 and higher.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

187

Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation parameters respectively indicates the upper threshold and
the lower threshold of the modulation.
2. To change the parameters Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation, select the value relevant to the
wished modulation.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Exclude 4AQM Strong parameter indicates the enabling status of the ACM profile 4QAM Strong.
2. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is available: the profile is present in the ACM Table.

Enabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is not available: the profile is not present in the ACM
Table.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment which manage static E1’s (see Tab.9).

When the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.), the number of permanently allocated E1
is 0. The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter cannot be modified.
When the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator), the number of permanently allocated E1 is 0. The
Permanent TDM Traffic parameter is not available.
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter indicates the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority
streams).
2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).

188

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
The TDM Capacity parameter indicates the number of E1 which must be kept active for the specific ACM
profile.
2. To change the parameter, double click on the relevant box and type the wished value.
Maximum number of low priority E1 you can assign to the specific profile is pointed out in brackets.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the link identification number
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
2. Select the Local Link ID tab.
The Local Link ID parameter indicates the link identification number.
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the new number (value between 1 and 255).
The setting of the 0 value corresponds to the non-selection of the identification number.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
The setting so executed does NOT automatically modify also the identification number of the remote
equipment.

Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING In order to modify the native priority of Extra E1 (e.g. from 1-18 to 3-16, 1-2) in a connection
between equipment IduBoard Xpic... and equipment without TDM matrix (see Tab.7), it is necessary to
disable the Local/remote synchronization protocol (info).

Operation not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.
2. Select the Extra TDM Priority tab.
The tab displays the priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity).
3. To change the sequence, press a push-button present in the tab (see Tab.8).
4. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

189

BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area
WARNING For equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration, the BW & Mod./Link ID command is available
which opens the BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area.

For equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration, the commands BW & Mod./Link ID 1A, which opens the BW &
Mod./Link ID 1A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 1, and BW & Mod./Link ID
2A, which opens the BW & Mod./Link ID 2A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio
2, are available.
The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and link
identification number.
Tabs

Modulation & Capacity tab. Reference band/modulation, operating status and configuration of
the adaptive modulation.
Local Link ID tab. Link identification number.
Extra TDM Priority tab. Priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity).
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Modulation & Capacity tab
The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation.
Parameters

ACM Engine. Operating status of the adaptive modulation:

Enabled. The adaptive modulation is enabled.

Disabled. The adaptive modulation is disabled.

Bandwidth & Modulation. Channelling - Modulation. For each one of the radio channelling, the
modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
Lower Modulation / Upper Modulation. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the Tx
modulation.
Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
Exclude 4QAM Strong. Enabling status of the ACM profile 4QAM Strong:

Disabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is available: the profile is present in the ACM
Table.

Enabled. The ACM profile 4QAM Strong is not available: the profile is not present in
the ACM Table.

Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
Tx Power Ramp. Power profile of the RF transmitter:

Disabled. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.

Ramp to Ref. Modulation. Mean power constant for modulations lower than or equal
to the reference modulation. For higher modulations, power increases when modulation decreases.

Ramp to Max. Power. Maximizes the power in every modulation depending on ODU
type.
Parameter available only for equipment with ODU ASN version 2.1.0 and higher and
ODU AS-03 version 1.5.0 and higher.

Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

190

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 assigned permanently (high priority streams). These
streams cannot be never discarded by the adaptive modulation. The maximum number of E1
which can be assigned permanently is pointed out next to the box.
Parameter available only for equipment which manage static E1’s (see Tab.9).
When the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk Config.) the number of permanently allocated E1 is 0. The parameter cannot be modified.
Parameter not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
ACM Table. This table shows, for each ACM level, the number of E1 which can be used.
Depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will be available. If the adaptive modulation is:

Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference modulation
(Bandwidth & Modulation).

Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile included
between the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.

Profile (ACM Table). 8 profiles ACM are available from 4QAM to 256QAM. An additional profile
on 4QAM with low rate FEC (4QAM Strong) is present too.
Max TDM Cap (ACM Table). Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 which can be assigned to the TDM traffic for every ACM profile.
Parameter not meaningful if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
TDM Capacity (ACM Table). Number of (low priority) E1 assigned to each ACM profile. These
streams will be discarded by adaptive modulation according to the order configured by the user.
Maximum number of low priority E1 you can assign to the specific profile is pointed out in brackets.
Parameter not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
Global Capacity (ACM Table). Global capacity associated to the ACM profile.
The value is given by: Ethernet Capacity (including the bandwidth used by PWE3) + TDM High
Priority + TDM Low Priority + Maintenance Channel.
Ethernet Capacity (ACM Table). Capacity dedicated to Ethernet traffic.
WARNING When the contextual area is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected
reference band/modulation.

If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled.
In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, it is necessary to confirm (pushbutton Apply) the new reference band/modulation.
See also

Modify the reference band/modulation
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled)
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
Enable/disable the ACM profile 4QAM Strong (ACM enabled)
Modify the number of E1 permanently allocated (high priority streams)
Modify the number of E1 assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)
Adaptive modulation (info)

Local Link ID tab
The tab displays the link identification number.
Parameters

Local Link ID. Link identification number.
The 0 value corresponds to the non-selection of the identification number.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

191

See also

Verify/modify the link identification number

Extra TDM Priority tab
WARNING Parameter not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).

The tab displays the priority of the dynamic E1 (TDM Capacity).
Parameters

E1

LIST

The sorting sequence of TDM Capacity, goes from highest priority (first position in the list) to
lowest one (last position in the list).
This means that the E1 at the bottom of the list will be the first stream to be discarded by the
adaptive modulation, the penultimate E1 in the list will be the second to be discarded and so on
until reaching the E1 at the top of the list which will be the last stream to be discarded by the
adaptive modulation.
When an E1 is grey, this means that this stream is available but is not included within the maximum number of TDM Capacity E1 carried by the configured radio frame.
Every Extra E1 Radio channel is represented by the relevant number (121).
For equipment IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1, IduBoard Xpic
Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 or IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1 the tab displays the following parameters:
Radio Extra E1. Radio Extra E1 channels.
Tributary. Labels of the E1 tributary. The mapping of the channels is hard-wired:
Radio Extra E1-1 -> Tributary A
Radio Extra E1-2 -> Tributary B
Radio Extra E1-3 -> E1-1 expansion
...
Radio Extra E1-18-> E1-16 expansion
E1 channels of expansion are available only for IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 and IduBoard Exp.
16E1 Only 1+0/1+1.
Push-button

The push-buttons change according to the equipment type as shown in Tab.8.
See also

Verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1

192

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Tab.8 Push-buttons (Extra TDM Priority tab)
ALCplus2e equipment
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic

2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0
16E1 PWE3

Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 Only 1+0
16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
16E1 PWE3

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

Push-buttons
Up

Move a single E1 upwards by one place
(higher priority)

Down

Move a single E1 downwards by one
place (lower priority)

1-21

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 1, 2, 321

21-1

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 21, 20, 191

3-18 1-2

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 3, 4, 518, 1, 2, 19, 20,
21

Up

Move a single E1 upwards by one place
(higher priority)

Down

Move a single E1 downwards by one
place (lower priority)

Up

Move a single E1 upwards by one place
(higher priority)

Down

Move a single E1 downwards by one
place (lower priority)

1-18

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 1, 2, 318

18-1

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 18, 17, 161

3-18 1-2

Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the
following way: 3, 4, 518, 1, 2

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

193

Adaptive modulation (info)

Ethernet transport
TDM transport
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (TDM Capacity)
Multiple ACM profiles per modulation
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter

Ethernet transport
ALCplus2e equipment assigns all the capacity not assigned to the TDM transport to the Ethernet interface.
Then, in absence of TDM traffic, the Ethernet capacity coincides with the total available capacity.

TDM transport
WARNING This chapter is not meaningful for equipment with IduBoard...PWE3 with the PWE3 function ac-

tive (see Configurator ).
In this condition, the TDM traffic is not made directly available for the Radio channels (the number of static
and dynamic E1’s is 0). It is encapsulated into PWE3 channels (see PWE3).
The distribution of TDM traffic depends on the equipment type/configuration, as pointed out in Tab.9.
Tab.9 Distribution of TDM traffic
ALCplus2e equipment

Static E1
(Permanent
TDM Traffic)

Dynamic E1
(TDM Capacity)

E1 by
direction

E1 by
polarization

IduBoard Only 1+0
IduBoard

0

2

2

-

IduBoard Xpic

0

2

4

2

80

21

82

-

2x80

2x21

82

-

2x80

2x18

82

-

80

2

82

-

2x80

2x2

164

82

0

18

18

-

0

2

2

-

IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0 (1)
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1
IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
IduBoard Exp. Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3

(2)

(1) (2)

(2)

IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic

Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0
2xSTM-1 32E1 Only 1+0/1+1
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0
Nod 2xSTM-1 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard
IduBoard

Xpic
Xpic
Xpic
Xpic

Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.

2xSTM-1 32E1
2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
16E1 PWE3 (2)

IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1
IduBoard Exp. 16E1 PWE3 Only 1+0

(2)

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0
IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1

194

(1) (2)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

(1)

For this equipment type, when the STM-1 Bulk function is active, the number of static E1 is 0. The parameter cannot be modified. The number of dynamic E1s is automatically limited to allow the transport of
the STM-1 (see STM1 Bulk Config.).
(2)

With PWE3 function inactive (see Configurator). For this type of equipment, when the PWE3 function is
active, the number static and dynamic E1’s is 0.
In ALCplus2e equipment of type IduBoard Only 1+0, IduBoard, IduBoard Xpic, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only
1+0, IduBoard Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0/1+1, IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1 Only 1+0 or IduBoard Xpic Exp. 16E1
Only 1+0/1+1 the TDM traffic is assigned to every ACM profile selecting the number of E1 which must be
transported.
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. For each ACM profile, the value TDM Capacity must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap and
cannot be never greater than 2 or 18 (see Tab.9).
b. When the user sets a value TDM Capacity for an ACM profile, the application automatically
checks and possibly modifies the values TDM Capacity of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in
such a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value TDM Capacity set by the user.
In the remaining types of equipment (see Tab.9) the TDM band can be subdivided in two parts: one not
subjected to ACM, destined to the privileged traffic (high priority) (Permanent TDM Traffic), and one subjected to ACM and destined to the lower priority traffic, (TDM Capacity).
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. The number of high priority E1 traffic channels must be lower than or equal to value displayed
next to the Permanent TDM Traffic box.
b. The value of Permanent TDM Traffic fixes the minimum allowed modulation as it blocks all the
modulations for which Max TDM Cap is lower than Permanent TDM Traffic (the application highlights the minimum allowed modulation as consequence of the value Permanent TDM Traffic set
disabling all the not allowed modulations).
c. For each ACM profile, the value TDM Capacity must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap Permanent TDM Traffic and cannot be never greater than 21 or 2 (equipment with XPIC functionality).
d. When the user sets a value TDM Capacity for an ACM profile, the application automatically
checks and possibly modifies the values TDM Capacity of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in
such a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value TDM Capacity set by the user.
e. A change of Permanent TDM Traffic can cause a violation of rule c. In this case, the application
only highlights which are the out-of-range values of Max TDM Cap (the wordings of the row of
the ACM profile become red) and the restore of the correct values is at user’s charge.
Key:

Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 which can be assigned to the TDM
traffic for each ACM profile.

TDM Capacity Number of (low priority) E1 assigned to each ACM profile.

Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 permanently assigned (high priority streams).

Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (TDM Capacity)
WARNING This chapter is not meaningful for equipment with IduBoard...PWE3 with PWE3 function active
(see Configurator ).

The user, via the application, can define the priority of dynamic Radio E1s (TDM Capacity).
This priority determines the modality used to discard the dynamic Radio E1s when the ACM profile changes.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

195

Multiple ACM profiles per modulation
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected reference modulation (i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically selected (i.e.:
4 QAM).
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected lower modulation
(i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the minimum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4
QAM strong).
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected upper modulation
(i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automatically included (i.e.: 4
QAM).

Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter
The choice of the reference modulation and of the power profile depends on the license type owned by the
network operator.
The reference modulation determines the emission spectrum to be in compliance with the current laws.
The power profile increasing when the modulation decreases can be enabled according to the standard
ETSI EN 302 217-2-2: the power as function of the modulation can be only lower then or equal to the power
of the reference modulation.
More information is reported in the equipment manual ALCplus2e.
In case of mixed links (ALCplus2e - ALCplus2), the selection of the parameters relevant to modulation and
power profile must match the following requirements:

196

Reference modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation), upper and lower thresholds of Tx modulation
(Lower Modulation, Upper Modulation) must be set to the same values in both the equipment.

The power profile of RF transmitter of ALCplus2e equipment must be set depending on the profile currently in use (which can differ from that set) in equipment ALCplus2 according to what
pointed out here below.

ALCplus2
Tx Power Mode

ALCplus2e
Tx Power Ramp

Average

Disabled

Peak

Ramp to Ref. Modulation

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

General Preset
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Command available only for equipment provided with the radio.

For the equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is present the General Preset command. For the equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration are present the General Preset 1A (radio branch 1 parameters) and General Preset 2A (radio branch 2 parameters) commands.
The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters.
Operations

Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
Verify/modify the radio branch label
Verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol
Verify/modify the enabling status of the switch in transmission
Verify/modify the T and N parameters
Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm
Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function
Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM)
GUI

General Preset contextual area
See also

Local/remote synchronization protocol (info)
MCM functionality (info)

Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
The Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm parameter indicates the threshold level of
the signal at reception. Under this threshold level, it is activated the relevant alarm.
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished level.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the radio branch label
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
The Radio Branch Label parameter indicates the label that identifies the radio branch.
2. To change the parameter, type the new label (alphanumeric string with maximum 30 characters).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

197

Verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
The Synchronization Setup Protocol parameter indicates the state of the local/remote synchronization
protocol.

Enable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is active.

Disable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is inactive.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
In 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the enabling status of the switch in transmission
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration.

For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1
and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.
1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
The Tx Switch on remote Alarms parameter indicates the enabling of the switch in transmission:

Enable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (…BER Alarm, …Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is enabled.

Disable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (…BER Alarm, …Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is not enabled.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the T and N parameters
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration.

For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1
and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.
1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
When the enabling status of the switch in transmission is active (Tx Switch on remote Alarms - Enable),
this switch is executed when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a time interval T. With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place contemporarily on
both the Rx of the remote equipment.
The box:

Check Period indicates the time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed
seconds must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place.

Alarm Thres indicates the number of alarmed seconds N.

2. To change the parameters, type the new values in the relevant boxes (Check Period box: value between
1 and 300; Alarm Thres: value between 1 and 60).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

198

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration. For the 1+1
etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit
at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
2. Press Alarm Reset and confirm.
The alarm is reset.
The Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm notifies the switch in transmission as consequence of alarms
on the signal received from the remote equipment.

Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
2. Select the MCM tab.
The tab displays the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function.

Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
2. Select the MCM tab.
The MCM Enable area displays the enabling status of the MCM function for the each LAN.
The active box ( ) indicates that the BW-VSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box
indicates that the messages are not managed.
3. To change a parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM)
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.
2. Select the MCM tab.
3. Set the Tag 802.1Q VLAN value in the TX VLan ID box (value between 2 and 4094). By default, the
BW-VSM message is sent untagged (value 0).
4. Set the Maintenance Level of the OAM domain in the TX OAM Maint. Level box (value between 0 and
7). Default 0.
This setting involves even the change of the destination MAC address of the BW-VSM message because
this address corresponds to the CCM multicast address for the associated OAM maintenance level.
5. In the Fading Hold Off (s) box, set the waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting
the transmission of BW-VSM messages (value between 10 and 60). Default 10 seconds.
6. In the TX Period box, set the transmission period (in seconds) between one BW-VSM message and the
next one (1, 10 or 60 seconds). Default 10 seconds.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

199

7. In the BW Tx Type box, set the criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx Period):

Average. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the available
band within the observation period.

Min. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the minimum value of the available band
within the observation period.

Max. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the maximum value of the available band
within the observation period.

8. Press Apply and confirm.

200

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

General Preset contextual area
WARNING For equipment in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration, the General Preset command is available which
opens the General Preset contextual area.

For equipment in 2x(1+0) configuration, the commands General Preset 1A, which opens the General Preset 1A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 1, and General Preset 2A, which
opens the General Preset 2A contextual area containing the parameters relevant to radio 2, are available.
The contextual area displays the modem and radio parameters.
Tabs

General tab. Modem and radio parameters.
MCM tab. MCM function configuration.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

General tab
The tab displays the modem and radio parameters.
Parameters

Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the signal at reception.
Radio Branch Label. Label that identifies the radio branch.
Synchronization Setup Protocol. Status of the local/remote synchronization protocol:

Enable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is active.

Disable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is inactive.

If the equipment is in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the context contains even the following
parameters.
Tx Switch on remote Alarms. Enabling status of the switch in transmission as consequences
of alarms (…BER Alarm, …Demodulator Fail Alarm) on the signal received from the equipment
located at the other side of the link (remote equipment):

Disable. The switch is not enabled.

Enable. The switch is enabled.

In this condition the switch is executed when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a
time interval T.
With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place
contemporarily on both the Rx of the remote equipment.
Check Period Time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed seconds
must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place.
Alarm Thres Number of alarmed seconds N.
Push-button

Alarm Reset. Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm.
The Transmitter Switch on Remote alarm notifies the switch in transmission as consequence
of alarms on the signal received from the remote equipment.
Push-button present only if for equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

201

See also

Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
Verify/modify the radio branch label
Verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol
Verify/modify the enabling status of the switch in transmission
Verify/modify the T and N parameters
Local/remote synchronization protocol (info)

MCM tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the MCM (MW Capacity Management) function.
Parameters

LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 (MCM Enable area). Respectively enabling status of the MCM function for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the BW-VSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive
box indicates that the messages are not managed.
TX VLan ID. Tag 802.1Q VLAN value. By default, the BW-VSM message is sent untagged (value
0).
TX OAM Maint. Level. Maintenance Level of the OAM domain. By default, the BW-VSM message is associated with Maintenance Level 0.
Fading Hold Off (s). Waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting the
transmission of BW-VSM messages Default 10 seconds.
TX Period (s). Transmission period (in seconds) between one BW-VSM message and the next
one. Default 10 seconds.
BW Tx Type. Criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx Period):

Average. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the
available band within the observation period.

Min. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the minimum value of the available band within the observation period.

Max. The BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the maximum value of the
available band within the observation period.

Default Average.
See also

Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM)
MCM functionality (info)

202

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Local/remote synchronization protocol (info)
The local/remote synchronization protocol (Synchronization Setup Protocol) is a functionality allowing the
management the change of radio configuration between two pieces of equipment connected by link, in such
a way to reduce the out-of-service time at each repartition of the available radio band and to keep the
supervision on the remote equipment active.
This management works in the following way.
When a parameter is changed is the local (or remote) equipment, the change is not immediately executed,
but it is freezed.
The system raises the alarm RADIO Local-Remote Terminal Setup Mismatch to signal to the user that a
mismatch is present between the radio configuration of the local equipment and that of the remote equipment.
The alarm remains active until the operator executes the same change in the equipment located at the
other side of the link.
When the change is executed in the remote equipment, the same change is automatically executed even
in the local equipment, becoming then effective on both the equipment of the link.
The radio parameters, whose change is managed by the local/remote synchronization protocol as described above, are the following (see BW & Mod./Link ID):

Reference modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation).

Profile mask (Lower Modulation - Upper Modulation).

ACM (ACM Engine).

Number high-priority channels (Permanent TDM Traffic).

Number of low-priority channels of every profile (TDM Capacity).

Priority of Extra TDM channels (Extra TDM Priority).

The local/remote synchronization protocol, when active, besides the management of the change of the radio parameters, allows managing the radio configuration of the equipment in the link when the alarm RADIO Link Telemetry Fail is present.
This alarm, if it is the only radio alarm active, indicates a mismatch on the band repartition between the
two pieces of equipment.
In this condition, the modality called Rescue setup is automatically activated, which forces both the equipment to the following condition:

Modulation: 4QAM (respecting ETSI spectral masks)

Radio traffic: all Ethernet

The activation of the Rescue setup modality is pointed out by the activation of the alarm RADIO Rescue
Setup Active.
The alarm is removed when the operator realigns the radio parameters in both the equipment of the link.
The synchronization protocol can be enabled and disabled by the user (see Verify/modify the status of the
local/remote synchronization protocol).
By default, the protocol is enabled.
If the user disables it, it remains disabled until the user re-enables it.
In equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration, enabling/
disabling executed on a branch is automatically reported even on the other branch.
The local/remote synchronization is implemented by a proprietary protocol. It is meaningful and available
for the radio equipment of type ALCplus2e, ALCplus2 or ALplus2.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

203

MCM functionality (info)
The transmission capacity of a radio equipment depends on the propagation condition of the radio channels.
In case of Ethernet ring, the signal degradation can affect one side of the ring, while the other side continues working at rated capacity.
In case of network congestion, the radio will give priority to Ethernet traffic, reducing or eliminating the
low priority traffic.
Similar situation can be found even in other network typologies where the changes of the bandwidth must
be communicated to the upstream Ethernet Switches/Routers in order to adjust the relevant traffic.
By knowing the capacity of the radio link, external equipment can optimize the transport on ring networks
or select additional criteria for the quality management.
The Capacity Management MW (MCM) function allows achieving optimized performances even in the worst
conditions of radio propagation, because it allows forwarding traffic on the Ethernet ring according to the
bandwidth available for every ring branch.
The function is based on a protocol used by the equipment to notify the changes in the capacity to connect
the Ethernet Switch/Router which, on its time, applies the relevant forwarding rules.
The notifications take place by means of OAM (Ethernet-Operations, Administration and Maintenance) type
messages which signal the changes in the band availability (BW-VSM messages).
Through the management (transmission and reception) of these messages and the proper configuration of
the forwarding rules, the ring will be able to change the traffic profile to take the degraded path in consideration.
As regards the MCM function, through the WEB LCT page, it is possible to:

Enable/disable the management of the BW-VSM messages at level of single LAN.

Define the parameters for the forwarding of the BW-VSM messages:

Tag 802.1Q VLAN value (TX VLan ID parameter). By default, the BW-VSM message is
sent untagged (value 0).

Maintenance Level of the OAM domain (TX OAM Maint. Level parameter). By default, the
BW-VSM message is associated with Maintenance Level 0.
This setting involves the change of the destination MAC address of the BW-VSM message
because this address corresponds to the CCM multicast address for the associated OAM
maintenance level.

Waiting period (in seconds) before declaring Fading and starting the transmission of the
BW-VSM messages (Fading Hold Off (s) parameter). The default waiting period is 10 seconds.

Transmission period between one BW-VSM message and the next one (TX Period (s) parameter). The default waiting period is 10 seconds.

Criterion used to calculate the band value available within every transmission period (Tx
Period): average, minimum or maximum value (BW Tx Type parameter). By default, the
BW-VSM messages contain the indication of the average value of the band available during the observation period (Average).

See also

Verify the enabling status and the configuration of the MCM function
Enable/disable the MCM function for each LAN
Modify the management parameters of the BW-VSM messages (MCM)

204

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Xpic
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Command available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth.

Dual Pipe radio configuration.
The Xpic command manages the XPIC function.
Operations

Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function
Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch
Restore the XPIC function of the single branch
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP)
Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
GUI

Xpic contextual area
See also

XPIC function (info)

Verify the configuration parameters of the XPIC function
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.
The Xpic contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function.

Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch
User Profile | Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.
2. To disable temporarily the function XPIC of:

Branch 1, select the Disable value (Radio 1A parameter).

Branch 2, select the Disable value (Radio 2A parameter).

3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Restore the XPIC function of the single branch
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

205

2. To restore the XPIC function of the:

Branch 1, select the Enable value (Radio 1A parameter).

Branch 2, select the Enable value (Radio 2A parameter).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP)
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.
2. To ENABLE the fault management procedure (FMP), select the value Enable (Fault Management Procedure parameter).
To DISABLE the fault management procedure (FMP), select the value Disable (Fault Management Procedure parameter).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Equipment > Xpic.
2. Press Reset Procedure and confirm.

206

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Xpic contextual area
WARNING Contextual area available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Single Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic
Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration.

The contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the XPIC function.
Parameters

Radio 1A (area Xpic). Activation of XPIC function for branch 1:

Enable. Function active.

Disable. Function temporarily deactivated (manual operation).

Radio 2A (area Xpic). Activation of XPIC function for branch 2:

Enable. Function active.

Disable. Function temporarily deactivated (manual operation).

Fault Management Procedure. Status of XPIC fault management procedure (FMP):

Enable. FMP procedure is active.

Disable. FMP procedure is inactive.

When XPIC fault management procedure is active, the detection of a fault on a branch and the consequent action automatically executed by FMP procedure to save the other branch are pointed out
by the faults present in the Fault Management Procedure area.
If a box becomes red, orange, yellow, light blue or green (depending on the severity of the relevant
to the relevant alarm), the box:
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 1A Tx Off, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault
on receiver of branch 1 of remote terminal, FMP procedure has switched off the transmitter of
branch 1 of local terminal.
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 1A, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault on
receiver of branch 2 of remote terminal or on receiver of branch 2 of local terminal, FMP procedure has forced the disabling of XPIC function of branch 1 of local terminal.
Remote Xpic Proc. Radio 2A Tx Off, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault
on receiver of branch 2 of remote terminal, FMP procedure has switched off the transmitter of
branch 2 of local terminal.
Xpic Proc. Block on Radio 2A, indicates that, as consequence of the detection of a fault on
receiver of branch 1 of remote terminal or on receiver of branch 1 of local terminal, FMP procedure has forced the disabling of XPIC function of branch 2 of local terminal.
When the box is grey, this means that the specific fault has not been detected.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Reset Procedure. Restore the function XPIC after a fault detection
See also

Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch
Restore the XPIC function of the single branch
Enable/disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP)
XPIC function (info)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

207

XPIC function (info)
The function XPIC (Crosspolar Interference Canceller) is a modem functionality which allows using the double polarization (vertical and horizontal) in the transmission system.
In this way, exploiting two polarizations, the transmission capacity of the radio link can be double using a
single frequency.
In relation to XPIC function, through WEB LCT page it is possible:

To disable temporarily the function XPIC for every single branch (Disable temporarily the function XPIC for a single branch) and then to re-enable it (Restore the XPIC function of the single
branch).
Disabling the function XPIC is a manual operation (MAN. OP). Remember that, if the timeout of
the manual operations is inactive, the function XPIC remains disabled until when it is restored
by the user.

To enable and disable XPIC fault management procedure (FMP) (see Enable/disable XPIC fault
management procedure (FMP).
In case of detection and signalling of a fault, the function XPIC can be restored (see Restore the
function XPIC after a fault detection).
Purpose of the FMP (Fault Management Procedure) procedure is to identify a malfunction caused
by equipment faults and by equipment faults and to preserve the horizontal or vertical branch
where there are not problems
The procedure differentiates the alarms due to external causes (e.g., fading) from those due to
equipment faults.
The activation of the FMP procedure involves the switch-off of a transmitter and the disabling of
the Xpic inputs.
The condition is permanent and only an operator by means of WEB LCT or NMS5UX-B/
NMS5LX can restore the condition.

208

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

STM1 Bulk Config.
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Command available only for equipment with a specific type of IDU/configuration (see STM-1

Bulk function (info)) and if STM-1 transport function is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
The STM1 Bulk Config. command manages the STM-1 Bulk function which allows transporting the equipment STM-1 transparently.
Operations

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 Bulk function
GUI

STM1 Bulk Config. contextual area
See also

STM-1 Bulk function (info)

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 Bulk function
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING This function can be enabled only for equipment with a specific configuration (see

STM-1 Bulk

function (info).
1. Select Equipment > STM1 Bulk Config.
The Radio 1A and Radio 2A parameters respectively point out the status of the STM-1 Bulk function of
the radio branch 1 and radio branch 2:

Disable. Function disable.

STM-1 1. Function enable for the first STM-1.

STM-1 2. Function enable for the second STM-1.
Value available only if the management of the two STM-1 in MST mode is enabled.

The Radio 2A parameter is available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
2. To change a parameter, select the relevant box and then the wished option.
If a value is set for the Radio 1A parameter this value will not be available for the Radio 2A parameter
and vice versa.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

209

STM1 Bulk Config. contextual area
The contextual area displays the configuration of the STM-1 Bulk function.
Parameters

Radio 1A. Enabling status of the STM-1 Bulk function for radio branch 1:

Disable. Function disable.

STM-1 1. Function enable for the first STM-1.

STM-1 2. Function enable for the second STM-1.
Value available only if the management of the two STM-1 in MST mode is enabled.

Radio 2A. Enabling status of the STM-1 Bulk function for radio branch 2:

Disable. Function disable.

STM-1 1. Function enable for the first STM-1.

STM-1 2. Function enable for the second STM-1.
Value available only if the management of the two STM-1 in MST mode is enabled.

Parameter available only for equipment in 2x(1+0) radio configuration.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Verify/modify the status of the STM-1 Bulk function
STM-1 Bulk function (info)

210

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

STM-1 Bulk function (info)
The STM-1 Bulk function allows the transparent transport of a STM-1 in Radio.
With transparent transport we mean the transport of the whole STM-1. The user cannot execute changes
or configurations on the single virtual containers of the stream.
For equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0), the transport of the STM-1 can be enabled on radio branch
1 or on radio branch 2. Moreover, if two STM-1 streams are managed, it is possible to enable the transport
of the first STM-1 on one branch and the transport of the second STM-1 on the other branch.
The STM-1 Bulk function is available only with equipment type (see Equipment Units tab):

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 Only 1+0

IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

IduBoard Xpic Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 PWE3

The STM-1 Bulk function can be activated only if the equipment has the following configuration:

Radio equipped in 1+0 or 1+1 configuration (see Configurator tab)

Band/modulation which allows the transport of the STM-1 (see Modulation & Capacity tab).
ACM disable:
28MHz - 256 QAM
ACM enable:
40MHz - 64 QAM
40MHz - 128 QAM
40MHz - 256 QAM
56MHz - 16 QAM
56MHz - 32 QAM
56MHz - 64 QAM
56MHz - 128 QAM
56MHz - 256 QAM

STM-1 in MST modality (see Configurator tab, STM-1 MST Mode: 1+0).

Synchronisation management enabled (see Configurator tab).

PWE3 function disable (see Configurator tab).

Local/remote synchronization protocol disabled (see General tab).

The activation of the STM-1 Bulk function determines that:

For the STM-1 for which the function has been activated, the following items will be not available
any more:

The relevant PM measure (G828 Vc12 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2TUG12>).

The command for the management of the relevant VC-4 (see VC-4).

The command for the management of the relevant VC-12 (see VC-12).

The management of the stream in the Cross-Connection matrix (see Cross Connection).

Moreover, it will not be possible to:

Force the quality level in input and/or output of the specific synchronism source (see Synchronisation).

For the radio which the transport of the STM-1 is assigned to:

The static Radio E1 channels (Permanent TDM Traffic) are automatically reset.

The dynamic Radio E1 channels are limited to allow the transport of the STM-1.

If the equipment is in radio configuration 2x(1+0), for the parameter STM-1 MST Mode only the
values 1+0 and 2 x (1+0) MST are available (see Configurator).

The monitoring of the alarms of the 2Mbit/s signal through PDH and SDH ring, if active, is automatically deactivated (see Configurator).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

211

SYNCHRONISATION
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Command available only if the synchronisation management is enabled (see Configurator).

The Synchronisation command manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism
Operations

T0

AND

T4

SYNCHRONISM

Verify the status and configuration of the T0 and T4 synchronism
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted
Enable/disable the T4 Squelch
Set the Hold Off Time parameter
Set the WTR Time parameter
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism
SYNCHRONISM

SOURCES

Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
Force the use of a synchronism source
Set a synchronism source as preferential
Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input
Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input
Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time
Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of
tributary A/B
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism
sources
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN
GUI

Synchronisation contextual area
See also

Synchronisation (info)

Verify the status and configuration of the T0 and T4 synchronism
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
The General tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.

212

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
User Profile | Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Synchronisation.
The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism:

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the forcing (selection of the Free Running or Hold Over option) a message
warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.
4. Confirm the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
The T0-T4 parameter indicates the modality which the T4 synchronism is taken from:

T4-NE-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from one of the synchronism sources because two independent locking devices are used to generate T0 and T4.

T4-EQ-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from synchronism T0 because only one locking device is
used to generate T0 and T4.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the T4 Squelch
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
The T4 Squelch parameter indicates the status of the T4 squelch:

Disabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is disabled

Enabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is enabled. This function becomes active when
source T2/T3 1 has been selected for T0/T4 management.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the Hold Off Time parameter
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

213

The Hold Off Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the
evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded).
At the end of the Hold Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input
source having a valid signal.
2. To change the parameter, set into the box a value between 300 and 1800 msec.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the WTR Time parameter
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
The WTR Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to
allow to the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 min.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
The LTI Set Time and LTI Reset Time parameters point out the threshold level of LTI alarm (Timing
Synk Loss Alarm):

LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the presence
of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.

LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.

2. To change the parameter, set the new values in the specific boxes (allowed interval between 0 and 60
seconds).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the
synchronism
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
The parameter Enabled indicates the status of use of the source quality level as synchronism selection
criterion.
Active box (

) means the use is enabled; inactive box means the use is disabled.

Parameter available only if the Sync quality management functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
2. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

214

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.

1. Select Synchronisation.
The T4 Minimum Quality indicates the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism so that the Squelch does not occur.
2. To change the parameter, select the option:

PRC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
Depending on the used locking devices, the tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 are available.
Tab T0/T4 is available when only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4
(T4-EQ-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the tab is valid for
both synchronisms T0 and T4.
Tab T0 and tab T4 are available when two locking devices are used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-NE-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the tab T0
is valid only for synchronism T0; while those present in tab T4 are valid only for synchronism T4.
The content of T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab, described here below, is the same.

Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The Priority column shows the usage status of each source.
3. To enable the use of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1 and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum
priority).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

215

To disable the use of the source, select the specific Priority box and then the Dis. value.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The Priority column shows the priority level of each source.
3. To change the priority level of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1
and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Force the use of a synchronism source
User Profile | Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The Forced Switch column shows the forcing status of each source.
3. To change the forcing status of a source, select the specific Forced Switch box and then the option:

Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.

On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes.
Only if you are activating the forcing a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays
the current setting of timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.

216

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Set a synchronism source as preferential
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The Preferential Switch column shows if the source is used as preferential.
3. To change the preferential status of a source, select the specific Preferential Switch box and then the
option:

Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism
sources.

On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation
of the synchronism.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 e T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. Even in this case the operation
is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and synchronism T4 because the selection of the
source type is made upstream with respect to locking devices. This means that the setting made,
for example, in tab T0 is automatically reported in tab T4 and vice versa.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The box Source of source T2/T3-2 indicates the type of source currently in use:

Trib. B. Second E1 of the base board (tributary B) (T3 or T2).

Trib. <number>. E1 of the expansion (T2).

3. To change the parameter, select the Source box and then the wished option.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

217

Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 e T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. Even in this case the operation
is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and synchronism T4 because the selection of the
source type is made upstream with respect to locking devices. This means that the setting made,
for example, in tab T0 is automatically reported in tab T4 and vice versa.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The box Source of the source TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B indicates the currently used LAN of Ethernet
Switch for every specific source: LAN-1, LAN-2, LAN-3, LAN-4.
Sources available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
3. To change the parameter, select the Source box and then the wished option.
If a value is set for the source TE LAN-A this value will not be available for the source TE LAN-B and
vice versa.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B
input
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for equipment with the management of the STM-1 and/or the management of the nodal configuration is active (see Configurator).

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 e T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. Even in this case the operation
is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and synchronism T4 because the selection of the
source type is made upstream with respect to locking devices. This means that the setting made,
for example, in tab T0 is automatically reported in tab T4 and vice versa.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
The box Source of source STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B indicates the type of source currently in
use:

STM-1 [1] or STM-1. First STM-1.

STM-1 [2]. Second STM-1.

Nodal 1. First Nodal Bus.

Nodal 2. Second Nodal Bus.

3. To change the parameter, select the Source box and then the wished option.
The availability of the values changes depending on the type and on the configuration of the equipment
as depicted in Tab.10.
If a value is set for the source STM-1/NODAL A, this value will not be available for the source STM-1/
NODAL B and vice versa.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

218

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.

Operation not available for the STM-1 source if the STM-1 Bulk function is active for the specific stream
(see STM1 Bulk Config.).
1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
For every synchronism source, the parameter Ovw Rx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality
level in reception; while the parameter Ovw Tx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality level in
transmission.
3. To change the parameters, select the Ovw Rx Qlty or Ovw Tx Qlty box and than the option:

none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the
SSM protocol or, for the sources that do not use the SSM protocol (T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 sources), the default one (SEC).

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism
without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Synchronisation.
The presence of the tab:

T0/T4, means that only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0 and T4. In
this case, the operation executed in the tab is common and valid both for synchronism T0 and
synchronism T4.

T0 and T4, means that two independent locking devices are used. In this case, the operation
executed in tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0 and that executed in tab T4 is valid only for
synchronism T4.

2. Select the T0/T4, T0 or T4 tab.
3. Select the source, with valid signal, whose availability you wish to restore for the generation of T0 synchronism.
4. Press Wtr Clear and confirm.
The source is immediately used for the generation of T0 synchronism. The period Wtr Time is considered elapsed.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

219

Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of the

tributary (A or B) as traffic tributary.
1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the E1 Source Type tab.
The Trib. A and Trib. B boxes respectively point out the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A and B.
3. To change the parameters select, in the box relevant to the wished tributary, the option:

T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC). The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic only or for
the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see Re-timing the E1s set
for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

T3 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2Mbit/s.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2MHz.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2MHz as interface for the
tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Here below only the operation of re-timing of the E1s of equipment is described. For the correct

configuration of the functionality for a radio link see Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation.
Operation not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).
1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the E1 Retiming tab.
The table present in the tab displays the activation status of the function E1 re-timing for every E1
equipment tributary.
Every row of the table corresponds to a tributary for which is displayed in the column:

Name. Tributary label:

E1 A. First E1 of base board (tributary A).

E1 B. Second E1 of base board (tributary B).

E1 <number>. E1 of expansion.

E1 Retiming. Status of E1 re-timing function of the tributary:

Off. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.

On. The E1 re-timing function is active.

Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

220

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical,
Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

3. To change status of E1 re-timing function of a tributary, select the specific E1 Retiming box and then
the wished option.
Pressing Revert changes cancels the change executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only:

If the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.

For framed E1 (2Mbit/s).

1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the T2/T3 E1 SA Bit/1000Base-T Role tab.
In the E1 Time Slot 0 Spare Bits area, the T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 boxes respectively point out the spare
bit of timeslot 0 of the E1 frame used for the coding of the quality level of the sources T2/T3 1 and T2/
T3 2: Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8.
3. To change the parameters, select the T2/T3 1 or T2/T3 2 box and then the Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7 or Sa8
option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used
as synchronism sources
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only:

If the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.

For LANs with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active and the active configuration is 1000Base-T.

1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the T2/T3 E1 SA Bit/1000Base-T Role tab.
In the 1000Base-T Role area, the boxes TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B respectively point out the modality
used to assign the role (Master or Slave) of the LANs set for the synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE
LAN-B:

According to synch direction. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is
automatically managed by SSM protocol independently from the port parameter.

As set up for source LAN. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is defined at level of LAN (see Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for
the LAN).

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Sync eth support functionality is not enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

221

Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchro-

nism, is enabled.
1. Select Synchronisation.
2. Select the LAN SSM Enabling tab.
The parameters LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4 respectively point out the enabling status of the management of the SSM messages for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the SSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box indicates that the messages are not managed.
3. To change a parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

222

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Synchronisation contextual area
The contextual area displays status and configuration of the sources and the outputs of synchronism.
Tabs

General tab. Configuration and alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.
T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab. Configuration and status of the synchronism sources.
E1 Source Type tab. Parameters to manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and
set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B.
E1 Retiming tab. Parameters to re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic
and synchronisation.
T2/T3 E1 SA Bit / 1000Base-T Role tab. Parameters for the management of the sources T2/T3
1, T2/T3 2, TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B when the use of the source quality level as criterion for the
selection of the synchronism is active.
LAN SSM Enabling tab. Enabling status of the SSM messages for the LANs.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Synchronisation (info)

General tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 and T4 synchronism.
Parameters

Alarms area. Alarms status of the T0 synchronism (Free Running, Hold Over and T0 boxes) and
T4 synchronism (T4 box). The colour of each box displays the status of the specific alarm:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Status Control (Settings area). Status of T0 synchronism:

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by
the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

T4 Squelch (Settings area). Status of the T4 squelch:

Disabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is disabled.

Enabled. The squelch of the T4 synchronism is enabled. This function becomes active
when source T2/T3 1 has been selected for T0/T4 management.

T4-T0 (Settings area). Modality which the T4 synchronism is taken from:

T4-NE-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from one of the synchronism sources because two
independent locking devices are used to generate T0 and T4.

T4-EQ-T0. Synchronism T4 is taken from synchronism T0 because only one locking
device is used to generate T0 and T4.

Hold Off Time (area Time). Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded). At the end of the Hold
Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input source having a
valid signal.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

223

WTR Time (area Time). Time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to allow to
the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the selection of T0 synchronism.
LTI Set Time / LTI Reset Time (area Time). Threshold level of LTI alarm (TimingSynkLossAlarm):

LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.

LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.

T0 Current (Quality area). Current quality level of the T0 synchronism:

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.

PRC. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The quality of the T0 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

Generally, the quality of the T0 synchronism corresponds to the quality of the synchronism
which T0 is derived from.
T4 Current (area Quality). Current quality level of the T4 synchronism.

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.

PRC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization (equivalent to condition
of T4 squelch).

Enabled (Quality area). Status of use of source quality level as synchronism selection criterion.
Active box ( ) means the source quality level is used as synchronism selection criterion; inactive box means the quality level is used as selection criterion.
T4 Minimum Quality (area Quality). Minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4
synchronism so that the Squelch does not occur:

PRC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The quality of the T4 synchronism complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264
Recom. that defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

WARNING The T0 Current, T4 Current and T4 Minimum Quality parameters are meaningful only if the use
of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.

Quality area is available only if the Sync quality management functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
See also

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
Set the modality from which the T4 synchronism is extracted

224

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Enable/disable the T4 Squelch
Set the Hold Off Time parameter
Set the WTR Time parameter
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism

T0/T4, T0 and T4 tab
The tabs display the configuration parameters and the status of the synchronism sources.
Depending on the used locking devices, the tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 are available.
Tabs

T0/T4. Tab available when only one locking device is used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-EQ-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the
tab is valid for both synchronisms T0 and T4.
T0 and T4. Tabs available when two locking devices are used to generate the synchronisms T0
and T4 (T4-NE-T0). In this case, the status and the configuration of the sources present in the
tab T0 is valid only for synchronism T0; while those present in tab T4 are valid only for synchronism T4.
The content of tabs T0/T4, T0 and T4 is the same.
The table present in the specific tab displays the sources for the synchronism T0 and/or T4. Every
row corresponds to one source.
Parameters

Name. Synchronism source name:

T2/T3 1 [Interface]. Source extracted from the tributary A. The interface is pointed
out between square brackets. It can be T3 or T2.

T2/T3-2 [Interface]. Source extracted from tributary B or from one of the E1 of the
expansion. The interface is pointed out between square brackets. It can be T3 (tributary B only) or T2.

TE LAN-A. First source extracted from one of LANs of Ethernet Switch.

TE LAN-B. Second source extracted from one of LANs of Ethernet Switch.

STM-1/NODAL A. First source extracted from the STM-1 (1 or 2) or from the Nodal
Bus (1 or 2).

STM-1/NODAL B. Second source extracted from the STM-1 (1 or 2) or from the Nodal
Bus (1 or 2).

STM-1 [1] or STM-1. Source extracted from the first STM-1 tributary.

STM-1 [2]. Source extracted from the second STM-1 tributary.

Nodal 1. Source extracted from the Nodal Bus 1.

Nodal 2. Source extracted from the Nodal Bus 2.

RADIO 1A. Source extracted from the Radio 1A.

RADIO 2A. Source extracted from the Radio 2A.

Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (12,8MHz STRATUM 3).
This source is valid only for synchronism T0, so it will be present only in tabs T0/T4
or T0. The Internal source has not configuration parameters.

The detail of the signal/configuration relevant to every single s source and the availability of the
source depending on the type/configuration of the equipment is pointed out in Tab.10.
TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B sources are available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
Source. Source type used as synchronism:

Trib. A. First E1 of the base board (tributary A) (2MHz or 2Mb/s).

Trib. B. Second E1 of the base board (tributary B) (2MHz or 2Mb/s).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

225

Trib. <number>. E1 of the expansion (2Mb/s interface).

LAN-1, LAN-2, LAN-3, LAN-4. Respectively first, second, third and fourth LAN of the
Ethernet Switch. LAN 3 and LAN 4 are available when configured both with electrical
and optical interface.

STM-1 [1] or STM-1. First STM-1.

STM-1 [2]. Second STM-1.

Nodal 1. First Nodal Bus.

Nodal 2. Second Nodal Bus.

Priority. Status and priority use of the source:

Dis. The synchronism source is not used.

<1 ÷ 9>. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed out by
the number (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).

Forced Switch. Forced use of the source:

Off. The source has not been manually forced for the generation of the T0 and/or T4
synchronism.

On <light blue box>. The source has been manually forced for the generation of the
T0 and/or T4 synchronism (Manual Operation).

Preferential Switch. Status of preferential usage of the source:

Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources.

On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used
for the generation of the synchronism.

Sync Loss / Sync Drift. Respectively status of the alarm Timing Synk Loss Alarm and Timing
Synk Drift Alarm relevant to the source. The colour of each box displays the status of the specific
alarm:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Rx Quality. Quality level in reception of the source:

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.

The quality level in reception for STM-1 is in compliance with the SSM protocol, while for E1
(2Mbit/s and 2MHz) it is SEC.
Tx Quality. Quality level in transmission of the source.
The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the protocol
calculation.
The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality parameter.
The transmission quality level for STM-1 when the STM-1 Bulk function is active (see STM1 Bulk
Config.) is UNK.
Ovw Rx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in reception of the source:

226

PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.

SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.

SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.

DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.

UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown

none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken
from the SSM protocol or, for the sources that do not use the SSM protocol (T2/T3 1
and T2/T3 2 sources), the default one (SEC).

Ovw Tx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in transmission of the source.
The displayed values are the same described for the Ovw Rx Qlty parameter.
The Rx Quality, Tx Quality, Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Qlty parameters are present only if the use of
the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.
The source of synchronism whose row has red border indicates the source which the equipment extracts the synchronization T0 and/or T4 from.
When the source, which the synchronization is extracted from, changes, the row relevant to the new
source will become yellow and will blink before becoming of color sky-blue with red border.
Push-button

Refresh. Update the context.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
Wtr clear. Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without
waiting for the expiry of Wait Time.
See also

Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
Force the use of a synchronism source
Set a synchronism source as preferential
Set the signal used as synchronism source for T2/T3-2 input
Set the signal used as synchronism source for TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input
Set the source used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A or STM-1/NODAL B input
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source

E1 Source Type tab
The tab displays the parameters to manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the
interface (output/input) of tributary A/B.
Parameters

Trib. A / Trib. B. Output of synchronism T12, respectively on tributary A and B:

T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC). The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic
only or for the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see
pag.213To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

T3 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface
2Mbit/s.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.

T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface
2MHz.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

227

Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2MHz as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source.
WARNING The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of the

tributary (A or B) as traffic tributary.
See also

Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of
tributary A/B

E1 Retiming tab
WARNING Tab not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).

The tab displays the parameters to re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation.
Parameters

Name. Tributary label:

E1 A. First E1 of base board (tributary A).

E1 B. Second E1 of base board (tributary B).

E1 <number>. E1 of expansion.

E1 Retiming. Status of E1 re-timing function of the tributary:

Off. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.

On. The E1 re-timing function is active.

Sync Alarm. Sync Alarm status. The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, indicates whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Push-button

Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
See also

Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation

T2/T3 E1 SA Bit / 1000Base-T Role tab
The tab displays the parameters for the management of the sources T2/T3 1, T2/T3 2, TE LAN-A and TE
LAN-B when the use of the source quality level as criterion for the selection of the synchronism is active.
Parameters

T2/T3 1, T2/T3 2 (E1 Time Slot 0 Spare Bits area). Respectively spare bit of timeslot 0 of E1
frame used for the coding of the quality level of the source T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2: Sa4, Sa5, Sa6,
Sa7 or Sa8.
TE LAN-A, TE LAN-B (1000Base-T Role area). Respectively modality to assign the role (Master
or Slave) of the LANs (1000Base-T) set for the synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B:

228

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

According to synch direction. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is automatically managed by SSM protocol independently from the setting
of the port parameters.

As set up for source LAN. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is defined at level of LAN (see Verify/modify the operating modality of the line
synchronism (role) for the LAN).

See also

Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism
sources

LAN SSM Enabling tab
The tab displays the enabling status of the SSM messages.
Parameters

LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4. Respectively enabling status of the management of the SSM
messages for the LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4.
The active box ( ) indicates that the SSM messages are managed by the LAN, the inactive box
indicates that the messages are not managed.
See also

Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

229

Synchronisation (info)

Management of synchronisation
Synchronism sources
Enabling of the synchronism sources
Configuration of the synchronism sources
Priority of the synchronism source
Quality of synchronism source
Forcing of a synchronism source
Function of preferential synchronism source
Internal synchronism T0
Synchronism in output T4
Synchronism in output T12
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation

Management of synchronisation
ALCplus2e equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled.
When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the
local internal reference.
When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source, enabled with the highest priority, is used
to synchronise the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential is not active).
If the quality is active as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, the enabled source with highest
quality is used to synchronize the equipment (if no forcing is active).
The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see Configurator) and
enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism.
The equipment makes a synchronization signal available to other equipment (synchronism T4), common
or independent from the synchronism used by the equipment (synchronism T0).
Access to T4 synchronism is possible through a special setting of the outputs of tributaries A and/or B (T12
synchronism).

Synchronism sources
The equipment has more synchronism sources.
The number/type of synchronism sources depends on the type/expansion/configuration of equipment as
depicted in Tab.10.
Tab.10 Synchronism sources
IDUBOARD ONLY 1+0
Name

Configuration

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

(1)

T2/T3 2

E1

Tributary B with interface T2 or T3

(1)

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 1A

230

Type

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

IDUBOARD
IDUBOARD XPIC
Name

Type

Configuration

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

(1)

T2/T3 2

E1

Tributary B with interface T2 or T3

(1)

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

RADIO 1A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 2A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 2A) (3)
Source available only in 2x(1+0) radio configurator

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Name

Type

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷32) with interface T2

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

STM-1 (4)

STM-1

STM-1.
Source available only if the management of STM-1 is enabled

RADIO 1A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
IDUBOARD EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 2XSTM-1 32E1 PWE3
Name

Type

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷32) with interface T2E1

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

STM-1

STM-1.
Source available only if the management of STM-1 is enabled

RADIO 1A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 2A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 2A) (3)
Source available only in 2x(1+0) radio configurator

STM-1

(4)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

231

IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Name

Type

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷16) with interface T2

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 1A

The name and the configuration of the sources in input for the STM-1 and for the Nodal Bus change depending on the configuration of the equipment and are pointed out in Tab.11

IDUBOARD EXP. NOD 2XSTM-1 16E1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. NOD. 2XSTM-1 16E1
Name

Type

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷16) with interface T2

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

RADIO 1A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 2A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 2A) (3)
Source available only in 2x(1+0) radio configurator

The name and the configuration of the sources in input for the STM-1 and for the Nodal Bus change depending on the configuration of the equipment and are pointed out in Tab.11

IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 PWE3 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 ONLY 1+0/1+1
Name

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷16) with interface T2

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 1A

232

Type

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

IDUBOARD EXP. 16E1 PWE3
IDUBOARD XPIC EXP. 16E1 PWE3
Name

Type

Configuration
(1)

T2/T3 1

E1

Tributary A with interface T2 or T3

T2/T3 2

E1

Source configurable as:
• Tributary B with interface T2 or T3 (1)
• E1 of expansion (1÷16) with interface T2

TE LAN-A

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

TE LAN-B

(2)

LAN Eth

LAN of Ethernet Switch

RADIO 1A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 1A)
Source available only if the radio is equipped

RADIO 2A

Radio

Synchronism from the remote terminal (Radio 2A) (3)
Source available only in 2x(1+0) radio configurator

(1)

The type of interface depends on the setting made by the user for the management of the synchronism
in output T12 (see Manage the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/
input) of tributary A/B).
(2)

Source configurable as:

LAN 1

LAN 2

LAN 3 (electrical or optical interface)

LAN 4 (electrical or optical interface)

If a value is set for the source TE LAN-A this value will not be available for the source TE LAN-B and
vice versa.
Source available only if the Sync eth support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
(3)

Source not available for equipment in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with East-West option
disable.

(4)
If the management of two STM-1 is active, the values STM-1 [1] and STM-1 [2] will be available, which
respectively point out the source relative to the first STM-1 and second STM-1.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

233

Tab.11 Availability synchronism sources (STM-1/Nodal Bus)
Equipment Configuration
STM-1 management

Synchronism sources for STM-1/Nodal Bus

Nodal Bus management

Name

Type

Configuration

-

-

Disable

Enable
1 STM-1

Enable
2 STM-1

Disable

Enable

X

-

-

X

-

-

X

-

-

-

X

Nodal 1

Nodal Bus

Nodal Bus 1

Nodal 2

Nodal Bus

Nodal Bus 2

-

X

-

X

-

STM-1

STM-1

First STM-1

-

X

-

-

X

STM-1/
NODAL A

STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

Source configurable as (1):
• STM-1 (STM-1)
• Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
• Nodal Bus 2 (Nodal 2)

STM-1/
NODAL B

STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

Source configurable as (1):
• STM-1 (STM-1)
• Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
• Nodal Bus 2 (Nodal 2)

STM-1 [1]

STM-1

First STM-1

STM-1 [2]

STM-1

Second STM-1

STM-1/
NODAL A

STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

Source configurable as (1):
• First STM-1 (STM-1 [1])
• Second STM-1 (STM-1 [2])
• Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
• Nodal Bus 2 (Nodal 2)

STM-1/
NODAL B

STM-1 or
Nodal Bus

Source configurable as (1):
• First STM-1 (STM-1 [1])
• Second STM-1 (STM-1 [2])
• Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
• Nodal Bus 2 (Nodal 2)

-

-

-

-

X

X

X

-

-

X

(1)
If a value is set for the source STM-1/NODAL A this value will not be available for the source STM-1/
NODAL B and vice versa.

Enabling of the synchronism sources
A synchronism source, in order to be used, must be enabled by the user (see Enable/disable the use of a
synchronism source).

Configuration of the synchronism sources
For some synchronism sources, the type of signal to use can be set (see Tab.10).

Priority of the synchronism source
A priority level can be associated to every synchronism source (see Modify the use priority of a synchronism
source).

234

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

When the quality is not active as criterion for the selection of the synchronism, the source with the highest
priority level and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential
source is not active).
The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 indicates
the highest priority and 9 the lowest one.
Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this
source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately
lower.
When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment after the WTR time will automatically start to use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become
unavailable, the equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference.
The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions:

The source is not physically present.

The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3) is
greater than ± 7 ppm.

If two or more sources with the same priority are activated, these sources will be inserted into a circular
and not Revertive list.

Quality of synchronism source
Every synchronism source is characterized by a quality level.
Through WEB LCT page, it is possible Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion
of the synchronism.
When the use of quality is enabled, it concurs in the selection of the source to use for the synchronisation
in the following way: the source with higher quality level, and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize
the equipment (if a forcing is not active).
The source quality level is given by the synchronisation status messages (SSM - Synchronisation Status
Message).
The availability quality levels, from higher to lower level, are listed here below:

PRC (Primary Reference Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the primary reference
clock.

SSUT (Synchronisation Supply Unit Transit). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITUT G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the
transit synchronism units.

SSUL (Synchronisation Supply Unit Local). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T
G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the synchronism local units.

SEC (SDH Equipment Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

Depending on the type of synchronism source, the modality used to insert and extract the SSM messages
changes as pointed out here below.
Synchronism sources T2/T3 1 and T2/T3 2 (E1)
For the synchronism sources T2/T3, the management of the quality depends on the tributary used as synchronism source, on the configuration of the synchronism in output T12 and on the E1 re-timing function
as displayed here below.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

235

Synchronism
sources
T2/T3 1

Configuration
Tributary A

T2/T3 2

Tributary B

Output of
synchronism T12

E1 re-timing
function

Quality management in output Quality management in input
(Tx)
(Rx)

T2
(NORMAL TRAFFIC)

Enable

Quality value of T0 is inserted
in the spare bits (1)

Disable

Quality not managed

(2)

T3 (2Mb/s)

-

Quality value of T0 is inserted
in the spare bits (1)

T3 (2MHz)

-

Quality not managed

T2
(NORMAL TRAFFIC)

(2)

Enable

Quality value of T0 is inserted
in the spare bits (1)

Disable

Quality not managed

-

Quality value of T0 is inserted
in the spare bits (1)

T3 (2MHz)

-

Quality not managed

(2)

-

Enable

Quality value of T0 is inserted
in the spare bits (1)

-

Disable

Quality not managed

(1)

Value equivalent to DNU if T0 is derived from the considered tributary.

(2)

Value UNK.

Quality value (SSM) is extracted from the spare bits

(2)

T3 (2Mb/s)

Tributary E1
expansion

Quality value (SSM) is extracted from the spare bits

(2)

Synchronism sources TE LAN-A and TE LAN-B (Ethernet)
The management of the SSM messages can be enabled for every single LAN.
This setting affects the transmission and the reception of the SSM messages as displayed here below.
LAN configuration
LAN used as
synchronism source

(1)

LAN not used
as synchronism source

SSM messages
management

Quality management in input
(Rx)

Quality management in output
(Tx)

Enable

Quality value (SSM) is extracted from Quality value of T0 is inserted in the
the received packet
transmitted packet (value equivalent to
DNU if T0 is derived from the considered
tributary)

Disable

Quality value is DNU

SSM messages are not transmitted

Enable

SSM messages are not managed

Quality value of T0 is inserted in the
transmitted packet

Disable

SSM messages are not managed

SSM messages are not transmitted

(1)

LAN connected to the TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input (see Set the signal used as synchronism source for
TE LAN-A or TE LAN-B input).
As regards the quality management via the WEB LCT page, it is possible:
Enable/disable the use of the source quality into the choice criterion of the synchronism
Set the minimum quality level of the source that generates the T4 synchronism.
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Verify/modify the spare bit used for the coding of quality for T2/T3 E1 synchronism sources
Verify/modify the modality to assign the role of the LANs (1000Base-T) used as synchronism sources
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN
WARNING The quality of the synchronism sources is a feature subjected to enabling (Sync quality management equipment feature).

If this feature is not enabled, all the parameters relevant to the quality management will not be available
(see Verify the equipment feature).

236

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Forcing of a synchronism source
This function foresees the user can force the selection of one synchronism source (see Force the use of a
synchronism source).
This forcing is made without considering the status, the quality level and the priority of the source.
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the synchronism. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operations expires (if set).

Function of preferential synchronism source
This function foresees the choice of a source to use as preferential among those enabled (see Set a synchronism source as preferential).
When the function of preferential source is not active, the internal synchronism is taken from the enabled
source with highest quality level or highest priority (if the quality is not active).
When the function of preferential source is activated for a source, this source will be used (in absence of
alarms causing its degradation or forced sources) to take the internal synchronism independently from its
priority level.
This condition is maintained until when the user disables the function of preferential source or the source
signal becomes degraded.
This applies only if the quality is not enabled as criterion for the selection of the synchronism.

Internal synchronism T0
The synchronism source, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by the SETS
of the equipment according to the following order of criteria:

Status of the source (enabled/disabled)

Forcing of the source

Status of the signal (valid/degraded)

Quality level of the source (if the quality management is enabled)

Preferential source

Source priority

The internal synchronism T0 can assume one of the following statuses:

Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).

Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.

Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see Force the status of the T0 synchronisation).
The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0.
These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them
or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).

Synchronism in output T4
The equipment makes a synchronization signal available to other equipment (synchronism T4), common
or independent from the synchronism used by the equipment (synchronism T0) (see Set the modality from
which the T4 synchronism is extracted).
This because the synchronization unit is composed by two independent locking devices (Phase Locked
Loop):

A device for the generation of equipment circuit (T0)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

237

A device for the generation of synchronism output (T4)

The selection of the references which the devices are locked to can be independent (T4T0) or associated
(T4=T0) to the use of a single device.
For every device, as told before, a set of sources can be set which, depending on their priority, are selected
to generate the equipment synchronisation.

Synchronism in output T12
The user can set that the synchronism in output is provided to tributaries A and/or B (see par. Manage the
output of synchronism T12 on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B). In this
case the use of the tributary (A and/or B) as traffic tributary is compromised.
The use of the tributary A and/or B as output of synchronism T12 determinates the type of the interface
of the tributary (A and/or B) used as synchronism source (see Tab.12).
Tab.12 Synchronism in output (T12)
Value set as output of
synchronism T12
(parameter Trib. A)
T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC)

Output of Synchronism
T12 on tributary A
Yes

(1)

Interface of tributary A
(output/input)

Use of tributary A
as traffic tributary

2Mbit/s

Yes

T3 (2Mb/s)

Yes

2Mbit/s

No

T3 (2MHz)

Yes

2MHz

No

Output of Synchronism
T12 on tributary B

Interface of tributary B
(output/input)

Use of tributary B
as traffic tributary

2Mbit/s

Yes

Value set as output of
synchronism T12
(parameter Trib. B)
T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC)

Yes

(1)

T3 (2Mb/s)

Yes

2Mbit/s

No

T3 (2MHz)

Yes

2MHz

No

(1)

For the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic (see Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation).

Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
The function called Re-timing of E1s allows re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic
and synchronisation, to increase the requirements of jitter and wander even in case of operation with adaptive modulation (ACM).
WARNING This function is not available if the PWE3 function is active (see Configurator).

Implementation of the function for the E1s of the base board (tributary A and B)
The tributaries of the base board can be set for the transport only of the traffic or as output of T12 synchronism.
If the user wishes to use the tributary A or B for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation,
in any condition of operation of the radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations
described in the following example.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary A used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.5).

238

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Fig.5 Example of re-timing of tributary A (synchronisation)
LOCAL equipment

REMOTE equipment

SETS
management

SETS
management

Tributary A

Tributary A

Operations to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT page:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Configurator).
b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see E1).
c. Set the source T2/T3 1 (tributary A) as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
d. Set the value T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC) as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A
(see Synchronisation).
Operations to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT page:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Configurator).
b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see E1).
c. Set the source RADIO 1A as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
For equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0), set the source RADIO 1A or RADIO 2A depending
on the Radio E1 which the tributary A is cross-connected.
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary A (see Synchronisation).
e. Set the value T2 (NORMAL TRAFFIC) as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A
(see Synchronisation).

Implementation of the function for the E1s of the expansion (tributary 1...n)
Generally the tributaries of the expansion transport traffic.
If the user wants to use their frequency for synchronisation purposes in any condition of operation of the
radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations described in the following example.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary 1 used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.6).
Fig.6 Example of re-timing of tributary 1 (synchronisation)
LOCAL equipment

REMOTE equipment

SETS
management

SETS
management

Tributary 1

Tributary 1

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

239

Settings to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT page:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Configurator).
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see E1).
c. Set the tributary 1 as source T2/T3 2 (see Synchronisation).
d. Set the source T2/T3 2 as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
Settings to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT page:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (see Configurator).
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see E1).
c. Set the source RADIO 1A as synchronism source (see Synchronisation).
For equipment in radio configuration 2x(1+0), set the source RADIO 1A or RADIO 2A depending
on the Radio E1 which the tributary A is cross-connected.
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary 1 (see Synchronisation).
WARNING In case you want to use this function (contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation) on
more E1, all the tributaries must be synchronous, moreover the re-timing must be activated for all the
tributaries and not only for the tributary used as synchronous source.

240

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

BASE BAND

Ethernet Switch (Enh.). It manages the configuration of the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced).
LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.). It manages the specific LAN of the Ethernet
Switch (Enhanced).
Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.). It manages the specific Radio port of the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced).
Spanning Tree. It manages the spanning tree in the network.
Ring Protection. It manages the Ring Protection mode (G.8032).
TDM Tributaries. It manages the TDM tributaries.
Cross Connection. It manages the cross-connection matrix.
Radio E1 Framing. It manages the structure of the Radio E1s.
PWE3. It manages the PWE3 Bundle and the PWE3 channels.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

241

Ethernet Switch (Enh.)

Common Parameters. It manages the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced) configuration and the virtual LANs.
Priority towards LAN ports. It manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, PTOS/DSCP)
of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and the output queues of the LANs.
Priority towards Radio ports. It manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, MPLS,
PTOS/DSCP) of the packets, in input to any LAN, and the output queues of the Radio port of Ethernet
Switch.
Compression. It manages the compression of the level-2 and level-3 headers present into an Ethernet
packet, in output from the Switch, before the traffic is inserted in the radio frame.

242

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Common Parameters
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The Common Parameters command manages the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced) configuration and the virtual LANs.
Operations

GENERAL

SETTINGS OF THE

ETHERNET SWITCH (ENHANCED)

Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field
Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet
Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
Display the MAC Table
Reset the MAC Table
Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch
Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality
VIRTUAL LAN
Verify the existing virtual LANs
Create a virtual Lan
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan
Delete a virtual Lan
RADIO PACKET FRAGM.
Verify/modify the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets
1588 PASS THROUGH
Verify/modify the status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality
Verify/modify the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets
GUI

Common Parameters contextual area
See also

Virtual LAN (info)
1588 Pass Through functionality (info)

Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
The QinQ ETH Type parameter indicates the Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field.
2. To change the parameter, type the new value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING When the Provider modality is enabled (see LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4

(Enh.)/Port A (Enh.), Port B (Enh.)), for the correct transit of the supervision packets it is suggested to set
the value 2048 as maximum packet size.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

243

Moreover, if the Radio port (or at least one of the Radio ports, see Tab.13)is configured in Fallback modality, the value 1522 cannot be set.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
The Max Packet size (Byte) parameter indicates the maximum size of the accepted packet:

1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frame).

2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.

10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING If some VLANs have been already created, when the partition and the indexing on VID (VLAN
Identifier) basis of the addresses in MAC Table (selection of option Enable), IT IS NECESSARY to execute
a software reset.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
The parameter MAC Learning Vid basis indicates the address learning modality of MAC address in the
relevant table:

Disable. Learning of MAC Address in MAC Table is never partitioned in presence of VLAN 802.1Q
registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).

Enable. The partition and the indicization on VID basis of MAC Addresses in MAC Table are enabled. Their learning is registered in a segment of MAC Table whose index is the value of VID
contained in the VLANs entering the Switch and registered in VTU.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
The MAC Addr Aging Time parameter indicates the validity period of the MAC addresses, dynamically
acquired and stored in the specific table.
2. To change the parameter, set the wished value (numeric value between 15 and 3825 seconds).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Display the MAC Table
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Press Show Mac Table.
The MAC Table window shows the content of the MAC Table at the moment when the window has been
opened. To update the list, press Refresh.
Every row of the table corresponds to one address with the indication of:

244

Mac Address. Registered MAC address, expressed in hexadecimal format.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

FID. Number of the MAC Table partition, which the address is associated to.

Port. Output port relevant to the respective registered address:

CPU. Internal port.

LAN-1. First LAN of the Ethernet Switch.

LAN-2. Second LAN of the Ethernet Switch.

LAN-3. Third LAN of the Ethernet Switch.

LAN-4. Fourth LAN of the Ethernet Switch.

RADIO-1. First Radio port of the Ethernet Switch (Port A).

RADIO-2. Second Radio port of the Ethernet Switch (Port B).

The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.13).

TTL. Priority in the deletion of the packet from the MAC Table:

1. The address will be the first to be deleted.

2. The address will be the second to be deleted.

3. The address will be the third to be deleted.

4. The address will be the fourth to be deleted.

5. The address will be the fifth to be deleted.

6. The address will be the sixth to be deleted.

7. The address will be the last to be deleted.

Value meaningful only for Unicast aging packets.

Description. Type of address:

Unicast aging. Dynamic Unicast address (removed from MAC Table at the expiry of Aging
Time).

Unicast static. Static Unicast address (not removed from MAC Table at the expiry of Aging
Time).

Unicast Mng static. Static Unicast address for management.

Multicast static. Static Multicast address.

Multicast Mng static. Static Multicast address for management.

Protocol Type. Type of packets:

OAM. OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) packets.

RSTP. Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol packets.

SLOW. service packets used for the equipment management.

---. Packets with protocol or use different from those listed above.

Reset the MAC Table
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Press Mac Table clear and confirm.
The system reset the MAC Table.

Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING The operation is traffic affecting and restart the equipment.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, this operation is not available.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Press Switch default and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

245

At the equipment restart, the default configuration (Factory Default) will be automatically applied only
for the Ethernet Switch.
All the settings executed until that moment by the user (for example the configuration of the Ethernet
ports, of the VLANs and of OAM-FM) and the statistics (Lan Statistics and RMon) will be deleted.

Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Select the LLF tab.
The LLF Hysteresis parameter indicates the time interval (hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated and deactivated.
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the existing virtual LANs
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Select theVirtual Lan Config. tab.
The tab displays the existing virtual LANs.

Create a virtual Lan
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Select the Virtual Lan Config. tab.
3. Press Add.
4. Type, into the VLan ID box, the identifier (within 2 and 4094) you wish to assign to the virtual LAN.
The parameter cannot be modified later.
It is not possible to set, as ID, a value already present in the list (column VLan ID). It is instead possible
to set, as ID, the default VID of any Ethernet port (see area Default VLan ID).
5. If you wish to create more VLANs at the same time, type in the End Block box the identifier of the last
VLAN of the group (between 2 and 4094).
The value of End Block must be greater than the value of VLan ID and no VLAN with identifier within
the range End Block - VLan ID must be present in the list.
The system creates a number of VLANs (and inserts the relevant rows in the table) equal to the difference between the values of the parameters End Block and VLan ID, with identifiers in progression from
the lowest to the higher value, and automatically assigns the relevant Label using the format <Label>
<identifier>.
All the VLANs created at the same time get the same policy regarding the transit of packets through
the ports of the Ethernet switch.
6. Type, into the Label box, the name (alphanumeric string up to 20 characters) you wish to assign to the
virtual LAN.
The system automatically suggest, as name of the virtual Lan, Vlan <identifier>. This name can be
changed as you wish.
7. In the box relevant to each port (Lan, Port), select the option:

246

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan.

Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:

Of priority; the value is defined in the Default Priority box of the origin port of the packet
itself.

Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port
of the packet.

The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the input
port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan Table
is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.

Untag., to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in
output from the port.

Unmodif., to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or added to the packets in
output from the port.

The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.13).
In order to create the VLAN, the transit of the packets must be enabled at least for one port (a value
different from Disable is set).
8. Press Apply and confirm.
The Virtual Lan Config. tab displays the row relevant to the new virtual Lan.
The message VLAN ID... already in the list indicates that the set identifier corresponds to that of an
already existing VLAN. Change the value in the VLan ID box.

Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Select the Virtual Lan Config. tab.
3. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter of VLan you wish to change.
Except for the identifier (VLAN ID), all the parameters of a VLan can be modified (Label, Lan 1, Lan 2,
Lan 3, Lan 4, Port A, Port B).
The parameter setting modes are the same pointed out in par. Create a virtual Lan.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed and not communicated yet to the equipment.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see Tab.13).
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.
The changes are confirmed in Virtual Lan Config tab.
If the displayed message is:

An OAM MA and/or a MEP are bound on this VLAN. Please remove them before modifying it. To
the VLAN is associated at least a MA and/or a MEP of the OAM-FM Domain defined for the equipment. Before changing the VLAN is necessary to dismiss all the relevant MA/MEP (see OAM).

Delete a virtual Lan
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING A static VLAN cannot be deleted from the list (see Virtual LAN (info)).

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Select the Virtual Lan Config. tab.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

247

3. Select the virtual Lan you wish to delete.
The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
4. Press Remove and confirm.
The virtual Lan is removed from the list.

Verify/modify the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Select the Radio Packet Fragm. tab.
The Status parameter indicates the fragmentation status of the Ethernet packets, incoming from LANs
and sent to the Radio port, whose size is greater than the set value:

Disabled. Fragmentation disabled: all Ethernet packets keep their size unchanged.

Enabled 256 Byte. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than 256 bytes
are fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.

Enabled 512 Byte. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than 512 bytes
are fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.

3. To change the parameter, set the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
If the message Command rejected: incompatible 1588 Pass Through status is displayed, this means
that the management of 1588 Pass Through functionality (info) is enabled.
With this functionality active, the setting of parameter Status cannot be changed from Enabled 256
Byte to Enabled 512 Byte or to Disable.
To change the parameter, it is first necessary to disable the 1588 Pass Through functionality.

Verify/modify the status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Select the IEEE 1588 Pass Through tab.
Tab available only if the Ieee1588 support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
The Interface Aware parameters shows the enabling status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality (info):

Disable. Functionality disabled.

Enable Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio port of the equipment acts as Master element for the propagation of 1588 messages.

Enable Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio port of the equipment acts as Slave element
for the propagation of 1588 messages.

If the equipment is in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration with
East-West option enable, the list shows the following values:

248

Disable. Functionality disabled.

Enable B1 Master - B2 Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port (Port A) and the
port Radio 2A (Port B) of the equipment act as Master elements for the propagation of 1588
messages.

Enable B1 Slave - B2 Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port and the Radio 2A port
of the equipment act as Slave elements for the propagation of 1588 messages.

Enable B1 Master - B2 Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port of the equipment acts
as Master element, while the Radio 2A port acts as Slave element for the propagation of 1588
messages.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Enable B1 Slave - B2 Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port of the equipment acts
as Slave element, while the Radio 2A port acts as Master element for the propagation of 1588
messages.

3. To change the parameter, set the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.
If the message Command rejected: incompatible packet fragmentation status is displayed, this means
that the fragmentation of the Ethernet packets is not enabled in the modality compatible with the propagation of 1588 messages.
In order to enable the 1588 Pass Through functionality, it is first necessary to enable the fragmentation
status of the Ethernet packets with a maximum size 256 bytes (Enabled 256 Byte) (see Verify/modify
the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets).

Verify/modify the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation meaningful only if the 1588 Pass Through functionality (info) is active.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Common Parameters.
2. Select the IEEE 1588 Pass Through tab.
Tab available only if the Ieee1588 support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).
The Filter Type parameter shows the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets:

CTag. PTP based VLAN: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN with C-VID
identifier (Customer VLAN Identifier) displayed in C Vid box.

STag. PTP based VLAN: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN with S_VID
identifier (Service VLAN Identifier) displayed in S Vid box.

CTag + STag. PTP based: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN with C_VID
and S_VID identifiers, displayed respectively in C Vid and S Vid boxes.

Ethernet Type. PTP over Ethernet: the system checks the Ether Type field of the Ethernet protocol and verifies the presence of Ether Type standard for PTP.

UDP. PTP over UDP: the packet is analysed up to UDP (User Datagram Protocol) protocol and
the system verifies the presence of the standard port for PTP in the Destination Port field.

3. To change the parameter, set the wished value.
Only if you selects the value:

CTag, in the C Vid box, set the C-VID identifier of the VLAN.

STag, in the S Vid box, set the S-VID identifier of the VLAN.

CTag + STag, in the C Vid box, set the C-VID identifier and in the S Vid box, set the S-VID identifier of the VLAN.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

249

Common Parameters contextual area
The contextual area displays the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced) configuration.
Tabs

General tab. Ethernet Switch (Enhanced) configuration.
Virtual Lan Config. tab. Existing virtual LANs.
LLF tab. Hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Radio Packet Fragm. tab. Status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets.
IEEE 1588 Pass Through tab. Configuration of the 1588 Pass Through functionality.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

General tab
The tab displays the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced) configuration.
Parameters

QinQ ETH type 0x. Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field
Max Packet size (Byte). Maximum size of the accepted packet:

1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frame).

2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.

10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).

MAC Learning Vid basis. Address learning modality of MAC address in the relevant table:

Disable. The learning of MAC Address in MAC Table is never partitioned in presence
of VLAN 802.1Q registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).

Enable. The partition and the indicization on VID (VLAN Identifier) basis of MAC Addresses in MAC Table are enabled. Their learning is registered in a segment of MAC
Table whose index is the value of VID contained in the VLANs entering the Switch and
registered in VTU.

MAC Addr. Aging Time. Validity period of the MAC addresses, stored in the MAC Table.
Push-button

Show Mac Table. Display the MAC Table.
Mac Table clear. Reset the MAC Table.
Switch default. Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch.
See also

Verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field
Verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet
Verify/modify the address learning modality in MAC Table
Verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table

250

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Virtual Lan Config. tab
The table present in the tab, displays the existing virtual LANs.
Every row corresponds to a VLAN.
Parameters

VLan ID. VLAN identifier.
The VLans automatically created by the system are indicated as follows:

<identifier> Used. VLAN that use as ID, the default VLan ID of any Ethernet (see Default VLan ID area) and has no connection with the Radio ports (Port... > Disable).

<identifier> res. (static). VLan which uses, as ID, the default VLan ID of any Ethernet
port and is connected with at least one of the Radio ports (Port... > any value different
from Disable).

<identifier> res. (management). VLan reserved for the in-band supervision (see
Ethernet tab).

<identifier> res. (g8032). VLan associated to one ERP instance (see Ring Protection).

<identifier> res. (pwe3). VLan associated to PWE3 Bundles (see PWE3). If for the
PWE3 packets:

The Provider modality is active (S-VID + C-VID), the list will contain a single
VLAN named Vlan-PWE3 with ID equal to the value S-VID. In this condition,
all the Bundles are forwarded towards the same ports of the Switch.

The Provider modality is inactive (C-VID), the list will contain one single VLAN
for every PWE3 Bundle created. Every VLAN will be named Vlan-PWE3 Bundle
<progressive number in the creation of the Bundle> with ID equal to the specific C-VID.

Label. Name assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation or modification.
Parameter not available for the reserved VLan (res...) except for PWE3 VLAN’s (see parameter
Vlan ID).
Lan1. Enabling of the LAN 1 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN:

Disable. The port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to
that of the virtual Lan.

Untag. The port allows the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed
to the packets in output from the port.

Tagged. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information:

Of priority; the value is defined in the Default Priority box of the origin port of
the packet itself.

Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the
origin port of the packet.

The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID
of the input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not
satisfied, the Vlan Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.

Unmodif. The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or
added to the packets in output from the port.

Lan2. Enabling of the LAN 2 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
Lan3. Enabling of the LAN 3 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
Lan4. Enabling of the LAN 4 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
PortA. Enabling of the Radio port A to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

251

PortB. Enabling of the Radio port B to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual LAN. For the description of the values, refer to the Lan1 note.
The availability of the Radio ports (Port) depends on the equipment radio configuration (see
Tab.13).
Default VLan ID. Default VLan identifier of each Ethernet port of the equipment.
Push-button

Add. Create a virtual Lan.
Remove. Delete a virtual Lan.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to VLANs.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to VLANs and not confirmed yet.
See also

Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan
Virtual LAN (info)

LLF tab
The tab displays the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Parameters

LLF Hysteresis. Time interval (hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated and deactivated.
See also

Verify/modify the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality

Radio Packet Fragm. tab
The tab displays the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets.
Parameters

Status. fragmentation status of the Ethernet packets, incoming from LANs and sent to the Radio
port, whose size is greater than the set value:

Disabled. Fragmentation disabled: all Ethernet packets keep their size unchanged.

Enabled 256 Byte. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than
256 bytes are fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.

Enabled 512 Byte. Fragmentation enabled: all Ethernet packets with size greater than
512 bytes are fragmented into bursts whose size is limited to the specific value.

See also

Verify/modify the status of fragmentation of Ethernet packets

252

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

IEEE 1588 Pass Through tab
WARNING Tab available only if the Ieee1588 support functionality is enabled (see Equipment Feature tab).

The tab displays the configuration parameters of the 1588 Pass Through functionality.
Parameters

Interface Aware. Enabling status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality:

Disable. Functionality disabled.

Enable Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio port of the equipment acts as
Master element for the propagation of the 1588 messages.

Enable Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio port of the equipment acts as
Slave element for the propagation of the 1588 messages.

If the equipment is in 2x(1+0) Eth. Dual Pipe or 2x(1+0) Xpic Eth. Dual Pipe radio configuration
with East-West option enable, the list shows the following values:

Disable. Functionality disabled.

Enable B1 Master - B2 Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port (Port A)
and the Radio 2A port (Port B) of the equipment act as Master elements for the propagation of the 1588 messages.

Enable B1 Slave - B2 Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port and the Radio 2A port of the equipment act as Slave elements for the propagation of the 1588
messages.

Enable B1 Master - B2 Slave PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port of the
equipment acts as Master element, while the Radio 2A port acts as Slave elements
for the propagation of the 1588 messages.

Enable B1 Slave - B2 Master PPS. Functionality enabled: the Radio 1A port of the
equipment acts as Slave element, while the Radio 2A port acts as Master elements
for the propagation of the 1588 messages.

Filter Type. Criterion used to analyse 1588 packets:

CTag. PTP based VLAN: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN with
C-VID identifier (Customer VLAN Identifier) displayed in the C Vid box.

STag. PTP based VLAN: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN with
S_VID identifier (Service VLAN Identifier) displayed in the S Vid box.

CTag + STag. PTP based: the 1588 packet is identified through the dedicated VLAN
with C_VID and S_VID identifiers displayed respectively in C Vid and S Vid boxes.

Ethernet Type. PTP over Ethernet: the system checks the Ether Type field of the
Ethernet protocol and verifies the presence of the standard Ether Type for PTP.

UDP. PTP over UDP: the system analyses the packet up to UDP (User Datagram Protocol) protocol and checks the presence of the standard port for PTP in the Destination
Port field.

C Vid. C-VID identifier.
Parameter available only if the CTag or CTag + STag value is set for the Filter Type parameter.
S Vid. S-VID identifier.
Parameter available only if the STag or CTag + STag value is set for the Filter Type parameter.
See also

Verify/modify the status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality
Verify/modify the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets
1588 Pass Through functionality (info)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

253

Virtual LAN (info)
The word VLAN (Virtual LAN) indicates a set of technologies which allow subdividing a network of equipment (Switch) into more local networks, not in communication from the logical point of view, but sharing
the same physical infrastructure.
Every VLAN is identified by one number, called VLan ID.
ALCplus2e

In ALCplus2e equipment, it is necessary to define in the VLAN Table the VLANs you wish are
managed by the Ethernet Switch of the equipment (see Create a virtual Lan).
As rule, before creating a VLAN, it is suggested to execute the following procedures for the
Ethernet ports interested by the VLAN itself:

To enable the Ethernet ports (see Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN/Verify/
modify the enabling status of the Radio port).

To enable the transit of the packets from the ports (Port Based VLAN) (see Verify/modify
the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN/Verify/modify the ports
through which the messages in input from the Radio port).

These operations can be executed even after having created a VLAN, but are necessary for the
correct operation of the VLAN itself.
Once the VLAN has been created, the user can modify (except for VLan ID) and delete it (see
Modify the configuration of a virtual Lan/Delete a virtual Lan).
Reserved VLAN

The VLAN Table, besides the VLans defined by the user, displays even the VLans automatically
created by the system and reserved:

Static VLANs, pointed out by the label res. (static) in the VLAN Table.
If one of the following cases occurs:

A LAN and an Radio port are configured to allow the transit of the packets (Port
Based VLAN).

These ports are active.

The Radio port is in Fallback mode.

The LAN is in Fallback or Secure mode.

The system automatically creates, in the VLAN Table, a static VLAN having the Default
VLan ID of the LAN as VLan ID.
If more LANs are enabled to the transit of packets from the Radio port, more static VLANs
will be created, one per each LAN, having the relevant default VLan ID as VLan ID.
The static VLANs cannot be deleted by the user. They are automatically deleted when any
of the conditions reported above fails.
The static VLAN can be modified by the user, except for VLan ID. Moreover, the transit
of the packet through a port of the VLAN cannot be disabled (setting of Disable value).

VLANs reserved to in-band supervision, indicated by the name res. (management) in
VLAN Table.
The system automatically creates, in the VLAN Table, the management VLAN when the
in-band supervision is activated (see Ethernet tab).
The management VLAN cannot be removed nor modified by the user. It is automatically
deleted when the in-band supervision is deactivated.

VLANs reserved to function G.8032, indicated by the name res. (g8032) in VLAN Table.
The system automatically creates, in the VLAN Table, one G.8032 VLAN when the Ring
Protection mode is enabled for one ERP instance (see Ring Protection).
The VLAN G.8032 cannot be removed or changed by the user. It is automatically removed when the Ring Protection modality is deactivated.

VLANs reserved to function PWE3, indicated by the name res. (pwe3) in VLAN Table.
The system automatically creates, in the VLAN Table, one PWE3 VLAN when the PWE3
Bundle is created (see PWE3).
The VLAN PWE3 cannot be removed or changed by the user. It is automatically removed
when the PWE3 Bundle is deleted or when the PWE3 function is deactivated (see Configurator).

254

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

VLAN Used

VLAN’s defined by the user in the VLAN Table with identifier different from Default VLAN ID of
the port.
These VLans, as a normal VLAN, can be modified or deleted by the user.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

255

1588 Pass Through functionality (info)
The synchronization protocol PTP (Precision Time Protocol) defined in standard IEEE 1588 is a Master/Slave
protocol based on the exchange of a series of packets (called 1588 packets) between one Master clock and
more Slave clocks with the aim to allow the synchronization of the clocks of the equipment within the network.
Typically, a clock exists within the network, called GrandMaster (GM), which transmits the synchronism to
the other clocks, called Slave (S), initially asynchronous with respect to all the other network clocks.
There are other devices within the network which are not the real addresses of the synchronisation process,
but which interpose between GM and S: one of these is the Transparent Clock (TC)
A Transparent Clock device adds, to the 1588 packets in transit, the information of correction of the Time
Stamp which the Slave will receive at the end of the chain of passage through the different TCs.
The 1588 Pass Through functionality is a simplified and proprietary implementation of the PTP protocol
which allows defining an ALCplus2e radio link as Transparent Clock device.
In fact, in an ALCplus2e link where the 1588 Pass Through functionality is active, the 1588 packet is not
processed but simply identified and treated in privileged way, in such a way to ensure a preset and constant
delay in passing through this link for this packet.
This involves that the possible correction made by the other TC devices in the network is always the same.
To implement this function, it is necessary:

To enable the 1588 Pass Through functionality for the equipment of the link (see Verify/modify
the status of the 1588 Pass Through functionality).
When equipment is enabled, it is even defined if the Radio port (Port A) of this equipment (only
within the ALCplus2e link) acts as Master element or Slave element.
With Master element, we mean the element which forwards the synchronization information
(synchronism pulse - PPS).
With Slave element, we mean the element which receives the synchronization information.
The ALCplus2e equipment connected in radio link MUST be configured one as Master and the
other as Slave. A wrong configuration (for example, both of them are defined as Master) generates the alarm IEEE 1588 PTP Configuration Mismatch.

To define the criterion used to analyse the 1588 packets transiting through the ALCplus2e radio
link (see Verify/modify the criterion used to analyse 1588 packets).
The available criteria are:

256

PTP over UDP: the system analyses the packet up to UDP (User Datagram Protocol) protocol and checks the presence of the standard port for PTP (319 and 320) in the Destination Port field.

PTP over Ethernet: the system checks the Ether Type field of the Ethernet protocol in the
packet and checks the presence of standard Ether Type for PTP (0x88F7).

PTP based VLAN: the PTP packet is identified by a VLAN dedicated and defined by the
user. The user can set, for the control, the C-TAG or S-TAG identifier or the pair CTAG+S-TAG.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Priority towards LAN ports
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The Priority towards LAN ports command manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p,
PTOS/DSCP) of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and LAN output queues.
Operations

Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its 802.1p Tag
Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field
IF

THE EQUIPMENT IS AN

ETHERNET

ELEMENT OF THE NODE

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs
to the output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LANs
which, in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LANs
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the
LANs
GUI

Priority towards LAN ports contextual area

Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its 802.1p Tag
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the LANs of the Ethernet Switch.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards LAN ports.
The 802.1p Priority table indicates the output queue of the LANs (Internal Priority (Queue) which a
packet, in input to any Ethernet port, is assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag (802.1p Priority) (see Native 802.1p tab).
2. To change the parameter, select the option corresponding to the wished combination output queue Tag 802.1p.
For the same value of Tag 802.1p, it is possible to select only one queue at a time.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The setting of the parameters is common to all the LANs of the Ethernet Switch.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the level 3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/DSCP) is not
managed when the transit of the packets takes place through the nodal interconnection.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards LAN ports.
2. Select the PTOS/DSCP Config. tab.
The tab displays the correspondence between the priority PTOS/DSCP of the packets, in input to any
Ethernet port, and the LAN output queues (Internal Priority (Queue).
3. To modify the output queue which a PTOS/DSCP value is associated to, select in the Filter box, the IP
format which the DSCP field refers to.
4. Select the box relevant to the output queue you wish to change (column Internal Priority (Queue) and
select the wished option.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

257

5. Repeat the previous step to change the output queue of all the wished PTOS/DSCP value.
6. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs to the
output queue
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards LAN ports.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input
to the LANs, to the output:

Disable. The priority management is disabled.

802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output queue.

IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3) for the choice of the output
queue.

802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of
TOS for the choice of the output queue.

IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p priority
for the choice of the output queue.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LANs which,
in output, the Tag is added to
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards LAN ports.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Default Priority parameter indicates the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input
from the LANs which, in output, the Tag is added to (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LANs
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards LAN ports.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The tab, if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active, displays a table pointing out the mapping of
priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value).

258

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

3. To change a value, select in the table the option corresponding to the wished combination: values of
Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch (802-1p INPUT Priority) - value of Tag 802.1p in output from the
Switch (802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping).
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards LAN ports.
2. Select the Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab.
The Egress Priority Policy parameter indicates the emptying algorithm of the output queues of the
LANs:

8421 WRR, a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the
queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2
messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from
the queue with highest priority.

Strict Priority, the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.

Strict 3, the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other
queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.

Strict 3 and 2, the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues
(1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

259

Priority towards LAN ports contextual area
WARNING Priority Management and Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab are available only if the equipment is an

Ethernet element of a node.
The contextual area displays the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, PTOS/DSCP) of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and LAN output queues.
Tabs

Native 802.1p tab. Output queue of the LANs which a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, is
assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag.
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab. Correspondence between the priority PTOS/DSCP of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and the LAN output queues.
Priority Management tab. Configuration of the LANs relevant to priority management.
Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab. Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
of the LANs.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Native 802.1p tab
The tab displays the output queue of the LANs which a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, is assigned
to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag.
Parameters

802.1p Priority. The table indicates the output queue of the LANs which a packet, in input to
any Ethernet port, is assigned to, depending on its 802.1p priority Tag:

802.1p Priority. Each column correspond to a Tag 802.1p value of the packet in input
to a port: 0 ÷ 7.

Internal Priority (Queue). Each row correspond to a output queue of the LANs:

0. Queue with 0 priority (low priority).

1. Queue with 1 priority.

2. Queue with 2 priority.

3. Queue with 3 priority (high priority).

The active option indicates the combination output queue - Tag 802.1p.
The table is common to all the LANs of the Ethernet Switch.
See also

Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its 802.1p Tag

PTOS/DSCP Config. tab
The tab displays the correspondence between the priority PTOS/DSCP of the packets, in input to any Ethernet port, and the LAN output queues.
Parameters

List Filter. Filter the values of the table:

260

View All. The table displays all the values.

View Queue 0. The table displays only the values associated to the 0 output queue.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

View Queue 1. The table displays only the values associated to the 1 output queue.

View Queue 2. The table displays only the values associated to the 2 output queue.

View Queue 3. The table displays only the values associated to the 3 output queue.

Filter. Set the IP format which the DSCP field refers to:

IP v4 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the
IPv4 format.

IP v6 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the
IPv6 format.

Table. Every row of the table corresponds to a possible value for the relevant PTOS/DSCP field:

Value. The value expressed in binary digits.

Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the options see RFC
2474, 2597 and 2598 specifications.

Internal Priority (Queue). Queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose
PTOS/DSCP has the value displayed in the row, is assigned to is displayed:

3. Queue with 3 priority (high priority).

2. Queue with 2 priority.

1. Queue with 1 priority.

0. Queue with 0 priority (low priority).

The table is common to all the LANs of the Ethernet Switch.
See also

Verify/assign the output queue (LANs) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field

Priority Management tab
WARNING Tab available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The tab displays configuration parameters of the LANs relevant to the priority management.
Parameters

Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the LANs port,
to the output:

Disable. The priority management is disabled.

802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the
output queue.

IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3) for the choice of the
output queue.

802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the
value of TOS for the choice of the output queue.

IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p
priority for the choice of the output queue.

Default Priority. Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LANs port
which, in output, the Tag is added to:

0. Lowest priority

7. Highest priority.

Table. Mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input
to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value):

802-1p INPUT Priority. Each row correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in output from the Switch: 7 ÷ 0.

802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping. Each column correspond to Tag 802.1p value of
the packet in output from the Switch.

The active option indicates the combination: Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch - Tag 802.1p in
output from the Switch.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

261

Table available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active (see parameter Priority Selection).
See also

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs to the
output queue
Verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the LANs which,
in output, the Tag is added to
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LANs

Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab
WARNING Tab available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The tab displays the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs.
Parameters

Egress Priority Policy. Emptying algorithm:

8421 WRR. A part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a
part of the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from the queue with highest priority.

Strict Priority. The queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all
the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.

Strict 3. The high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.

Strict 3 and 2. The high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The
other queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.

See also

Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LANs

262

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Priority towards Radio ports
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The Priority towards Radio ports command manages the correspondence between the priority (802.1p,
MPLS, PTOS/DSCP) of the packets, in input from LANs, and the output queues of the Radio ports of Ethernet Switch (Radio port).
Operations

Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native 802.1p Tag
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native MPLS priority
Tag
Verify/modify the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of the packets if
input from LANs and in output from Radio ports
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field
IF

THE EQUIPMENT IS AN

ETHERNET

ELEMENT OF A NODE

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs
to the output queue of the Radio ports
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority
GUI

Priority towards Radio ports contextual area

Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native 802.1p Tag
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards Radio ports.
Table 802.1p Priority indicates the correspondence between native 802.1p priority (802.1p Priority),
possible present in packets in input from LANs, and the output queues of Radio ports (Internal Priority
Queue) (see Native 802.1p/MPLS tab).
2. To change the parameter, select the option corresponding to the wished combination Tag 802.1p - output queue.
For the same value of Tag 802.1p, it is possible to select only one queue at a time.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native MPLS priority
Tag
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards Radio ports.
Table MPLS Priority indicates the correspondence between native MPLS priority (MPLS Priority), possible
present in packets in input from LANs, and the output queues of Radio ports (Internal Priority Queue)
(see Native 802.1p/MPLS tab).
2. To change the parameter, select the option corresponding to the wished combination Tag MPLS - output
queue.
For the same value of Tag MPLS, it is possible to select only one queue at a time.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

263

Verify/modify the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of the packets if
input from LANs and in output from Radio ports
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the LANs of the Ethernet Switch

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards Radio ports.
2. Select the MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab.
The tab displays the correspondence between MPLS priority (Native MLPS) and 802.1p priority (802.1p
Priority) of packets in input from LANs and in output from Radio ports.
3. To re-map a MPLS priority, select the option corresponding to wished combination Tag MPLS - Tag
802.1p.
For a single value of Tag MPLS, only one value at a time of Tag 802.1p can be selected.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The setting of the parameter is common to all the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards Radio ports.
2. Select the PTOS/DSCP Config. tab.
The tab displays the correspondence between PTOS/DSCP priority of the packets, in input to any Ethernet ports, and the output queue of Radio ports (Internal Priority (Queue).
3. To modify the output queue, which a PTOS/DSCP value is associated to, select in the Filter box, the IP
format which the DSCP field refers to.
4. Select the box relevant to the output queue you wish to change (column Internal Priority (Queue) and
select the wished option.
5. Repeat the previous step to change the output queue of all the wished PTOS/DSCP value.
6. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs to the
output queue of the Radio ports
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards Radio ports.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Internal Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets,
in input to the LANs, to the output of the Radio ports.

264

Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the default value set by the user.

Native 802.1p (Outer Tag). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the priority value present in the outer Tag (C-VID or S-VID, depending on the port
setting).

Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.

Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the
priority value present in native MPLS field.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio
port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will be rewritten
in the field 802.1p of C-VID.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Priority towards Radio ports.
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The parameter Default Priority indicates the value used to define the output queue of the Radio port
when the selected priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Internal Priority Selection) and value
used as priority 802.1p added to the untagged packets entering in the considered LAN and they will
exit tagged from the corresponding remote LAN (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

265

Priority towards Radio ports contextual area
WARNING Priority Management tab is available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The contextual area displays the correspondence between the priority (802.1p, MPLS, PTOS/DSCP) of the
packets, in input from LANs, and the output queues of the Radio ports of Ethernet Switch (Radio port).
Tabs

Native 802.1p/MPLS tab. Correspondence between native 802.1p priority and/or MPLS, possible
present in packets in input from LANs, and the output queues of the Radio ports of the Ethernet
Switch.
MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab. Correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of packets in input from LANs and in output from Radio ports.
PTOS/DSCP Config. tab. Correspondence between PTOS/DSCP priority of the packets, in input
to any Ethernet ports, and the output queue of Radio ports.
Priority Management tab. Configuration of the LANs relevant to priority management.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Native 802.1p/MPLS tab
The tab displays the correspondence between native 802.1p and/or MPLS priority and the output queues
of Radio ports.
Parameters

802.1p Priority. The table indicates the correspondence between native 802.1p priority, possible present in packets in input from LANs, and the output queues of Radio ports:

802.1p Priority. Each column correspond to a Tag 802.1p value: 0 ÷ 7.

Internal Priority (Queue). Each row correspond to a output queue of the Radio ports:

7. Queue with 7 priority (high priority).

6. Queue with 6 priority.

5. Queue with 5 priority.

4. Queue with 4 priority.

3. Queue with 3 priority.

2. Queue with 2 priority.

1. Queue with 1 priority.

0. Queue with 0 priority (low priority).

The active option indicates the combination Tag 802.1p - output queue.
The table is common to all the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.
MPLS Priority. The table indicates the correspondence between native MPLS priority, possible
present in packets in input from LANs, and the output queues of Radio ports.

266

MPLS Priority. Each column correspond to a Tag MPLS value: 0 ÷ 7.

Internal Priority (Queue). Each row correspond to a output queue of the Radio ports:

7. Queue with 7 priority (high priority).

6. Queue with 6 priority.

5. Queue with 5 priority.

4. Queue with 4 priority.

3. Queue with 3 priority.

2. Queue with 2 priority.

1. Queue with 1 priority.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

0. Queue with 0 priority (low priority).

The active option indicates the combination Tag MPLS - output queue.
The table is common to all the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.
See also

Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native 802.1p Tag
Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its native MPLS priority
Tag

MPLS to 802.1p Rewrite tab
The tab indicates the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of packets in input from
LANs and in output from Radio ports.
Parameters

Native MPLS. The columns point out the value of MPLS priority (Native MLPS); while the rows
point out value of 802.1p priority (802.1p Priority).
The active option indicates which 802.1p priority every single native MPLS priority is re-mapped
to.
Correspondence can be 1 to 1, that is same priority in two fields, or arbitrary according to the
function chosen by the user. For instance, the priority MPLS 7 can be re-mapped as priority 0 in
field 802.1p.
The table is common to all the LANs of the Ethernet Switch.
See also

Verify/modify the correspondence between MPLS priority and 802.1p priority of the packets if
input from LANs and in output from Radio ports

PTOS/DSCP Config. tab
The tab displays the correspondence between PTOS/DSCP priority of the packets, in input to any Ethernet
ports, and the output queue of Radio ports.
Parameters

List Filter. Filter the values of the table:

View All. The table displays all the values.

View Queue 0. The table displays only the values associated to the 0 output queue.

View Queue 1. The table displays only the values associated to the 1 output queue.

View Queue 2. The table displays only the values associated to the 2 output queue.

View Queue 3. The table displays only the values associated to the 3 output queue.

View Queue 4. The table displays only the values associated to the 4 output queue.

View Queue 5. The table displays only the values associated to the 5 output queue.

View Queue 6. The table displays only the values associated to the 6 output queue.

View Queue 7. The table displays only the values associated to the 7 output queue.

Filter. Set the IP format which the DSCP field refers to:

IP v4 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the
IPv4 format.

IP v6 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the
IPv6 format.

Table. Every row of the table corresponds to a possible value for the relevant PTOS/DSCP field:

Value. The value expressed in binary digits.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

267

Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the options see RFC
2474, 2597 and 2598 specifications.

Internal Priority (Queue). Queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose
PTOS/DSCP has the value displayed in the row, is assigned to is displayed:

7. Queue with 7 priority (high priority).

6. Queue with 6 priority.

5. Queue with 5 priority.

4. Queue with 4 priority.

3. Queue with 3 priority.

2. Queue with 2 priority.

1. Queue with 1 priority.

0. Queue with 0 priority (low priority).

The table is common to all the Radio ports of the Ethernet Switch.
See also

Verify/assign the output queue (Radio ports) to a packet according to its PTOS/DSCP field

Priority Management tab
WARNING Tab available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The tab displays configuration parameters of the LANs relevant to the priority management.
Parameters

Internal Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the
LANs, to the output of the Radio Ports:

Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according
to the default value set by the user.

Native 802.1p (Outer Tag). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio
port according to the priority value present in the outer Tag (C-VID or S-VID, depending on the port setting).

Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.

Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according
to the priority value present in native MPLS field.

802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value
will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.

Default Priority. Value used to define the output queue of the Radio port when the selected
priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Internal Priority Selection) and value used as priority 802.1p added to the untagged packets entering in the considered LAN and they will exit
tagged from the corresponding remote LAN:

0. Lowest priority

7. Highest priority.

The table on the tab is not meaningful in this context.
See also

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LANs to the
output queue of the Radio ports
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority

268

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Compression
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Command available only if:

The compression function is supported by equipment hardware.

The Header compression inhibit functionality is disabled (see Equipment Feature tab).

The Compression command manages the compression of the level-2 and level-3 headers present into an
Ethernet packet, in output from the Switch, before the traffic is inserted in the radio frame.
Operations

Verify/modify the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets in input from LANs
GUI

Compression contextual area

Verify/modify the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets in input from LANs
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the compression function is supported by equipment hardware.

For equipment whose management is executed in band (see Ethernet tab - In Band Management), in order
to preserve the link with the remote equipment, the change of the configuration of the compressor must
be executed following the steps listed here below:
1. Disable the compression function on the remote terminal.
2. Disable the compression function on the local terminal.
3. Modify the configuration and enable the compression function on the remote terminal.
4. Modify the configuration and enable the compression function on the local terminal.
1. Select Base Band > Ethernet Switch (Enh.) > Compression.
The Compression contextual area displays the possible headers which could be compressed if present
in the incoming traffic.
2. To modify the compression status of one or more fields, activate or deactivate the relevant box.
When necessary, set the configuration parameters of a field as pointed out in the previous step.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

269

Compression contextual area
The contextual area displays the fields of Ethernet packet which could be compressed if present in the incoming traffic.
Parameters

Ethernet. Compression of header of Ethernet packet (header).
Active box (

) indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled.

When compression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:

Bytes Header. Number of bytes in the header which are compressed depending on the settings made for the options below. Maximum number of byte: 124. Parameter is read-only.

Bytes Context+Dynamic. Number of bytes used by the co/decompression process and calculated by a proprietary algorithm. These bytes can be used depending on the settings made
for the options below. Maximum number of byte: 118. Parameter is read-only.

Number of Labels and Tags. Number of MPLS label + Tag Ethernet enabled. Maximum number of label MPLS + Tag Ethernet: 8. Parameter is read-only.

C_TAG (802.1Q). Compression of field 802.1Q (priority and identifier of VLAN). Active box
indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When
compression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:

Q-in-Q (802.1ad). Compression of field S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ. Active box indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When
compression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:

Max Number of S-TAG. Maximum number of inserted Provider Tags which can
be compressed. The parameter can be set to values 1 or 2.

MPLS. Compression of MPLS priority field. Active box indicates that compression is enabled;
inactive box means compression disabled. When compression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:

Max Number of Labels. Maximum number of inserted MPLS Labels which can be compressed.

Control Word (RFC4385). Compression of field Control Word. Active box indicates that
compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled.

EoMPLS (Ethernet over MPLS). Compression of EoMPLS protocol. Active box indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When
compression is active, the following parameters are present in the area below:

C_TAG (802.1Q). Compression of field 802.1Q (priority and identifier of VLAN)
for EoMPLS. Active box indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means
compression disabled. When compression is active, the following parameters are
present in the area below:

Q-in-Q (802.1ad). Compression of field S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ for EoMPLS. Active box indicates that compression is enabled; inactive box means
compression disabled. When compression is active, the following parameters
are present in the area below:

Max Number of S-TAG. Maximum number of inserted Provider Tags which
can be compressed for EoMPLS. The parameter can be set to values 1 or 2.

It is suggested to activate the EoMPLS compression only if the MPLS traffic on the
radio equipment is Ethernet over MPLS.

IP+. Compression of level-3 header (if present). Active box indicates that compression is
enabled; inactive box means compression disabled. When compression is active, the area
below indicates the format of the traffic in input to the Switch:

IPv4. Format IPv4.

IPv4 or IPv6. Format IPv4 or IPv6.

Tunneling IPv4 - IPv4/IPv6. Compression of IP field possibly inserted in an IP frame.
In Tunneling mode the format is IPv4 + UDP + GTP-U + IPv4/IPv6 + UDP + RTP.

The format currently in use is pointed out by the active option. The parameter can be modified.
If the option IPv4 or IPv4 or IPv6 is active, even the following parameter is displayed:

270

UDP. Compression of field UDP (if present). If the active option is:

Disable. Compression inactive.

Enable. Compression of field UDP (if present) active.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Enable+RTP. Compression of fields UDP and RTP (if present) active.

The parameter can be modified.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
See also

Verify/modify the compression of the headers of Ethernet packets in input from LANs

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

271

LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.)
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System

The LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) and LAN 4 (Enh.) commands manage the LANs of the
Ethernet Switch (Enhanced).
On the choice of one of the commands, the LAN <selected Lan number> (Enh.) contextual area opens,
where it is possible to manage the specific LAN.
Operations

STATUS

AND COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS

Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN
Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is
inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN
Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN
Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line
synchronism for the LAN
Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN
PORT INGRESS RATE LIMITER (PIRL)
Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN
Create a PIRL instance for the LAN
Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN
Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN
INPUT FILTER POLICING
Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the LAN
PRIORITY

PARAMETERS

Verify the current management modality of protocol 802.1Q
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN
to the output queue of the Radio ports
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN
Verify/modify the Service Tag List table
Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the
LAN
VIRTUAL LAN

PARAMETERS

Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN
Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value
Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the
LAN
Verify/modify the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge)
Verify/modify the management of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN in
selective mode
Verify/modify the management of Tag of the packets (in origin without Tag) in input from
the LAN
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to
the Radio, with a different VID
Verify/modify the value of S-VID added to the packets in input to the LAN (independently
from the presence of the Tag)

272

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Verify the list of VIDs registered in VLAN Table Unit and associated to the LAN
Verify/modify the management of the LAN in Provider mode
Verify/modify the transit of Untagged packets via LAN (802.1q - Secure)
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN
SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL

PARAMETERS

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP)
ETHERNET LINE PROTECTION (ELP)

PARAMETERS

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection
Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP)
TRUNKING

MODE PARAMETERS

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN
LLF

PARAMETERS

Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
LOOP
Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN
LASER

PARAMETERS

Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN)
Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN)
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)
Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)
Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN)
GUI

LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.) contextual area
See also

PIRL function (info)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)
Trunking mode (info)
Bidirectional LLF (info)

Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
The Rate Control parameter indicates the enabling status of the port:

Disable. The LAN is not enabled to the use.

Full Rate. The LAN is enabled to the use of the maximum bit rate relevant to the port.

Kb/Mb. The LAN is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

273

Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of the LAN is enabled
(see Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
The Cable Crossover parameter indicates the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:

MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).

MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).

Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation
is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
The Speed/Duplex parameter indicates the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN.
For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are available:

Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and
the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Auto FD up to 10M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of speed of 10Mbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.

Auto FD up to 100M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of speed of 100Mbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.

Auto FD up to 1G. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission type are
negotiated with a maximum of speed of 1Gbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.

For LAN 3 and LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:

Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the LAN is 1GMbit/s.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the flow control must be DISABLED. If it was
enabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to disable the parameter. If
already disabled, the setting cannot be changed.

274

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
The Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure Half Dplx parameter indicates the activation status of the flow
control of the LAN:

Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.

Enable. The flow control is forced active.

Auto. The flow control is auto-negotiated and, if the remote equipment can manage the flow
control, it is automatically activated on the local equipment.

In Full-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the 802.3x normative. In Half-Duplex
modality, the flow control is regulated according to the Back Pressure technique.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this func-

tion.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses must be
ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable
the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
The MAC Learning parameter indicates the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):

Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.

Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table
takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a single MAC Table.

Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment of MAC Table indicized
by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic is income from.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Parameter meaningful only if the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the MAC Table is
enabled (Mac Learning).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
The Forwarding Rule parameter indicates the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN:

Dest. Addr. Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic on VLAN basis (Port Based VLAN) and with
destination MAC address present in MAC Table.

Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic only on VLAN basis without checking the presence of destination MAC in MAC Table.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

275

Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
The parameter Egress Shaping indicates the maximum Throughput of data in output from LAN port:

Disable. No maximum throughput is set for LAN port.

Full Rate. The value of maximum bit rate of the port is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.

...Kb/...Mb. The specific value is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.

The throughput is the real index of utilization of the link capacity, that is the amount of data transmitted
in the unit of time.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
Available values changes depending on the port transmission speed (see parameter Speed/Duplex).
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the auto negotiation is enabled (Speed/Duplex and/or Flow Control
box - Auto option).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Press Restart Autonegotiation and confirm.

Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
and the 1000Base-T configuration is active (see Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation
and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the
LAN).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
The Master/Slave parameter indicates the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) of the LAN:

Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.

Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the
line synchronism for the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
and the 1000Base-T configuration is active (see Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation
and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the
LAN).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).

276

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The M/S Autoneg. parameter indicates the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles
of the line synchronism of the LAN:

Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is automatic.

Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
forced. In this case, the role defined in the Master/Slave box is used.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
The Interface Type parameter indicates the interface type of the LAN:

Electrical. The LAN is configured with electrical interface.

Optical. The LAN is configured with optical interface.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
The tab displays the existing PIRL instance for the specific LAN.

Create a PIRL instance for the LAN
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING For each LAN, it is possible to create a maximum of 3 PIRL instance.

In order to use a PIRL instance for the traffic limitation, after its creation, it must be enabled (see Enable/
disable a PIRL instance of the LAN).
Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
3. Press Add.
4. Set, in the Rate box, the band threshold over which the traffic is limited.
The type of traffic to limit will be set in the next steps.
5. In the Broadcast box, select the option:

Enable. The transit of the Broadcast packets in input from the port is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Broadcast packets is not limited.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

277

6. In the Unknow Multicast box, select the option:

Enable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets (Multicast packets with destination MAC
addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets is not limited.

7. In the Unknow Unicast box, select the option:

Enable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets (Unicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets is not limited.

8. In the Unicast box, select the option:

Enable. The transit of the Unicast packets in input from the port is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Unicast packets is not limited.

9. In the ARP box, select the option:

Enable. The transit of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) packets in input from the port is
limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the ARP packets is not limited.

10.Press Apply and confirm.
The Rate Limiter tab displays the row relevant to the new PIRL instance.

Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
3. To enable the use of an instance, select the specific Status box and then the Active option: the Switch
will use the instance as rule for the traffic limitation.
To disable the use of an instance, select the specific Status box and then the Not Active option: the
Switch will not use the instance as rule for the traffic limitation.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
3. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter of PIRL instance you wish to change.
All the parameters of an instance can be modified.
The parameter setting modes are the same pointed out in par. Create a PIRL instance for the LAN.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed and not communicated yet to the equipment.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.
The changes are confirmed in Rate Limiter tab.

278

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Rate Limiter tab.
3. Select the PIRL instance you wish to delete.
The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
4. Press Remove and confirm.
The PIRL instance is removed from the list.

Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the
LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Input Filter Policing tab.
The Mode parameter shows the modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN and forwarded to
Radio port:

Disable. Option disabled: the traffic in input is not limited according to specific criteria.

UNI Port based. Option enabled: all the traffic in input is limited on port basis.

EVC C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with C-VID
(Customer VLAN Identifier) defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.

COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the
packets with C-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.

EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with
S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) and C-VID values defined by the user and pointed out in the
table below.

COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only
for the packets with S-VID and C-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed out in
the table below.

EVC S_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with S-VID
values defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.

COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the
packets with S-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.

COS Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets
with priority defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.

The Not Registered Traffic Default Color parameter shows the colour preset for the packets not associated to any traffic profile defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile):

Green (MEF Compliant). The packets are treated as belonging to the green profile.

Red. The packets are discarded.

The table present in the tab will point out, according to the set modality, the criteria for the traffic limitation defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile).
Every row of the table corresponds to one criterion. The configuration parameters (pointed out in the
table columns) of the criterion change depending on the setting of the parameter Mode. If the active
value is:

UNI Port Based the table contains the columns:

CIR (Committed Information Rate). Transmission rate (expressed in Mbit/s) ensured in
normal operating condition of the network (throughput).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

279

EIR (Extended Information Rate). Band exceeding that set by CIR.

CBS. (Committed Burst Size). Traffic burst which the network ensures to store.

EBS (Excessive Burst Size). Quantity of data, besides CBS, the network can store.

CF (Coupling Flag). Modality to control the traffic declared Yellow.

Enabled. The average value, in the long period, of the traffic declared Yellow is
limited by the value CIR+EIR as function of the traffic declared Green.

Disabled. The average value, in the long period, of the traffic declared Yellow is
limited by the value EIR.

In both cases, the Burst Size of the traffic declared Yellow is limited by the value if EBS.

EVC C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:

C_Vid. Identifier C-VID of the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID set by the user, and not on the whole
traffic incoming from LAN.

COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

C_Vid. Identifier C-VID of the packet in input.

Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and maximum) of
the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID and 802.1p priority set by the user,
and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.

EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:

S_Vid. Identifier S-VID of the packet in input.

C_Vid. Identifier C-VID of the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS e CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID set by the user, and not
on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.

COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

S_Vid. Identifier S-VID of the packet in input.

C_Vid. Identifier C-VID of the packet in input.

Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and maximum) of
the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID and with 802.1p priority
set by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.

EVC S_Vid Based the table contains the columns:

S_Vid. Identifier S-VID of the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier S-VID set by the user, and not on the whole
traffic incoming from LAN.

COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

S_Vid. Identifier S-VID of the packet in input.

Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and maximum) of
the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with identifier S-VID and 802.1p priority set by the user,
and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.

COS Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and maximum) of
the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port
Based, but only for the traffic with priority set by the user, and not on the whole traffic
incoming from LAN.

3. To modify the Mode parameter select the wished option, press Apply and confirm.
The values EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based and COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based, EVC S_Vid Based
and COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based can be set only if, in the tab 802.1Q Management, the parameter 802.1q Setting is set to the value Secure and the parameter Provider is active.

280

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The passage from modality UNI Port based, EVC C_Vid Based, COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based or
COS Internal Priority Based to modality EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based or COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority
Based, EVC S_Vid Based or COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based and vice versa deletes all the elements
present in the table.
The passage from any modality to the value Disable deletes all the items present in the table and disable it. Moreover, the value Green (MEF Compliant) is automatically forced for the parameter Not Registered Traffic Default Color.
4. To modify the Not Registered Traffic Default Color parameter select the wished option, press Apply and
confirm.
If the value Red is selected, a message warns that the packets without an associated band profile will
be discarded.
The parameter is not available if the Disable value is set for the Mode parameter.
5. To add a criterion to the list:
a. Press Add.
b. Set all the parameters present in the window.
Meaning and values of the parameters are pointed out in step 2.
c. Press Apply and confirm.
If, for the parameter Mode, the active value is:

Disable. No element can be added to the table.

UNI Port based. Only one element can be added to the table.

EVC C_Vid Based, COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based, EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based, COS S_Vid/
C_Vid + Internal Priority Based, EVC S_Vid Based, COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based, COS
Internal Priority Based. More elements can be added to the table.

6. To modify a criterion of the list:
a. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter you wish to change and set the new value.
Meaning and values of the parameters are pointed out in step 2.
Pressing Revert changes cancels the change executed.
b. Press Apply changes and confirm.
If, for the parameter Mode, the active value is:

Disable. No element in the table is available to be modified.

UNI Port based. All the parameters can be modified.

EVC C_Vid Based. All the parameters can be modified, except C_Vid.

COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. All the parameters can be modified, except C_Vid and Internal Priority.

EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based. All the parameters can be modified, except S_Vid and C_Vid.

COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. All the parameters can be modified, except S_Vid,
C_Vid and Internal Priority.

EVC S_Vid Based. All the parameters can be modified, except S_Vid.

COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based. All the parameters can be modified, except S_Vid and Internal Priority.

COS Internal Priority Based. All the parameters can be modified, except Internal Priority.

7. To delete a criterion from the list:
a. Select the criterion you wish to delete.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
b. Press Remove and confirm.

Verify the current management modality of protocol 802.1Q
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

281

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The parameter Current 802.1Q Setting indicates the current status of the management modality of protocol 802.1Q:

Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be sent
only to the ports pointed out in the Port Based VLAN area.

Fallback. The traffic in input from the port is subjected both to port based routing (Port Based
VLAN) and to VLAN Table Unit (VTU) based routing.

Secure (C_vid Filtering). The traffic in input from the port is subjected only to the routing defined
by VTU.

Secure (Service Provider Port). The traffic in input from the port can be only of type Provider
and will be subjected only to the routing defined by VTU.

Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
LAN to the output queue of the Radio ports
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The Internal Priority Selection parameter indicates the priority criterion used to associated the packets,
in input to the LAN, to the output of the Radio ports.
If the parameter Current 802.1Q Setting has value:

282

Disabled the following options are present:

Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the default value set by the user.

Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.

Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the priority value present in native MPLS field.

Fallback or Secure (C_vid Filtering) the following options are present:

Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the default value set by the user.

Native 802.1p (C_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the value of native 802.1p priority.

Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.

Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the priority value present in native MPLS field.

802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.

Secure (Service Provider Port) the following options are present:

Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the default value set by the user.

Native 802.1p (S_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the value of native 802.1p priority.

Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.

Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to
the priority value present in native MPLS field.

802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

802.1p (S_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The parameter Default Internal Priority indicates the value used to define the output queue of the Radio
port when the selected priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Internal Priority Selection) and
value used as priority 802.1p added to the untagged packets entering in the considered LAN and they
will exit tagged from the corresponding remote LAN (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

Operation available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Priority Management tab.
The tab, if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active, displays a table pointing out the mapping of
priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value).
3. To change a value, select in the table the option corresponding to the wished combination: values of
Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch (802-1p INPUT Priority) - value of Tag 802.1p in output from the
Switch (802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping).
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the Service Tag List table
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

Operation available only if the parameter Current 802.1Q Setting has value:

Secure (Service Provider Port).

Secure (C_vid Filtering) with the corresponding Radio port in Secure and the transit of packets
is enabled (Port Based VLan).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Priority Management tab.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

283

The table Service Tag List allows managing the exceptions on the priority criteria used on port basis
and seen before for the single VID (S-VID or C-VID) according to the enabling of Provider modality.
Each row of the table corresponds to an exception. For every item, is pointed out in the column:

S_Vid or C_Vid. VLAN identifier where exception is applied (S-VID: Service VLAN Identifier, CVID: Customer VLAN Identifier).
Header S_Vid is present if port is Provider, while C_Vid if the port is not Provider.

Default Priority. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): value used to define the output queue of
Radio port when the selected priority criterion is TAG Default (see parameter Priority Sel) and
value used as priority 802.1p added to untagged packets which enter in the considered LAN and
will exit tagged from the corresponding remote LAN (0: lowest priority; 7: highest priority).

Priority Sel. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): priority criterion used to associate the packets,
in input from the LAN, to the output queues of the Radio port:

TAG Default. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the
default value set by the user.

802.1p. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the value
of native 802.1p priority.

TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the
TOS/DSCP value present in native IP field.

MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field.

802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID. Option available only for C-VID.

802.1p (S_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the
Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS field and this value will
be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID. Option available only for S-VID.

3. To add an element to the list:
a. Press Add.
b. Set the S_Vid or C_Vid, Default Priority and Priority Selection filed as described above.
c. Press Apply and confirm.
4. To modify an element of the list:
a. Double click on the box relevant to the Default Priority or Priority Selection parameter you wish
to change and set the new value.
Pressing Revert changes cancels the change executed.
b. Press Apply Changes and confirm.
5. To delete an element from the list:
a. Select the element.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
b. Press Remove and confirm.

Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of
the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab.
The Egress Priority Policy parameter indicates the emptying algorithm of the output queues of the LAN:

284

8421 WRR, a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the
queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2
messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from
the queue with highest priority.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Strict Priority, the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.

Strict 3, the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other
queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.

Strict 3 and 2, the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues
(1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The Default Vid parameter indicates the default VLAN Identifier value of the port.
The Default Vid of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject
without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value between 2 and 4094.
It is not possible to set, as ID, a value already used as Default Vid by another port or already used by
a reserved VLAN (see Virtual Lan Config. tab).
4. Press Apply and confirm.
If the message Default Vid already assigned to VLan in list. Continue anyway? is displayed, this means
that the entered value is used even as ID of a traffic VLAN. To continue the operation, press Yes and
confirm.

Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value
User Profile | Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The Force Def. Vid parameter indicates if the forcing of native CTag of the traffic in input to the LAN
with the corresponding default VID is active.
Active box (

) indicates the forcing is active; inactive box indicates forcing is not active.

3. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
If at least one of the Radio ports (Port A/Port B) is in Fallback modality (Ingress Filtering Check parameter) a warning message is displayed. Press OK to continue the operation.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the
LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The 802.1q Setting parameter indicates the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input
from the LAN:

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

285

Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be sent
only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.

Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU).
If VID (VLAN Identifier) of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the
ports belonging to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports included in VLAN on port basis.

Secure. VID must be contained in VTU and the input pot must be member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in
VLAN on port basis.

For each configuration (selection of the Disabled, Fallback or Secure option) the table of Port Based
VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base (see
Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan Table, the control of the Tag
802.1Q (Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge)
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Disabled or Fallback (see Fig.7).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The Traffic Treatment parameter indicates the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge):

Transparent Port to Port Transport. The traffic entering from a local LAN will automatically exit
only from the equivalent remote LAN, unless the single VLANs registered in VLAN Table Unit
(VTU) and routed by the user in different mode.

Transparent Bridge Port Based. The traffic entering from a local LAN will automatically exit from
all the remote LANs enabled by VLAN per port, unless the single VLANs registered in VTU and
routed by the user in different mode.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the management of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN
in selective mode
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The parameter Selective Provider Tag indicates the insertion modality of Provider Tag in the packets in
input from the LAN.
If the parameter 802.1q Setting has value:

Disabled or Secure the following options are present:

286

Disable. Option disabled: the Provider Tag is not inserted in the packets in selective
mode.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012


Port-Based. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets in selective mode
on port basis.

Fallback and the parameter Untag to Tag is not active, the following options are present:

Disable. Option disabled: the Provider Tag is not inserted in the packets in selective
mode.

C Vid Based. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets in selective mode
on C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) basis.

C Vid + Internal Priority. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets in
selective mode on C-VID and Internal Priority basis.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the management of Tag of the packets (in origin without Tag) in input
from the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Fallback.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The parameter Untag to Tag indicates the possibility to insert a Tag in the packets, in origin without
Tag, in input from the LAN.
Active box (

) means that the Tag insertion is enabled; inactive box means it is disabled.

3. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded
to the Radio, with a different VID
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Fallback.
Operation not available if the parameter Untag to Tag is active.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite table indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value of the
packets in input from the LAN and the identifier used to replace C-VID in the packets forwarded to the
Radio port.
The name and the column of the table change according to the value set for the parameter Selective
Provider Tag. If for the parameter Selective Provider Tag the set value is:

Disable, the tab contains the table Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite. In the column:

Input C Vid. Value C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) of the packets in input from the LAN
you wish to overwrite.

Output C Vid. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port.

To add a value to the list press Add. Set the Input C Vid and Output C Vid parameters with the
wished value. Press Apply and confirm.
To delete a value select the relevant row. Press Remove and confirm.

C Vid Based, the tab contains the table Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ. In the column:

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

287

Input C Vid. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish to add
S_TAG to.

Output C Vid. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port. This value can be
equal to or different from the native C-VID incoming from LANs.

Output S Vid. New value of S-TAG added to the set C-VID value.

To add a value to the list press Add. Set the Input C Vid, Output C Vid and Output S Vid parameters with the wished value. Press Apply and confirm.
To delete a value select the relevant row. Press Remove and confirm.

C Vid + Internal Priority, the tab contains the table Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ.
In the column:

Input C Vid. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish to add
S_TAG to.

Internal Priority. Value of priority associated to the packets incoming from the considered
LAN with the specific C-VID selected, which you wish to add a S-TAG to.

Output S Vid. New value of S-TAG added to set C-VID value and priority.

To add a value to the list press Add. Set the Input C Vid, Internal Priority e Output S Vid parameters with the wished value. Press Apply and confirm.
To delete a value select the relevant row. Press Remove and confirm.

Verify/modify the value of S-VID added to the packets in input to the LAN (independently from the presence of the Tag)
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

Operation available only if the parameter802.1q Setting has value Disabled or Secure and the parameter
Selective Provider Tag has value Port-Based.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The table LAN To Radio Rewrite displays the new S-TAG value (Output S Vid) added to the packets in
input to the LAN (independently from the presence of the Tag) and forwarded to the Radio port.
3. To add a value to the list press Add.
Set the Output S Vid parameters with the wished value.
Press Apply and confirm.
4. To delete a value select the relevant row.
Press Remove and confirm.

Verify the list of VIDs registered in VLAN Table Unit and associated to the LAN
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Fallback or Secure.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
3. Press Show Table.
The table Port C_Vid displays the list of C-VIDs (Customer VLAN Identifier) registered in VLAN Table
Unit (VTU) and associated to the LAN. In the column:

288

C_Vid. C-VID value registered in VTU.

VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered C-VID value.

Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered C-VID.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Table available when the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Fallback or Secure (box Provider Port
inactive).
The table Port S_Vid displays the list of S-VIDs (Service VLAN Identifier) registered in VTU and associated to the LAN. In the column:

S_Vid. S-VID value registered in VTU.

VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered S-VID value.

Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered S-VID.

Table available when the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Secure (box Provider Port active).

Verify/modify the management of the LAN in Provider mode
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Secure.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The parameter Provider Port indicates the management of the LAN in Provider Mode.
Active box ( ) means that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag active) is set; inactive box indicates that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag inactive) is not set.
3. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the transit of Untagged packets via LAN (802.1q - Secure)
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only if the parameter 802.1q Setting has value Secure.

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the 802.1Q Management tab.
The parameter Enable Untagged Frame indicates the management of Untagged packets.
The active box ( ) points out that the LAN port is enabled to transit of Untagged packets; the inactive
box indicates that the LAN is not enabled to the transit of Untagged packets.
3. To change the parameter, check or uncheck the relevant box
WARNING Enabling the parameter changes the port condition from Trusted to Untrusted.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Port Based VLan tab.
The Port Based VLAN area indicates the enabling status of the ports through which can transit the messages in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to:

Disable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are not enabled
to transit from the specific LAN or Radio port.

Enable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are enabled to
transit from the specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

289

The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.13).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
Enabling a port involves the automatic enabling of the corresponding port. For example, if you enable
the LAN 4 in the LAN 3 (Enh.) contextual area, the LAN 3 is automatically enabled in the LAN 4 (Enh.)
contextual area.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.

Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING The Spanning Tree protocol cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality or Ring Protection
mode is enabled.

Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The STP/ELP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled

Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).

Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).

Enable-Prot1, Enable-Prot2. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. The Ethernet Line Protection of
the equipment is enabled.

Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3, Enable-node-Prot4. Spanning Tree
protocol disabled. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP)
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The Priority parameter indicates the priority of the LAN (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority).

290

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP)
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The Value parameter indicates the cost of the network part directly connected to the LAN.
This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connections, the preference
of a port with respect to the others.
This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in
the Standard IEEE 802.1w.
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Ethernet Line Protection
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.

Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING The Ethernet Line Protection cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality or Ring Protection
mode is enabled.

Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The STP/ELP parameter indicates the enabling status of Ethernet Line Protection for the port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disable. Ethernet Line Protection disabled.

Enable-Bridge1 - Enable-Bridge2. Ethernet Line Protection disabled. Spanning Tree protocol enabled.

Enable-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot1.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

291

Enable-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot2.

Enable-node-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node) is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot1.

Enable-node-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot2.

Enable-node-Prot3. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot3.

Enable-node-Prot4. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the considered
LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot4.

The values Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3 and Enable-node-Prot4 are
available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the status of the LAN in relation to the Trunking mode
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a

node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.

Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN
User Profile | Station Operator, System
WARNING The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line
Protection or Ring Protection mode is enabled.

To enable the Trunking modality, it is first necessary to disable the LAN.
Operation not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the STP/ELP Trunking tab.
The Trunk/LACP parameter indicates the enabling status of the Trunking mode for the selected port.
3. To change the parameter, select the value:

Disable. Trunking mode disabled.

Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.

Enable-Trunk2. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk2.

Enable-Trunk3. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk3.

Enable-Trunk4. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the equipment
LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk4.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

292

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

For the correct configuration of the bidirectional LLF functionality for a radio link se Bidirectional LLF (info).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the LLF tab.
The LLF parameter indicates the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality:

Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.

Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms (IDU
BRANCH Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO Link Id. Alarm) or if the Radio port is disabled.

Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:

Bidirectional, indicates that the block of the local LAN port due to LLF is communicated even to
the remote equipment (activation of bidirectional LLF functionality).

Rem. LAN-1, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 1 (Enh.) port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-2, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 2 (Enh.) port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-3, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 3 (Enh.) port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-4, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote
LAN 4 (Enh.) port associated to it.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option(s).
4. Press Apply and confirm.

Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN
User Profile | Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Base Band > LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Line Loop tab.
The Line Loop parameter displays the status of the loop on line side of the LAN:

Enable. Loop on line side active.

Disable. Loop on line side inactive.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the loop a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the
current setting of timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Verify the status and the configuration of the laser (LAN)
User Profile | Monitor, Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

293

1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The tab displays the current status and the configuration parameters of the laser.

Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN)
User Profile | Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
In the Transmitter Control area the enabling status of the laser is pointed out:

On. The laser is enabled for transmission.

Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message warns that you are executing
a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the
laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.

Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)
User Profile | Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
The Mode parameter indicates the transmission mode of the laser:

Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal.

Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. (default 120 sec.). Select the Apply and confirm.

Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.

Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).

3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message warns
that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of the timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.

294

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the transmission mode of the laser is Auto.

Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)
User Profile | Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
3. Select the Manual option.
4. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
6. Press Restart and confirm.
The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.

Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN)
User Profile | Read & Write, Station Operator, System
WARNING Operation available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).
1. Select Base Band > LAN 3 (Enh.) or LAN 4 (Enh.).
2. Select the Laser Control tab.
3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser
(value comprised between 1 and 100 sec. - default 90 sec.).
4. Select the Test option.
5. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout
6. Confirm the operation.
The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
7. Press Restart and confirm.
The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

295

LAN 1 (Enh.), LAN 2 (Enh.), LAN 3 (Enh.), LAN 4 (Enh.) contextual area
The contextual area displays the configuration of the specific LAN of the Ethernet Switch (Enhanced).
Tabs

Interface tab. General configuration of the LAN.
Rate Limiter tab. Existing PIRL instances for the LAN.
Input Filter Policing tab. Modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN.
Priority Management tab. Configuration of the LAN relevant to priority management.
802.1Q Management tab. Configuration of the LAN relevant to VLAN management.
Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab. Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
of the LAN.
Port Based VLAN tab. Ports through which can transit the messages in input from the LAN.
STP/ELP Trunking tab. Status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet
Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.
LLF tab. Enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Line Loop tab. Status of the loop on line side of the LAN.
Laser Control tab. Configuration of the LAN with optical interface.
Push-button

Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Interface tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN.
Parameters

Master/Slave. Operating modality of the line synchronism:

Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.

Slave. The line synchronism is generated starting from the clock retrieved from the
line (Loop Time).

Parameter available only for the ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is
active (box Speed/Duplex - value Auto) and the 1000Base-T configuration is active.
M/S Autoneg. Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism:

Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is automatic.

Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is forced. In this case, the role defined in the Master/Slave box is used.

Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(box Speed/Duplex – value Auto) and the 1000Base-T configuration is active.
Rate Control. Enabling status of the port:

Disable. The LAN is not enabled to the use.

Full Rate. The LAN is enabled to the use of the max bit rate relevant to the port.

Kb/Mb. The LAN is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.

Forwarding Rule. Rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN:

296

Dest. Addr. Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic on VLAN basis (Port Based VLAN)
and with destination MAC address present in MAC Table.

Vid Basis. The port forwards the traffic only on VLAN basis without checking the presence of destination MAC in MAC Table.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Parameter meaningful only if the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the MAC Table is
enabled (Mac Learning).
Flow Control Full Dplx / Back Pressure Half Dplx. Activation status of the flow control of
the port:

Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.

Enable. The flow control is forced active.

Auto. The flow control is auto-negotiated and, if the remote equipment can manage
the flow control, it is automatically activated on the local equipment.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the flow control must be DISABLED. If it was
enabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to disable the parameter. If already disabled, the setting cannot be changed.
Interface Type. Type of the interface:

Electrical. The LAN is configured with electrical interface.

Optical. The LAN is configured with optical interface.

Parameter available only for the LAN 3 and LAN 4.
Cable Crossover. Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:

MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card
modality).

MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).

Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.

Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of LAN is enabled
(box Rate Control – value Full Rate or Kb/Mb).
Mac Learning. Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table):

Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.

Enable. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of the addresses
in the table takes place analysing only the field MAC Address and is registered in a
single MAC Table.

Learn. on port basis. The automatic learning of MAC Address is enabled. Learning of
the addresses in the table takes place associating the MAC Address to the segment
of MAC Table indicized by the Default Vid value associated to the port which the traffic
is income from.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses
must be ENABLED. If it was disabled, at the opening of the contextual area a message is displayed asking to enable the parameter (Enable or Learn. on port basis option). If already enabled, the setting cannot be changed.
Speed/Duplex. Activation status of the autonegotiation and, if the autonegotiation is deactivated, operating modalities and transmission speed of the port.
For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are
available:

Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 10Mbit/s.

Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Auto FD up to 10M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission
type are negotiated with a maximum of speed of 10Mbit/s and with modality HalfDuplex or Full-Duplex.

Auto FD up to 100M. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission
type are negotiated with a maximum of speed of 100Mbit/s and with modality HalfDuplex or Full-Duplex.

Auto FD up to 1G. The auto negotiation is enabled: the speed and the transmission
type are negotiated with a maximum of speed of 1Gbit/s and with modality Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

297

For LAN 3 and LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:

Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 100Mbit/s.

Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the LAN is 1GMbit/s.

Egress Shaping. Maximum Throughput of data in output from LAN port:

Disable. No maximum throughput is set for LAN port.

Full Rate. The value of maximum bit rate of the port is set as maximum throughput
for LAN port.

Kb/Mb. The specific value is set as maximum throughput for LAN port.

The throughput is the real index of utilization of the link capacity, that is the amount of data
transmitted in the unit of time.
Available values changes depending on the port transmission speed (see parameter Speed/Duplex).
Speed. Data transmission speed.
Duplex. Transmission modality.
Port Role. Current status of the line synchronism.
Parameter available only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active
(box Speed/Duplex – value Auto) and the 1000Base-T configuration is active.
Alarms. Status of the alarms relevant to the port. The colour of the boxes represents the alarm
status and severity:

Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.

Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.

Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Push-button

Restart Autonegotiation. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the LAN.
See also

Verify/modify the enabling status of the LAN
Verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive,
the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the LAN
Verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the LAN
Verify/modify the automatic learning of the addresses in the MAC Table for the LAN
Verify/modify the rule to forwarding the input packets from the LAN
Verify/modify the maximum throughput of data in output from LAN port
Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) for the LAN
Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism for the LAN
Verify/modify the interface type of the LAN

Rate Limiter tab
WARNING Tab not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The tab displays the existing PIRL instances for the LAN.
Every row corresponds to an instance.
Parameters

Status. PIRL instance status:

298

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Not Active. The instance is not used by the Switch as rule for the traffic limitation.
Status of the instance at creation or when it is disabled by the user.

Active. The instance is used by the Switch as rule for the traffic limitation.
Status of the instance after the enabling by the user.

Rate. Band threshold over which the traffic is limited.
The type of traffic to limit is listed in the following columns (types of packets with value Enable
active).
Broadcast. Limitation of the Broadcast packets in input from the port:

Enable. The transit of the Broadcast packets is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Broadcast packets is not limited.

Unknown Multicast. Limitation of the Multicast Unknown packets (Multicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port:

Enable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Multicast Unknown packets is not limited.

Unknown Unicast. Limitation of the Unicast Unknown packets (Unicast packets with destination MAC addresses not present in the MAC Table) in input from the port:

Enable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Unicast Unknown packets is not limited.

Unicast. Limitation of the Unicast packets in input from the port:

Enable. The transit of the Unicast packets is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the Unicast packets is not limited.

ARP. Limitation of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) packets in input from the port:

Enable. The transit of the ARP packets is limited to the specific band.

Disable. The transit of the ARP packets is not limited.

Push-button

Add. Create a PIRL instance for the LAN.
Remove. Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to the PIRL instances.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to the PIRL instances and not confirmed yet.
See also

Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN
PIRL function (info)

Input Filter Policing tab
WARNING Tab not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The tab displays the modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN.
Parameters

Mode. Modality to use to limit the traffic in input from LAN and forwarded to Radio port:

Disable. Option disabled: the traffic in input is not limited according to specific criteria.

UNI Port based. Option enabled: all the traffic in input is limited on port basis.

EVC C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets
with C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

299

COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited
only for the packets with C-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed
out in the table below.

EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the
packets with S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) and C-VID values defined by the user
and pointed out in the table below.

COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets with S-VID and C-VID values and priority defined by the user
and pointed out in the table below.

EVC S_Vid Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the packets
with S-VID values defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.

COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited
only for the packets with S-VID values and priority defined by the user and pointed
out in the table below.

COS Internal Priority Based. Option enabled: the traffic in input is limited only for the
packets with priority defined by the user and pointed out in the table below.

Not Registered Traffic Default Color. Colour preset for the packets not associated to any
traffic profile defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile):

Green (MEF Compliant). The packets are treated as belonging to the green profile.

Red. The packets are discarded.

The parameter is not available if the Disable value is set for the Mode parameter.
Table. The table will point out, according to the option enabled, the criteria for the traffic limitation defined by the user (Bandwidth Profile).
Every row corresponds to one criterion. The configuration parameters (pointed out in the table
columns) of the criterion change depending on the setting of the parameter Mode. If the active
value is:

UNI Port Based the table contains the columns:

CIR (Committed Information Rate). Transmission rate (expressed in Mbit/s)
ensured in normal operating condition of the network (throughput).

EIR (Extended Information Rate). Band exceeding that set by CIR.

CBS. (Committed Burst Size). Traffic burst which the network ensures to
store.

EBS (Excessive Burst Size). Quantity of data, besides CBS, the network can
store.

CF (Coupling Flag). Modality to control the traffic declared Yellow.

Enabled. The average value, in the long period, of the traffic declared Yellow is limited by the value CIR+EIR as function of the traffic declared
Green.

Disabled. The average value, in the long period, of the traffic declared Yellow is limited by the value EIR.

In both cases, the Burst Size of the traffic declared Yellow is limited by the value if
EBS

300

EVC C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:

C_Vid. Identifier C-VID of the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID set by the user,
and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.

COS C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

C_Vid. Identifier C-VID of the packet in input.

Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and
maximum) of the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifier C-VID and 802.1p priority set by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.

EVC S_Vid/C_Vid Based the table contains the columns:

S_Vid. Identifier S-VID of the packet in input.

C_Vid. Identifier C-VID of the packet in input.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

COS S_Vid/C_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID set
by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.
S_Vid. Identifier S-VID of the packet in input.

C_Vid. Identifier C-VID of the packet in input.

Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and
maximum) of the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifiers S-VID and C-VID and
with 802.1p priority set by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from
LAN.

EVC S_Vid Based the table contains the columns:

S_Vid. Identifier S-VID of the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifier S-VID set by the user,
and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.

COS S_Vid + Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

S_Vid. Identifier S-VID of the packet in input.

Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and
maximum) of the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with identifier S-VID and 802.1p priority set by the user, and not on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.

COS Internal Priority Based the table contains the columns:

Internal Priority. Levels of priority (range of values between minimum and
maximum) of the packet in input.

CIR, EIR, CBS, EBS and CF. The description is the same reported for the value UNI Port Based, but only for the traffic with priority set by the user, and not
on the whole traffic incoming from LAN.

The table is not available if the Disable value is set for the Mode parameter.
Push-button

Add. Add an element to the table.
Remove. Delete an element from the table.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to the elements of the table.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to the elements of the table and not confirmed yet.
See also

Verify/modify the modality and the criteria used to limit the traffic in input from the LAN

Priority Management tab
WARNING Tab not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The tab displays configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to the priority management.
Parameters

Current 802.1Q Setting. Current status of the management modality of protocol 802.1Q:

Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They
will be sent only to the ports pointed out in the Port Based VLAN area.

Fallback. The traffic in input from the port is subjected both to port based routing
(Port Based VLAN) and to VLAN Table Unit (VTU) based routing.

Secure (C_vid Filtering). The traffic in input from the port is subjected only to the
routing defined by VTU.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

301

Secure (Service Provider Port). The traffic in input from the port can be only of type
Provider and will be subjected only to the routing defined by VTU.

Internal Priority Selection. Priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the
LAN, to the output of the Radio Ports:
If the parameter Current 802.1Q Setting has value:

Disabled the following options are present:

Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the default value set by the user.

Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio
port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.

Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port
according to the priority value present in native MPLS field.

Fallback or Secure (C_vid Filtering) the following options are present:

Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the default value set by the user.

Native 802.1p (C_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the value of native 802.1p priority.

Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio
port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.

Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port
according to the priority value present in native MPLS field.

802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output
queues of the Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS
field and this value will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.

Secure (Service Provider Port) the following options are present:

Port Default. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the default value set by the user.

Native 802.1p (S_Vid). The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according to the value of native 802.1p priority.

Native TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio
port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in the native IP field.

Native MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port
according to the priority value present in native MPLS field.

802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output
queues of the Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS
field and this value will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID.

802.1p (S_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output
queues of the Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS
field and this value will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID.

Default Internal Priority. Value used to define the output queue of the Radio port when the
selected priority criteria is Port Default (see parameter Internal Priority Selection) and value
used as priority 802.1p added to the untagged packets entering in the considered LAN and they
will exit tagged from the corresponding remote LAN:

0. Lowest priority

7. Highest priority.

802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping table. Mapping of priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (priority 802.1p present into a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch
with a different priority value):

802-1p INPUT Priority. Each row correspond to Tag 802.1p value of the packet in output from the Switch: 7 ÷ 0.

802.1p OUTPUT Priority Remapping. Each column correspond to Tag 802.1p value of
the packet in output from the Switch.

The active option indicates the combination: Tag 802.1p in input to the Switch - Tag 802.1p in
output from the Switch.
Table available only if the analysis of the priority 802.1p is active (see parameter Internal Priority Selection).
Service Tag List table. If the parameter Current 802.1Q Setting has value:

302

Secure (Service Provider Port).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Secure (C_vid Filtering) with the corresponding Radio port in Secure and the transit
of packets is enabled (Port Based VLan).

The tab display the Service Tag List table. The table allows managing the exceptions on the priority criteria used on port basis and seen before for the single VID (S-VID or C-VID) according
to the enabling of Provider modality.
Each row corresponds to an exception. For every item, is pointed out in the column.
S_Vid or C_Vid. VLAN where exception is applied (S-VID: Service VLAN Identifier or
C-VID: Customer VLAN Identifier).
Header S_Vid is present if port is Provider, while C_Vid if the port is not Provider.
Default Priority. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): value used to define the output queue of Radio port when the selected priority criterion is TAG Default (see parameter Priority Sel) and value used as priority 802.1p added to untagged packets
which enter in the considered LAN and will exit tagged from the corresponding remote
LAN (0: lowest priority; 7: highest priority).
Priority Sel. Only for set VLAN (S-VID or C-VID): priority criterion used to associate
the packets, in input from the LAN, to the output queues of the Radio port:

TAG Default. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the default value set by the user.

802.1p. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according
to the value of native 802.1p priority.

TOS/DSCP. The traffic will be sent on the output queues of Radio port according to the TOS/DSCP value present in native IP field.

MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output queues of the Radio port according
to the priority value present in native MPLS field.

802.1p (C_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output
queues of the Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS
field and this value will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of C-VID. Option available only for C-VID.

802.1p (S_PCP) rewrite with MLPS. The traffic will be sent to the output
queues of the Radio port according to the priority value present in native MPLS
field and this value will be rewritten in the field 802.1p of S-VID. Option available only for S-VID.

In the Service Tag List table the push-button:
Add. Add an element to the table.
Remove. Delete an element from the table.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes made to the elements of the table.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes made to the elements of the table and not confirmed yet.
See also

Verify the current management modality of protocol 802.1Q
Verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the LAN to the
output queue of the Radio ports
Verify/modify the value for Port Default and 802.1p priority
Verify/remap the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan of the LAN
Verify/modify the Service Tag List table

802.1Q Management tab
The tab displays the configuration parameters of the LAN relevant to VLAN management.
Parameters

Default Vid. Default Vid value of the port.
The Default Vid of a port is used as VID in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port
in subject without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

303

Force Def. Vid. Forces the over-writing of the native CTag of the traffic in input to the LAN with
the corresponding default VID.
Active box (

) indicates the forcing is active; inactive box indicates forcing is not active.

802.1q Setting. Management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the LAN:

Disabled. The LAN does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They
will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.

Fallback. Packets are not discarded if the VLAN is not registered in VLAN Table Unit
(VTU).
If VID of incoming packet is registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the ports
belonging to the VLANs registered in VTU and included in VLAN on port basis.
If VID of incoming packet is NOT registered in VTU, it can be forwarded only on the
ports included in VLAN on port basis.

Secure. VID must be contained in VTU and the input pot must be member of this
VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
A packet can exit from the ports belonging to the VLAN registered in VTU and are included in VLAN on port basis.

Traffic Treatment. Traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge):

Transparent Port to Port Transport. The traffic entering from a local LAN will automatically exit only from the equivalent remote LAN, unless the single VLANs registered in
VTU and routed by the user in different mode.

Transparent Bridge Port Based. The traffic entering from a local LAN will automatically
exit from all the remote LANs enabled by VLAN per port, unless the single VLANs registered in VTU and routed by the user in different mode.

The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.
Selective Provider Tag. Insertion modality of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the
LAN. If the parameter 802.1q Setting has value:

Disabled o Secure the following options are present:

Disable. Option disabled: the Provider Tag is not inserted in the packets in selective mode.

Port-Based. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets in selective mode on port basis.

Fallback and the parameter Untag to Tag is not active, the following options are present:

Disable. Option disabled: the Provider Tag is not inserted in the packets in selective mode.

C Vid Based. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the packets in selective mode on C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) basis.

C Vid + Internal Priority. Option enabled: the Provider Tag is inserted in the
packets in selective mode on C-VID and Internal Priority basis.

The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.
Untag to Tag. Active box ( ) means that the Tag insertion in the packets in origin without Tag
in input from the LAN, is enabled; inactive box means it is disabled.
The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.
Provider Port. Active box ( ) means that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag active)
is set; inactive box indicates that for the LAN the Provider mode (Double Tag inactive) is not set.
The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.
Enable Untagged Frames. The active box ( ) points out that the LAN port is enabled to transit of Untagged packets; the inactive box indicates that the LAN is not enabled to the transit of
Untagged packets.
The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.
Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite. Table of correspondence between the C-VID value of the packets
in input from the LAN and the identifier used to replace C-VID in the packets forwarded to the
Radio port. Column:

304

Input C Vid. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) value of the packets in input from the
LAN you wish to overwrite.

Output C Vid. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The Add push-button adds a new value to the list. The Remove push-button removes a value
from the list.
The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.
LAN To Radio Rewrite. The table displays the S-TAG value added to the packets in input to
the LAN (independently from the presence of the Tag) and forwarded to the Radio port.
The Output S Vid column indicates the new value of S-TAG added.
The Add push-button adds a new value to the list. The Remove push-button removes a value
from the list.
The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.
Lan to Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ. If the parameter Selective Provider Tag has
value:

C Vid Based. Table indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value of the
packets in input from the LAN and the identifier (C-VID and S-VID) used to replace
C-VID in the packets forwarded to the Radio port. The column:

Input C Vid. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish
to add S_TAG.

Output C Vid. New value of C-VID you wish to forward to Radio port. This value
can be equal to or different from the native C-VID incoming from LANs.

Output S Vid. New value of S-TAG added to the set C-VID value.

C Vid + Internal Priority. Table indicates the correspondence between the C-VID value
and priority 802.1p of the packets in input from the LAN and the S-TAG value added
to the packets forwarded to the Radio port. The column:

Input C Vid. C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN which you wish
to add S_TAG to.

Internal Priority. Value of priority associated to the packets incoming from the
considered LAN with the specific C-VID selected, which you wish to add a STAG to.

Output S Vid. New value of S-TAG added to set C-VID value and priority.

The Add push-button adds a new value to the list. The Remove push-button removes a value
from the list.
The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.
Port C_Vid. Table displays the list of C-VIDs (Customer VLAN Identifier) registered in VLAN Table Unit (VTU) and associated to the LAN. Column:

C_Vid. C-VID value registered in VTU.

VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered C-VID value.

Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered C-VID.

The Show Table push-button displays the list of C-VID.
The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.
Port S_Vid. Table displays the list of S-VIDs (Service VLAN Identifier) registered in VTU and
associated to the LAN. Column:

S_Vid. S-VID value registered in VTU.

VLan Label. Possible name associated to the registered S-VID value.

Frame Forwarding. Modality used to manage the registered S-VID.

The Show Table push-button displays the list of S-VID.
The availability of the parameter is shown in Fig.7.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

305

Fig.7 Parameters availability (802.1Q Management tab)
802.1q Settings
Disabled

Traffic Treatment

(1)

Transparent Port to Port Transport
Transparent Bridge Port Based

Selective Provider Tag

(2)

Disable
Port-Based

Fallback

Traffic Treatment

LAN To Radio Rewrite (2)

(1)

Transparent Port to Port Transport
Transparent Bridge Port Based

Selective Provider Tag

(2) (3)

Disable

LAN To Radio C_Vid Rewrite (2) (3)

Vid Based

LAN To Radio C_Vid Rewrite & Selective QinQ (2) (3)

C Vid + Internal Priority

Untag to Tag (2)
Port C_Vid

Secure

Enable Untagged Frames
Provider Port
Port S_Vid
Port C_Vid
Selective Provider Tag
Disable
Port-Based

(2)

LAN To Radio Rewrite (2)

(1)

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the Transparent Bridge Port Based value is set. The
value can not be changed.
(2)

Parameter not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

(3)

Parameters disabled if the Untag to Tag parameter is enabled (

).

See also

Verify/modify the Default Vid value of the LAN
Force the value of VID of the LAN to the default value
Verify/modify the management of the 802.1Q field on the messages in input from the LAN
Verify/modify the traffic transport modality (point-point or Bridge)
Verify/modify the management of Provider Tag in the packets in input from the LAN in selective
mode
Verify/modify the management of Tag of the packets (in origin without Tag) in input from the
LAN
Verify/overwrite the C-VID value of the packets in input from the LAN and forwarded to the Radio, with a different VID
Verify/modify the value of S-VID added to the packets in input to the LAN (independently from
the presence of the Tag)
Verify the list of VIDs registered in VLAN Table Unit and associated to the LAN
Verify/modify the management of the LAN in Provider mode
Verify/modify the transit of Untagged packets via LAN (802.1q - Secure)

306

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Queue Mngt Radio to Lan tab
WARNING Tab not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The tab displays the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LAN.
Parameters

Egress Priority Policy. Emptying algorithm:

8421 WRR. A part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a
part of the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from the queue with highest priority.

Strict Priority. The queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all
the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.

Strict 3. The high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.

Strict 3 and 2. The high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The
other queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 21 mechanism.

See also

Verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue of the LAN

Port Based VLAN tab
The tab displays the ports through which can transit the messages in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to.
Parameters

LAN/Port For each Ethernet port, if the set option is:

Disable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are
not enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port.

Enable. The packets, in input from the LAN which the contextual area refers to, are
enabled to transit through the specific LAN or Radio port (bidirectional connection).

The availability of the Radio ports depends on the equipment configuration (see Tab.13).
See also

Verify/modify the ports through which the messages in input from the LAN

STP/ELP Trunking tab
WARNING Tab not available for the LAN 1 and LAN 2 if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The tab displays the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet Line Protection or to the Trunking modality.
Parameters

STP/ELP. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol or of the of the Ethernet Line Protection
for the port:

Disable. Spanning Tree protocol and Ethernet Line Protection disabled.

Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).

Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

307

Enable-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot1.

Enable-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the equipment whose parameter value is Enable-Prot2.

Enable-node-Prot1. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot1.

Enable-node-Prot2. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot2.

Enable-node-Prot3. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot3.

Enable-node-Prot4. The Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled between the
considered LAN and the other LANs of the node elements whose value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot4.

The values Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3 and Enable-node-Prot4
are available only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
If the Trunking modality or Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable is automatically
forced for the parameter.
Role (STP/ELP area). This parameter has a different meaning depending on the enabled protocol/modality:
STP ENABLED. Role assigned by the STP to each port of a Bridge/Switch. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:

ELP

Disable. Port disabled.

root-port. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as
root. Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.

alternate-port. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.

designated-port. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used
to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.

backup-port. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.

ENABLED.

Role assigned by the ELP to each port. The role defines the behaviour of the port:

Disable. Port disabled.

alternate-port. Port in stand-by status, as it offers an alternative path with higher cost
as opposed to the Designated port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.

designated-port. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status.

Status (area STP/ELP). Current status of the port:
Port status

Receive
traffic

Forward
traffic

No

No

port-blocking

No

port-learning

Yes

port-forwarding

Yes

Yes

Update the
Address Table Unit

Receive/process BPDU

Re-transmit
BPDU

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

STP
port-disable

ELP

308

ENABLED

ENABLED

port-blocking

No

No

No

-

-

port-forwarding

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Version (STP/ELP area). Version of the Spanning Tree protocol or protection group of the port:

rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol
characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).

stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

ELP-1. Protection 1 group (ELP equipment).

ELP-2. Protection 2 group (ELP equipment).

Parameter not meaningful when Ethernet Line Protection of the node is enabled (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-node-Prot... value).
Priority. Port priority:

0. Highest priority

15. Lowest priority

Parameter not meaningful when Trunking modality is enabled.
Value (Path Cost area). Cost of the network part directly connected to the port.
Parameter not meaningful when Trunking modality is enabled.
Recommended Max / Recommended Min (Path Cost area). Cost interval recommended according to what pointed out in Standard IEEE 802.1w.
Parameter not meaningful when Trunking modality is enabled.
Trunk/LACP. Enabling status of the Trunking mode for the port:

Disable. Trunking mode disabled.

Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the
equipment LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.

Enable-Trunk2. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the
equipment LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk2.

Enable-Trunk3. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the
equipment LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk3.

Enable-Trunk4. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN is aggregated to the
equipment LANs, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk4.

It is possible to aggregate up to 4 LANs for each group (Trunk).
If the STP, the Ethernet Line Protection or the Ring Protection mode is enabled, the value Disable
is automatically forced for the parameter.
Status (Trunk/LACP area). Status of the port as regards the LACP (Link Aggregation Control
Protocol):

Up. Protocol active.

Down. Protocol inactive.

Partner Id (Trunk/LACP area). MAC Address of the remote equipment located at the other end
of the Ethernet connection (remote Switch).
Tx Pck Cnt (Trunk/LACP area). LACP packets transmitted to the remote Switch.
Rx Pck Cnt (Trunk/LACP area). LACP packets received from the remote Switch.
Push-button

Refresh (area STP/ELP). Update the values present in the specific area.
Refresh (area Trunk/LACP). Update the values present in the specific area.
See also

Enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN
Enable/disable the Ethernet Line Protection for the LAN
Enable/disable the Trunking mode for the LAN
Verify/modify the priority of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Verify/modify the connection cost of the LAN (STP/ELP)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)
Trunking mode (info)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

309

LLF tab
WARNING Tab not available if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.

The tab displays the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality.
Parameters

LLF. Enabling status of the LLF modality:

Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.

Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms
(IDU BRANCH Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO Link Id. Alarm) or if the Radio port
is disabled.

Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:

Bidirectional, indicates that the block of the local LAN port due to LLF is communicated
even to the remote equipment (activation of bidirectional LLF functionality).

Rem. LAN-1, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 1 (Enh.) port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-2, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 2 (Enh.) port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-3, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 3 (Enh.) port associated to it.

Rem. LAN-4, indicates that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on
the remote LAN 4 (Enh.) port associated to it.

See also

Verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the LAN
Bidirectional LLF (info)

Line Loop tab
The tab displays the status of the loop on line side of the LAN.
Parameters

Line Loop. Status of the loop on line side of the LAN:

Enable. Loop on line side active.

Disable. Loop on line side inactive.

See also

Activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the LAN

Laser Control tab
WARNING Tab available only for LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces.

The tab displays the configuration of the LAN with optical interface.
Parameters

Transmitter Control. Enabling status of the laser:

310

On. The laser is enabled for transmission.

Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

<Box>. Current status of the laser:

Status On / green box. The laser is on transmission.

Status Off / gray box. The laser is not on transmission.

Module Type. Laser module type:

optical-100baseFX. Laser module of type 100 Base FX (Fiber).

optical-1000baseSX. Laser module of type 1000 Base SX (Short WaveLength).

optical-1000baseLX. Laser module of type 1000 Base LX (Long WaveLength).

optical-cwdm. Laser module of type CWDM (Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing).

optical-cwdm-ge. Laser module of type CWDM Gbit/s Ethernet (Coarse Wavelength
Division Multiplexing).

Unknown. The laser module is not among those listed above (possible anomaly of the
laser module).

For more information relevant to laser module refer to IEEE standard 802.3.
Wave Length. Wave length (in nanometres) of the SFP optical module (Small Form-factor Pluggable).
Link Length. Maximum distance (in meters) of the optical fiber supported by the SFP optical
module.
Mode. Transmission mode of the laser. If active, the option:

Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the
real presence of the optical signal.

Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal:
when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the
laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds
every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote
transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit,
while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.

Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.

Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of test laser operation status).

Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller
before trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the
laser during the testing operation.
Push-button

Restart. Restart the laser.
See also

Modify the enabling status of the laser (LAN)
Modify the transmission mode of the laser (LAN)
Enable manually the laser transmission (LAN)
Execute the test laser functioning status (LAN)

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

311

PIRL function (info)
The PIRL (Port Ingress Rate Limiter) function available in the ALCplus2e equipment is a mechanism used
to control and filter the traffic in input from every single LAN of the Ethernet Switch.
This mechanism is composed by a list of rules (PIRL instances) which determine:

The threshold over which the traffic is limited (traffic bit rate available with respect to the total
band).

Type of traffic to limit, choosing between:

Broadcast traffic.

Multicast Unknown traffic (Multicast packets with destination MAC address not present in
the MAC Table).

Unicast Unknown traffic (Unicast packets with destination MAC address not present in the
MAC Table).

Unicast traffic.

ARP traffic.

One or more traffic types can be associated to the threshold creating the wished criterion.
A maximum of 2 PIRL instances can be created for every single LAN.
Every instance must be created by the user.
After the creation, a PIRL instance must be enabled by the user in order to be used as rule for the traffic
limitation.
In any moment, the instance can be disabled, changed in its setting or deleted.
See also

Verify the existing PIRL instances for the LAN
Create a PIRL instance for the LAN
Enable/disable a PIRL instance of the LAN
Modify a PIRL instance of the LAN
Delete a PIRL instance of the LAN

312

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (info)
Spanning Tree is a protocol for the management of the connections, which supports the redundancy of the
path avoiding the creation of unwished loops in the network. In order that an Ethernet network operates
correctly, only an active path must exist between two stations. Multiple active paths cause loops in the
network and, as consequence, the possible replication of the messages to infinity.
The Spanning Tree protocol constitutes a tree logic network which pass through all the bridges into a complex physical network forcing the possible duplicated paths (possible loops) into a stand-by status
(Blocked).
If a network segment becomes unreachable or if the cost of a path changes, the algorithm of Spanning
Tree reconfigures the topology of the network activating an alternative path.
For more information, refer to the standard IEEE:

802.1d (Spanning Tree Protocol).

802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).

WARNING The use of the Spanning Tree protocol must be enabled at level of single port.

The use of the Spanning Tree protocol for the LANs is alternative to the use of the Ethernet Line Protection,
Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.
If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the Spanning Tree protocol can be enabled/
disabled for the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A).
The management of the Ethernet nodal interconnection ports (LAN 1 and LAN 2) is responsibility of the
system which ensures that no data loop is created.
Even in this case, the use of the Spanning Tree protocol for the LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A is alternative to the
use of the Ethernet Line Protection (only LANs), Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

313

Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (info)
The Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) is a function which allows implementing a protection at physical level
(Level 2) between two or more LANs.
When the user enables the Ethernet Line Protection, even the management of the ELP switch is enabled.
The switch operates in automatic mode: the equipment executes the switch when the LOS alarm is present
on the LAN in service. When the alarm clears, the controller does not execute the switch again.
The Ethernet Line Protection is implemented by means of proprietary protocol. As consequence, the ELP
switch is managed without considering alarms or settings executed on the equipment on the other side of
the LAN connection.
In ALCplus2e equipment, the Ethernet Line Protection can be enabled at equipment level (ELP equipment)
or at node level (ELP node).
This last chance is available only for the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node.
Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment)
Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)

Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment)
The Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment allows setting in mutual protection more LANs of the same
equipment.
The functionality manages up to two different protection groups: Protection 1 and Protection 2.
In this way, it is possible to setting in mutual protection two, three or four LANs or setting in protection
the LANs in pairs of two.
The same protection group (Protection1) will be enable for the two, three or four LANs. In the second case,
a protection group (Protection1) will be enable for two LANs and the other protection group (Protection2)
for the remnant two.
The parameters, which determine which LAN among those in protection must be set as operating, are the
port parameters foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol:
1. Cost. A connection cost can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP equipment function is enabled for two or more LANs, the port currently active for the
transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest cost.
Example. For the LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP equipment function is enabled. The LAN 1 is enabled,
has a valid signal and cost 200.000, the LAN 2 is enabled, has a valid signal and cost 250.000, the LAN
3 is enabled, has a valid signal and cost 300.000. The LAN 1 is used for the transport.
2. Priority. A priority value between 1 and 9 can be assigned to every port.
When the ELP equipment function is enabled for two or more LANs and the ports have the same cost,
the port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest priority
value.
Example. For the LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP equipment function is enabled. The ports are all
enabled, have a valid signal and cost 200.000. The LAN 1 has priority 1, the LAN 2 has priority 2, the
LAN 3 has priority 3. The LAN 1 is used for the transport.
WARNING Only if the ELP function is enabled for one port when more ports are operating (status Desig-

nated), cost and priority being equal, the port with the lower physical position is keep active.
The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have
been used to represent in WEB LCT page the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch:

314

LAN

Role

Port status

Operating

Designated

Forwarding

Reserve

Alternate

Blocking

WEB LCT ALCplus2e - Release 1.9.0 - Ethernet Enhanced functionality - MN.00268.E - 012

The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following operations:

To enable/disable the use of the LANs (Rate Control parameter)

To enable/disable the ELP equipment functionality on the LANs you wish to protect (STP/ELP parameter - Enable-Prot1 or Enable-Prot2 value).

To set the port priority (Priority - parameter)

To set the port cost (Path Cost - parameter)

WARNING The use of the equipment ELP functionality for each LAN is alternative to the use of Spanning
Tree, Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality.

If the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, the use of the equipment ELP functionality can be enabled/disabled only for the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3 and LAN 4).
In this case, the use of the equipment ELP functionality (besides the use of the Spanning Tree protocol,
Trunking modality or Ring Protection modality) is alternative to the use of the node ELP functionality.

Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)
Only if the equipment is an Ethernet element of a node, it is possible to enable the Ethernet Line Protection
at node level (node ELP).
This functionality, in fact, allows setting in mutual protection the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3 and LAN 4)
of the equipment belonging to the node and interconnected by the Ethernet nodal Bus.
Up to 4 different protection groups can be created: Node Protection1, Node Protection2, Node Protection3
and Node Protection4.
For example, with reference to Fig.8, if you wish to set in mutual protection the LAN 3 of A.1, A.2 and A.3,
you must enable the node ELP functionality (Node Protection1) for all the three ports.
At the same time, if you wish to set in mutual protection the LAN 4 of A.1, A.2 and A.3, you must enable
the node ELP functionality for all the above mentioned ports but not using the protection group Node
Protection1, which would insert the LAN 4 ports in the same protection group of the LAN 3 ports, but using
instead the group Node Protection2. In this way, a second node protection group is created, independent
from the first one.
The parameters, which determine which LAN among those in protection must be set as operating, ar